XI-JEE M-3 Mathematics Final

Vedantu’s
Vedantu’s Tatva
Vedantu’s Tatva Practice
TatvaPractice
Practice Book Book
Book| |Biology
Physics - Vol.
- Vol. 2 !
Mathematics
Genetics
Evolution
and
Volume 3 Class 11 JEE
Class 11 JEE
SCAN
SCAN CODE
CODE
to
to know how
know how to
to
use
use this
this Book
Book
Published by
Vedantu Innovations Pvt. Ltd.
D. No. 1081, 3rd Floor, Vistar Arcade,
14th Main Rd, Sector 3, HSR Layout
Bangalore, Karnataka, India 560 102
www.vedantu.com
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information
storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publishers.
Notice: Vedantu is committed to serving students with the best resources and knowledge.
Bearing that in mind, we have obtained all the information in this book from sources regarded
as reliable, and taken utmost care in editing and printing this book. However, as authors and
publishers, we are not to be held responsible for unintentional mistakes that might have crept
in. Having stated that, errors (if any) brought to our notice shall be gratefully acknowledged
and rectiﬁed in upcoming editions.
Printed by
LASERPRINTS
Quality - Ethics - Service
H-4 (a), Electronic Complex, Road No.1 IPIA, Kota
(Rajasthan) INDIA
Phones : 0744-2436941Mobile : 9829037941
*Mail ID : laserpr@gmail.com, laser1prints@gmail.com
MASTER INDEX
VOLUME 1:
Quadratic Equations
Complex Numbers
Sequence and Series
Straight Lines
VOLUME 2:
Sets, Relations & Function
Limits and Derivatives
Trigonometry
Statistics
VOLUME 3:
Circles
Conic Sections
Binomial Theorem
Permutation and Combination
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CIRCLES
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 7
Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 12
Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 17
Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 24
Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 32
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 128
CONIC SECTIONS
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 39
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 130

5
BINOMIAL THEOREM
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 83
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 132
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 104
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 134

09
CIRCLES
Chapter 09 7
CIRCLES
A circle is a locus of a point whose distance from a fixed point

2. INTERCEPTS MADE BY A CIRCLE ON THE AXES
(called centre) is always constant (called radius).
The intercepts made by the circle x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
1. STANDARD EQUATION OF CIRCLE
on the co-ordinate axes are 2 g 2  c and 2 f 2  c
(a) The circle with centre as origin & radius 'r' has the equation;
x² + y² = r². respectively.
(b) The circle with centre (h, k) & radius 'r' has the equation; If :
(x – h)² + (y – k)² = r²
g² – c > 0 circle cuts the x axis at two distinct points.
(c) The general equation of a circle is
g² – c = 0 circle touches the x–axis
x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 with centre as (–g, –f) and
g² – c < 0 circle lies completely above or below the
radius = 2 2
g  f  c . If : x–axis.
g2 + f 2 – c > 0  real circle.

g2 + f 2 – c = 0  point circle 3. PARAMETRIC EQUATIONS OF A CIRCLE
g2 + f 2 – c < 0  imaginary circle, with real
The parametric equations of (x – h)² + (y – k)² = r² are :
centre, that is (–g, –f)
x = h + r cos  ; y = k + r sin  ; – < < 
NOTES : where (h, k) is the centre, r is the radius &  is a parameter.
Every second degree equation in x & y, in which coefficient of

x² is equal to coefficient of y² & the coefficient of xy is zero,
4. POSITION OF A POINT WITH RESPECT
always represents a circle. TO A CIRCLE
(d) The equation of circle with (x1, y1) & (x2, y2) as extremities of The point (x1,y1) is inside, on or outside the
its diameter is :
circle S x1² + y1² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0.
(x – x1) (x – x2) + (y – y1) (y – y2) = 0.
Note that this will be the circle of least radius passing through
(x1, y1) & (x2, y2).
(e) Equation of circle passing through origin is
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy = 0
according as S1  x1² + y1² + 2gx1 + 2fy1 + c <, = or > 0.
(f) Equation of circle touching x-axis is
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + g2 = 0
NOTES :
(g) Equation of circle touching y-axis is
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + f2 = 0 The greatest & the least distance of a point A from a circle with
(h) Equation of circle touching both axes is centre C & radius r is AC + r & AC – r respectively.
x2 + y2 ± 2ax ± 2ay + a2 = 0
SCAN CODE
Circles
CIRCLES
8
(c) Parametric form :

5. LINE AND A CIRCLE
The equation of a tangent to circle x² + y² = a² at
Let L = 0 be a line & S = 0 be a circle. If r is the radius of the (a cos , a sin ) is : x cos+ y sin = a.
circle & p is the length of the perpendicular from the centre
on the line, then: NOTES :
(i) p>r  the line does not meet the circle, i.e,
passes outside the circle. The point of intersection of the tangents at the points P() &
Q() is :
(ii) p=r  the line touches the circle.
(It is tangent to the circle)      
(iii) p < r  the line is a secant of the circle.  a cos 2 a sin
2 
 , 
     
(iv) p = 0  the line is a diameter of the circle.  cos cos 
 2 2 
Also, if y = mx + c is line and x² + y² = a² is circle then.
(i) c² < a² (1 + m²)  the line is a secant of the circle.
(ii) c² = a²(1 + m²)  the line touches the circle.
7. PAIR OF TANGENTS FROM A POINT
(It is tangent to the circle) The combined equation of a pair of tangents drawn from the
(iii) c² > a²(1 + m²)  the line does not meet the point A (x1, y1) to the circle x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is :
circle i.e. passes out side the circle. SS1 = T²
Where S  x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c ;
6. TANGENT S1 = x12 + y12 + 2gx1 + 2fy1 + c
(a) Slope form : T  xx1 + yy1 + g(x + x1) + f(y + y1) + c
y = mx + c is always a tangent to the circle x² + y² = a²

if c² = a² (1 + m²).
8. LENGTH OF A TANGENT AND POWER OF A POINT
2 The length of a tangent from an external point (x1, y1) to the

Hence, equation of tangent is y = mx ± a 1  m and the
circle :
 a 2m a 2  S  x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is given by
point of contact is   c , c , where c = ± a 1  m .
2
 
L  x12  y12  2gx1  2fy1  c  S1
(b) Point form :
Square of length of the tangent from the point P is also
(i) The equation of the tangent to the circle x² + y² = a² called the power of point w.r.t. a circle. Power of a point w.r.t
at its point (x1, y1) is, x x1 + y y1 = a². a circle remains constant.
(ii) The equation of the tangent to the circle Power of a point P is positive, negative or zero according
x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 at its point (x1, y1) is : as the point 'P' is outside, inside or on the circle respectively.
xx1 + yy1 + g (x + x1) + f(y + y1) + c = 0.
9. DIRECTOR CIRCLE
NOTES :
The locus of the point of intersection of two perpendicular
In general, the equation of tangent to any second degree tangents is called the director circle of the given circle. The
curve at point (x1, y1) on it can be obtained by replacing director circle of a circle is the concentric circle having
x  x1 radius equal to 2 times the original circle.

x 2 by xx1 , y 2 by yy1 , x by ,
2 Equation of circle concentric with x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is
y  y1 x y  xy1 x 2  y 2  2 gx  2 fy  k  0
y by , xy by 1 and c remains as c.
2 2
SCAN CODE
Circles
CIRCLES
9
10. CHORD OF CONTACT 12. EQUATION OF THE CHORD JOINING TWO

POINTS OF CIRCLE
If two tangents PT1 & PT2 are drawn from the point
P (x1, y1) to the circle S  x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0, then the The equation of chord PQ of the circle x² + y² = a²
equation of the chord of contact T1T2 is : joining two points P() and P() on it is given by.
xx1 + yy1 + g(x + x1) + f(y + y1) + c = 0., i.e., T = 0
αβ αβ αβ
xcos  ysin  acos
T1
2 2 2
L R
O 13. NORMAL
P
T2 If a line is normal /orthogonal to a circle then it must pass
through the centre of the circle. Using this fact equation of
Here R = radius, L = Length of tangent. normal to x2 + y2 = a2 at (x1, y1) is
(a) Chord of contact exists only if the point 'P' is not inside.
x y

2LR x1 y1
(b) Length of chord of contact T1T2 =
R 2  L2 Also,
Equation of normal to the circle x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c
(c) Area of the triangle formed by the pair of the tangents
= 0 at (x1, y1) is ;
RL3
& its chord of contact = 2 y1  f
R  L2 y  y1  x  x1 
x1  g
(d) Tangent of the angle between the pair of tangents from
 2RL 
(x1, y1) =  2  14. COMMON TANGENTS TO TWO CIRCLES
 L  R2 
(e) Equation of the circle circumscribing the triangle CASE NUMBEROF CONDITION
PT1 T2 is : (x – x1) (x + g) + (y – y1) (y + f) = 0. TANGENTS
(i) 4 common tangents r1 + r2 < C1C2.
11. EQUATION OF THE CHORD WITH A GIVEN
MIDDLE POINT
The equation of the chord of the circle

(ii) 3 common tangents r1 + r2 = C1C2.
S  x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 in terms of its mid point
M(x 1 , y 1 ) is xx1 + yy1 + g(x + x1) + f(y + y1) + c
= x12 + y12 + 2gx1 + 2fy1 + c which is designated by (iii) 2 common tangents | r1 – r2 |< C1C2 < r1 + r2
T = S1.
NOTES :
(iv) 1 common tangent |r1 – r2| = C1C2.
(i) The shortest chord of a circle passing through a point 'M'
inside the circle is one chord whose middle point is M.
(ii) The chord passing through a point 'M' inside the circle (v) No common tangent. C1C2 < | r1 – r2|
and which is at a maximum distance from the centre is a
chord with middle point M. (Here C1C2 is distance between centres of two circles.)
SCAN CODE
Circles
CIRCLES
10
NOTES : 17. RADICAL AXIS AND RADICAL CENTRE

(i) The direct common tangents meet at a point which The radical axis of two circles is the locus of points whose
divides the line joining centre of circles externally in the powers w.r.t. the two circles are equal. The equation of radical
ratio of their radii. axis of the two circles S1 = 0 & S2 = 0 is given by :
Transverse common tangents meet at a point which S1 – S2 = 0
divides the line joining centre of circles internally in the i.e. 2(g1 – g2)x + 2(f1 – f2)y + (c1 – c2) = 0
ratio of their radii.
The common point of intersection of the radical axes of
(ii) Length of an external (or direct) common tangent & three circles taken two at a time is called the radical centre
internal (or transverse) common tangent to the two of three circles. Note that the length of tangents from radical
centre to the three circles are equal.
circles are given by : L ext .  d 2  (r1  r2 ) 2 and
NOTES :
2 2
L int .  d  (r1  r2 ) , where d = distance between the
(a) If two circles intersect, then the radical axis is the common
centres of the two circles and r1, r2 are the radii of the two
chord of the two circles.
circles. Note that length of internal common tangent is
always less than the length of the external or direct (b) If two circles touch each other then the radical axis is the
common tangent of the two circles at the common point
common tangent.
of contact.
15. ANGLE OF INTERSECTION OF TWO CIRCLES (c) Radical axis is always perpendicular to the line joining the
centres of the two circles.
Angle between two circle is the angle between their tangents (d) Radical axis will pass through the mid point of the line
at their point of intersection which is given by: joining the centres of the two circles only if the two circles
have equal radii.
d 2 –  r12  r22 
cos  = , where d is distance between (e) Radical axis bisects a common tangent between the two
2r1r2
circles.
centres of two circles. (f) A system of circles, every two of which have the same
radical axis, is called a coaxial system.
16. ORTHOGONALITY OF TWO CIRCLES (g) Pairs of circles which do not have radical axis are
concentric.
Two circles S1 = 0 & S2 = 0 are said to be orthogonal or said
to intersect orthogonally if the tangents at their point of (h) The centre of a variable circle orthogonal to two fixed
intersection include a right angle. The condition for two circles lies on the radical axis of two circles.
circles to be orthogonal is : (i) The centre of a circle which is orthogonal to three given
circles is the radical centre provided the radical centre lies
2g1g2 + 2 f1f2 = c1 + c2. or r12  r22  d 2
outside all the three circles.
SCAN CODE
Circles
CIRCLES
11
18. FAMILY OF CIRCLES NOTES :
(a) The equation of the family of circles passing  Family of circles circumscribing a triangle whose sides
through the points of intersection of two circles are given by L1 = 0; L2 = 0 and L3 = 0 is given by ;
S1 = 0 and S2 = 0 is : S1 + K S2 = 0 L1L2 +  L2L3 +  L3L1 = 0 provided co-efficient of xy = 0
(K  –1, provided the co-efficient of x2 & y2 in and co-efficient of x² = co-efficient of y².
S1 & S2 are same)  Equation of circle circumscribing a quadrilateral
(b) The equation of the family of circles passing through whose side in order are represented by the lines
the point of intersection of a circle S = 0 & a line L1 = 0, L2 = 0, L3 = 0 & L4 = 0 are  L1L3 + L2L4 = 0 where
L = 0 is given by S + KL = 0. value of and  can be found out by using condition
that co-efficient of x2 = co-efficient of y2 and co-efficient
(c) The equation of a family of circles passing through
of xy = 0.
two given points (x1, y1) & (x2, y2) can be written in
the form :
x y 1
(x – x1) (x – x2) + (y – y1) (y – y2) + K x 1 y 1 1  0 where
x2 y2 1
K is a parameter.
(d) The equation of a family of circles touching a
fixed line y – y1 = m(x – x 1) at the fixed point
(x1, y1) is
(x – x1)2 + (y – y1)2 + K[y – y1 – m (x – x1)] = 0 where

K is a parameter.
SCAN CODE
Circles
CIRCLES 12
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

The general form of the equation of a circle 7. Centre of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y + 1 = 0 is –
(a) (–1, 2) (b) (1, –2)
1. The equation ax2 + by2 + 2hxy + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 represents
(c) (1, 2) (d) (–1, –2)
a circle only if
8. The equation of a circle which passes through the three
(a) a = b, h = 0
points (3, 0), (1, –6), (4, –1) is-
(b) a = b  0, h = 0
(a) 2x2 + 2y2 + 5x – 11y + 3 = 0
(c) a = b  0, h = 0, g2 + f2 – c > 0
(b) x2 + y2 – 5x + 11y – 3 = 0
(d) a = b  0, h = 0, g2 + f2 – ac > 0
(c) x2 + y2 + 5x – 11y + 3 = 0
2. Equation of the circle which passes through the centre of
the circle x2 + y2 + 8x + 10y – 7 = 0 and is concentric with the (d) 2x2 + 2y2 – 5x + 11y – 3 = 0
circle 2x2 + 2y2– 8x – 12y – 9 = 0 is 9. The equation of the circle which touches the axis of y at
2 2
(a) x + y – 4x – 8y – 97 = 0 the origin and passes through (3, 4) is-
(b) x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y – 87 = 0 (a) 4 (x2 + y2) – 25x = 0
(c) x2 + y2 – 2x – 8y – 95 = 0 (b) 3 (x2 + y2) – 25x = 0
(d) None of these (c) 2 (x2 + y2) – 3x = 0
3. Equation of a circle concentric with the circle (d) 4 (x2 + y2) – 25x + 10 = 0
2x2 + 2y2 – 6x + 8y + 1 = 0 and of double its area is 10. The length of the diameter of the circle which touches the
2 2
(a) 2x + 2y – 12x + 16y + 1 = 0 x-axis at the point (1, 0) and passes through the point (2, 3)
is
(b) 4x2 + 4y2 – 3x + 16y + 2 = 0
(c) 4x2 + 4y2 – 12x + 16y – 21 = 0 10 3
(a) (b)
(d) None of these 3 5
4. The equation of a circle which passes through the
point (1, –2) and (4, –3) and whose centre lies on the 6 5
(c) (d)
line 3x + 4 y = 7 is 5 3
(a) 15 (x2 + y2) – 94 x + 18 y – 55 = 0 11. The equation of the circle touches y axis and having centre
(b) 15 (x2 + y2) – 94 x + 18 y + 55 = 0 (–2, –3) is
(c) 15 (x2 + y2) + 94 x – 18 y + 55 = 0 (a) x2 + y2 – 4x – 9y – 4 = 0
(d) none of these (b) x2 + y2 + 4x + 9y + 4 = 0
5. Two vertices of an equilateral triangle are (–1, 0) and (c) x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y + 9 = 0
(1, 0), and its third vertex lies above the x-axis. Then the (d) x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y – 9 = 0
equation of the circumcircle of the triangle is :
Diametric form of a circle
(a) x2 + y2 = 1
(b) 3 (x2 + y2) + 2y – 3 = 0 12. The abscissae and ordinates of the points A and B are the
roots of the equations x 2 + 2ax + b = 0 and
(c) 3 (x2 + y2) – 2y – 3 = 0 x2 + 2cx + d = 0 respectively, then the equation of circle with
(d) none of these AB as diameter is
6. Equation of the circle of radius 5 whose centre lies on (a) x2 + y2 + 2ax + 2cy + b + d = 0
y-axis in first quadrant and passes through (3, 2) is
(b) x2 + y2 – 2ax – 2cy – b – d = 0
(a) x2 + y2 – 12y + 11 = 0 (b) x2 + y2 – 6y – 1 = 0
(c) x2 + y2 – 2ax – 2cy + b + d = 0
2 2
(c) x + y – 8y + 3 = 0 (d) None of these (d) x2 + y2 + 2ax + 2cy – b – d = 0
CIRCLES 13
13. A point A(2, 1) is outside the circle
   
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 & AP, AQ are tangents to the 19. If the point   5  , 3   is an interior point of
 2 2
circle. The equation of the circle circumscribing the triangle
the larger segement of the circles x2 + y2 = 16 cut off by the
APQ is :
line x + y = 2, then
(a) (x + g) (x – 2) + (y + f) (y – 1) = 0
(b) (x + g) (x – 2) – (y + f) (y – 1) = 0

(a)   ,5 2 
(c) (x – g) (x + 2) + (y – f) (y + 1) = 0

(b)   4 2  14, 5 2 
(d) none of these
14. The intercept on the line y = x by the circle x2 + y2 – 2x = 0 is 
(c)   4 2  14, 4 2  14 
AB. Equation of the circle on AB as a diameter is (d) none of these
(a) x2 + y2 + x + y = 0 (b) x2 + y2 – x + y = 0 20. The point (sin , cos ), being any real number, lie inside
(c) x2 + y2 – x – y = 0 (d) x2 + y2 + x – y = 0 the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y +  = 0, if
Intercept made by a circle (a)  1  2 2 (b)   2 2 1
15. A circle touches x axis at +3 distance and cuts an intercept (c)   –1– 2 2 (d)  1  2 2
of 8 in +ve direction of y axis. Its equation is– 21. The co-ordinate of the point on the circle
(a) x2 + y2 + 6x + 10y – 9 = 0 x2 + y2 – 12x – 4y + 30 = 0, which is farthest from the origin
are:
(b) x2 + y2 – 6x – 10y – 9 = 0
(a) (9, 3) (b) (8, 5)
(c) x2 + y2 – 6x – 10y + 9 = 0
(c) (12, 4) (d) none of these
(d) x2 + y2 + 6x + 10y + 9 = 0
Condition of tangency in circle
16. The equation to a circle passing through the origin and
cutting of intercepts each equal to 5 of the axes is- 22. The equation of circle with centre (1, 2) and tangent
x + y – 5 = 0 is
(a) x2 + y2 + 5x – 5y = 0
(a) x2 + y2 + 2x – 4y + 6 = 0
(b) x2 + y2 – 5x + 5y = 0
(b) x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y + 3 = 0
(c) x2 + y2 – 5x – 5y = 0 (c) x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y + 8 = 0
(d) x2 + y2 + 5x + 5y = 0 (d) x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y + 8 = 0
17. The circle x2 + y2 – 3x – 4y + 2 = 0 cuts x-axis at 23. The equation of the incircle of the triangle formed by the
axes and the line 4x + 3y = 6 is
(a) (2, 0), (–3, 0) (b) (3, 0), (4, 0)
(a) x2 + y2 – 6x – 6y + 9 = 0
(c) (1, 0), (–1, 0) (d) (1, 0), (2, 0)
(b) 4(x2 + y2 – x – y) + 1 = 0
Position of a point wrt circle (c) 4(x2 + y2 + x + y) + 1 = 0
(d) none of these
18. The range of values of     for which
24. The line 3x – 2y = k meets the circle x2 + y2 = 4r2 at only one
(1 + cos , sin ) is on interior points of the circle
point, if k2 is
x2 + y2 = 1, is
(a) 20r2 (b) 52r2
(a)  (b) 
52 2 20 2
(c)  (d)  (c) r (d) r
9 9
CIRCLES 14
Equation of tangents in circle 32. The centre of the circle passing through (0, 0) and (1, 0)
and touching the circle x2 + y2 = 9 is
25. The angle between the tangents to the circle x2 + y2 = 25 at
(3, 4) and (4, –3) is : 1 1 1 
(a)  ,  (b)  , 2 
 2 2  2 

(a) (b)
2 3
3 1 1 3
(c)  ,  (d)  , 
  2 2 2 2
(c) (d)
4 6
Family of circle
26. The equation of the tangents to the circle x2 + y2 = 4, which
are parallel to x + 2y + 3 = 0, are 33. The circle passing through (1, –2) and touching the axis of
x at (3, 0) also passes through the point
(a) x – 2y = 2 (b) x  2y   2 3
(a) (–5, 2) (b) (2, –5)
(c) x  2y   2 5 (d) x  2y   2 5 (c) (5, –2) (d) (–2, 5)
27. The equations of the tangents to the circle 34. The equation of the circle passing through (1, –3) & the
x2 + y2 – 6x + 4y – 12 = 0 which are parallel to the line points common to the two circle,
4x + 3y + 5 = 0, are 2 2 2 2
x + y – 6x + 8y – 16 = 0, x + y + 4x – 2y – 8 = 0 is.
(a) 4x + 3y + 11 = 0 and 4x + 3y + 8 = 0 (a) x2 + y2 – 4x + 6y + 24 = 0
(b) 4x + 3y – 9 = 0 and 4x + 3y + 7 = 0 (b) 2x2 + 2y2 + 3x + y – 20 = 0
(c) 4x + 3y + 19 = 0 and 4x + 3y – 31 = 0 (c) 3x2 + 3y2 – 5x + 7y – 19 = 20
(d) 4x + 3y – 10 = 0 and 4x + 3y + 12 = 0 (d) none of these
28. If the equation of the tangent to the circle
35. The circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 3ky – 2 = 0 passes through the fixed
x2 + y2 – 2x + 6y – 6 = 0 parallel to 3x – 4y + 7 = 0 is
point :
3x – 4y + k = 0, then the values of k are
(a) 5, – 35 (b) –5, 35 
(a) 1 3 ,0  
(b)  1 3 ,0 
(c) 7, –32 (d) –7, 32
29. The equation of a tangent to the circle x2 + y2 = 25 passing (c)   3  1,1  (d) 1  3,1
through (–2, 11) is 36. If y = 2x is a chord of the circle x2 + y2 = 10x, then the
(a) 4x + 3y = 25 (b) 7x – 24y = 320 equation of the circle whose diameter is this chord is
(c) 3x + 4y = 38 (d) 24x + 7y + 125 = 0 (a) x2 + y2 + 2x + 4y = 0 (b) x2 + y2 + 2x – 4y = 0
Common tangents (c) x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y = 0 (d) None of these
37. If the line y =x +3 meets the circle x2 + y2 = a2 at A and B,
30. The set of all real values of  for which exactly two common
then the equation of the circle having AB as a diameter will be-
tangents can be drawn to the circles
(a) x2 + y2 + 3x – 3y – a2 + 9 = 0
x2 + y2 - 4x - 4y + 6 = 0 and x2 + y2 - 10x - 10y +  = 0 is the
(b) x2 + y2 + 3x + 3y – a2 + 9 = 0
interval:
(a) (12, 32) (b) (18, 42) (c) x2 + y2 – 3x + 3y – a2 + 9 = 0
(c) (12, 24) (d) (18, 48) (d) None of these
31. For the two circles x2 + y2 = 16 and x2 + y2 - 2y = 0, there is/ 38. The equation of the circle described on the chord
are: 3x + y + 5 = 0 of the circle x2 + y2 = 16 as diameter is
(a) one pair of common tangents (a) x2 + y2 + 3x + y - 11 = 0
(b) two pairs of common tangents (b) x2 + y2 + 3x + y +1 = 0
(c) three common tangents (c) x2 + y2 + 3x + y - 2 = 0
(d) no nommon tangent (d) x2 + y2 + 3x + y - 22 = 0
CIRCLES 15
Chords of a circle Position of two circles with respect to each other
39. If the chord y = mx + 1 of the circle x2 + y2 = 1 subtends an 45. The circles x2 + y2 + 2x – 2y + 1 = 0 and
angle of measure 45° at the major segment of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y + 1 = 0 touch each other
then value of m is
(a) externally at (0,1) (b) internally at (0,1)
(a) 2  2 (b)  2  2 (c) externally at (1,0) (d) internally at (1,0)
(c)  1 2 (d) ±1 46. If the two circles (x – 1)2 + (y – 3)2 = r2 and

x2 + y2 – 8x + 2y + 8 = 0 intersect in two distinct points,
40. Let C be the circle with centre (0, 0) and radius 3 units. The
then
equation of the locus of the mid points of chord of the
circle C that subtend an angle of 2/3 at its centre is (a) r < 2 (b) r = 2
(c) r > 2 (d) 2 < r < 8
3
(a) x2 + y2 = (b) x2 + y2 = 1 47. Let C be the circle with centre at (1, 1) and radius = 1. If T
2
is the circle centred at (0, y), passing through origin and
27 9 touching the circle C externally, then the radius of T is
(c) x2 + y2 = (d) x2 + y2 = equal to :
4 4
41. If two distinct chords, drawn from the point (p, q) on the 1 3
circle x2 + y2 = px + qy (where pq  0) are bisected by the (a) (b)
4 2
x-axis, then :
(a) p2 = q2 (b) p2 = 8q2 3 1
(c) (d)
(c) p2 < 8q2 (d) p2 > 8q2 2 2
Pair of tangents in circle 48. The centre of a circle passing through the points (0, 0),
(1, 0) and touching the circle x2 + y2 = 9 is :
42. The equation of tangent drawn from the origin to the circle (a) (3/2, 1/2) (b) (1/2, 3/2)
x2 +y2 –2rx –2hy + h2 =0 is-
(a) y = 0 (b) x – y =0 1 
(c) (1/2, 1/2) (d)   2 
(c) (h2 – r2) x – 2rhy =0 (d) None of these  2 
43. The angle between the tangents from () to the circle 49. The circles x2 + y2 + 6x + 6y = 0 and x2 + y2 – 12x – 12y =0
x2 + y2 = a2 is – (a) touch each other internally
(b) touch each other externally
 a 
1 
 a 
(a) tan  (b) 2 tan1   (c) intersect in two points
 S   S 
 1   1
(d) cut orthogonally
50. The two circles x2 + y2 – 2x + 6y + 6 = 0 and
 S1 
1 
(c) 2 tan  (d) None of these x2 + y2 –5x + 6y + 15 = 0
 a 
  (a) intersect (b) are concentric
Where S1 = – a2 (c) touch internally (d) touch externally
44. If from any point P on the circle x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 51. Which of the following statements is true regarding the
tangents are drawn to the circle following two circles ?
x2 +y2 +2gx +2fy + csin2+ (g2 + f 2) cos2 = 0, x2 + y2 – 4x – 8y = 0 and x2 + y2 – 8x – 6y + 20 = 0
(is acute) then the angle between the tangents is : (a) These circles do not touch each other
(a)  (b) 2  (b) These circles touch each other internally
 (c) These circles touch each other externally
(c) (d) none of these
2 (d) None of these
CIRCLES 16
52. The locus of the centre of a circle, which touches externally Numerical Value Type Questions
the circle x2 +y2 –6x –6y +14 =0 and also touches the
y-axis is given by the equation : 57. The radius of the circle passing through the points
(1, 2), (5, 2) & (5, –2) is :
(a) x2 – 6x – 10y + 14 = 0 (b) x2 – 10x – 6y + 14 = 0
58. The greatest distance of the point P (10, 7) from the circle
(c) y2 – 6x – 10y + 14 = 0 (d) y2 – 10x – 6y + 14 = 0
x2 + y2 – 4x –2y – 20 = 0 is-
Misc examples-circles 59. The length of intercept on y-axis, by a circle whose diameter
is the line joining the points (–4, 3) & (12, –1) is-
53. The centre of the circle passing through the point (0,1)
and touching the curve y = x2 at (2, 4) is : 60. The circle x2 + y2 + 4x – 7y + 12 = 0 cuts an intercept on y-
axis which is equal to
 16 27   16 53  61. The length of the chord of the circle (x – 3)2 + (y – 5)2 = 80
(a)   ,  (b)   , 
 5 10   7 10  cut off by the line 3x – 4y – 9 = 0 is
62. The value of |c| for which the line y = 2x + c is a tangent to
 16 53  the circle x2 + y2 = 16, is
(c)   ,  (d) none of these
 5 10  63. The square of the length of the tangent from (3, –4) to the
54. For the circle x2 + y2 +4x –7y +12 =0 the following statement circle x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y + 3 = 0 is
is true- 64. Let A be the centre of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y – 20 = 0,
(a) the length of tangent from (1, 2) is 7 and B (1,7) and D (4, –2) are points on the circle then, if
tangents be drawn at B and D, which meet at C, then area
(b) Intercept on y-axis is 2
of quadrilateral ABCD is-
(c) intercept on x-axis is 2– 2 65. The area of the triangle formed by the tangents from the
(d) None of these point (4, 3) to the circle x² + y² = 9 and the line joining their
point of contact is :
55. The line joining (5, 0) to (10 cos, 10 sin) is divided
internally in the ratio 2 : 3 at P. If varies then the locus of 66. The angle between the two tangents from the origin to the
P is : circle (x – 7)² + (y + 1)² = 25 equals :
(a) a pair of straight lines (b) a circle 67. The number of common tangents that can be drawn to two
circles x2 + y2 = 6x and x2 + y2 + 6x + 2y + 1 = 0 is
(c) a straight line (d) none of these
68. The number of common tangents to the circles
56. The centres of a set of circles, each of radius 3, lie on the
circle x2 + y2 = 25. The locus of any point in the set is x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y + 1 = 0 and x2 + y2 – 12x – 16y + 91 = 0 is
(a) 4  x2 + y2  64 (b) x2 + y2  25 69. The value of , for which the circle
(c) x2 + y2  25 (d) 3  x2 + y2  9 x2 + y2 + 2x + 6y + 1 = 0 inersects the circle

x2 + y2 + 4x + 2y = 0 orthogonally, is
70. The value of k for which the circles x2 + y2 + 5x + 3y + 7 = 0
and x2 + y2 – 8x + 6y + k = 0 intersects orthogonally.
CIRCLES 17
EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

Questions marked with asterisk (*) are
4 *. Two tangents are drawn from the point P  1,1 to the
deleted from JEE Main
circle x 2  y 2  2x  6y  6  0 . If these tangents touch
1. Let r1 and r2 be the radii of the largest and smallest circles,
the circle at points A and B, and if D is a point on the circle
respectively, which pass through the point  4,1 and
such that length of the segments AB and AD are equal,
having their centres on the circumference of the circle then the area of the triangle ABD is eqaul to:
r1 (27-07-2021/Shift-1)
x 2  y 2  2x  4y  4  0. If  a  b 2, then a  b is
r2
equal to ? (20-07-2021/Shift-2)
(a) 2 
(b) 3 2  2 
(a) 3 (b) 11
(c) 5 (d) 7
(c) 4 (d) 3  2 1
2. Let P and Q be two distinct points on a circle which has 5. Consider a circle C which touches the y-axis at (0, 6) and
center at C  2,3 and which passes through origin O, If cuts off an intercept 6 5 on the x-axis. Then the radius of
OC is perpendicular to both the line segments CP and CQ, the circle C is equal to: (27-07-2021/Shift-2)
then the set P,Q is equal to: (27-07-2021/Shift-1)
(a) 82 (b) 9
(a)  1, 5  ,  5,1 (c) 8 (d) 53
(b)  2  2 
2,3  5 , 2  2 2,3  5  6. Let the circle 36x 2  36y2  108x  120y  C  0 be such
that it neither intersects nor touches the co-ordinate axes.
(c)  2  2 
2,3  5 , 2  2 2,3  5  If the point of intersection of the lines, x  2y  4 and
2x  y  5 lies inside the circle S, then :

(d)  4, 0  ,  0, 6 
(22-07-2021/Shift-2)
3. Let
25 13
(a) 100  C  156 (b) C
A  { x, y   R  R | 2x  2y  2x  2y  1},
2 2
9 3
B  { x, y   R  R | 4x 2  4y 2  16y  7  0} and (c) 81  C  156 (d) 100  C  165
7. A circle C touches the line x  2y at the point (2, 1) and

C  { x, y   R  R | x 2  y 2  4x  2y  5  r 2 }. 3
intersects the circle C1 : x 2  y 2  2y  5  0 at two point
Then the minimum value of r such that A  B  C is
P and Q such that PQ is a diameter of C1. Then the diameter
equal to: (27-07-2021/Shift-1)
of C is: (26-08-2021/Shift-2)
3  10
(a) (b) 1  5 (a) 285 (b) 4 15
2
(c) 15 (d) 7 5
2  10 3 2 5
(c) (d)
2 2
CIRCLES 18
Questions marked with asterisk (*) are   3 , where ,  are integers, then    is equal to
_______. (16-03-2021/Shift-1)
8. Let the equation x 2  y 2  px  1 – p  y  5  0 represent
14*. Let the tangent to the circle x 2  y 2  25 at the point R
circles of varying radius r   0, 5 . Then the number of (3, 4) meet x-axis and y-axis at points P and Q, respectively.
2 If r is the radius of the circle passing through the origin O
elements in the set S  { q : q  p and q is an integer} is
and having centre at the incentre of the triangle OPQ, then
_______. (27-08-2021/Shift-1)
r 2 is equal to : (17-03-2021/Shift-2)
9. The locus of a point, which moves such that the sum of
squares of its distances from the points  0, 0  , 1, 0  , 625 585

(a) (b)
72 66
 0, 1 , 1, 1 is 18 units, is a circle of diameter d. Then
d 2 is equal to _____. (26-08-2021/Shift-1) 529 125

(c) (d)
64 72
10. Two circles each of radius 5 units touch each other at the
point (1,2). If the equation of their common tangent is 15. Two tangents are drawn from a point P to the circle
4x  3y  10, and C1  ,   and C2  ,   , C1  C2 are
x 2  y 2  2x  4y  4  0, such that the angle between
their centres, then          is equal to.________.
 12   12 
these tangents is tan 1   , where tan 1    (0, ).
(27-08-2021/Shift-2)  5  5
11. If the variable line 3x  4y   lies between the two circles If the centre of the circle is denoted by C and these
tangents touch the circle at points A and B, then the ratio
 x  12   y  12  1 and  x  92   y  12  4,
of the areas of PAB and CAB is:
without intercepting a chord on either circle, then the sum
(17-03-2021/Shift-2)
of all the integral values of  is __________ ?
(a) 11 : 4 (b) 3 : 1
(31-08-2021/Shift-1)
12. Let the lengths of intercepts on x-axis and y-axis made by (c) 2 : 1 (d) 9 : 4
the circle x 2  y 2  ax  2ay  c  0, (a < 0) be 2 2 and 16. The line 2x  y  1  0 is a tangent to the circle at the point
(2, 5) and the centre of the circle lies on x  2y  4. Then,

2 5, respectively. Then the shortest distance from origin
to a tangent to this circle which is perpendicular to the line the radius of the circle is : (17-03-2021/Shift-1)
x + 2y = 0, is equal to : (16-03-2021/Shift-2)
(a) 3 5 (b) 5 3
(a) 7 (b) 6
(c) 5 4 (d) 4 5
(c) 11 (d) 10
13. Let ABCD be a square of side of unit length. Let a circle 17. Let B be the centre of the circle x 2  y 2  2x  4y  1  0.
C1 centered at A with unit radius is drawn. Another circle Let the tangents at two points P and Q on the circle
C 2 which touches C1 and the lines AD and AB are tangent  area APQ 
intersect at the point A(3, 1). Then 8    is
to it, is also drawn. Let a tangent line from the point C to
 area BPQ 
the circle C 2 meet the side AB at E. If the length of EB is
equal to ___ (31-08-2021/Shift-2)
CIRCLES 19
18. Choose the incorrect statement about the two circles whose 22. For the four circles M, N, O and P, following four equations
equations are given below : are given :
x 2  y 2  10 x  10 y  41  0 and 2 2
Circle M : x  y  1
x 2  y 2  16 x  10 y  80  0 (17-03-2021/Shift-1) 2 2
Circle N : x  y  2x  0
(a) Both circles pass through the centre of each other.

Circle O : x 2  y2  2x  2y  1  0
(b) Both circles’ centres lie inside region of one another.
(c) Circles have two intersection points. Circle P : x 2  y 2  2y  0
(d) Distance between two centres is the average of radii of
If the centre of circle M is joined with centre of the circle
both the circles.
N, further centre of circle N is joined with centre of the
19. The minimum distance between any two point P1 and P2 circle O, centre of circle O is joined with the centre of circle
while considering point P1 on one circle and point P2 on P and lastly, centre of circle P is joined with centre of circle
the other circle for the given circles’ equations M, then these lines form the sides of a :
(18-03-2021/Shift-1)
x 2  y2  10x  10y  41  0
(a) Rhombus (b) Rectangle
2 2
x  y  24x  10y  160  0 is ………….. . (c) Parallelogram (d) Square
(17-03-2021/Shift-1) 23. Let a point P be such that its distance from the point (5, 0)
is thrice the distance of P from the point (-5, 0). If the locus
2 2 2 2 2
20. Let S1 : x  y  9 and S2 : (x  2)  y  1. Then the of the point P is a circle of radius r, then 4r is equal to
_____. (24-02-2021/Shift-2)
locus of centre of a variable circle S which touches S1
24. If the area of the triangle formed by the positive x-axis, the
internally and S2 externally always passes through the 2 2
normal and the tangent to the circle (x – 2) + (y – 3) = 25
points : (18-03-2021/Shift-2)
at the point (5, 7) is A, then 24A is equal to
1 5 (24-02-2021/Shift-2)
(a)  2 ,  2  (b) (0,  3)
  25. If one of the diameters of the circle
x 2  y 2  2x  6y  6  0 is a chord of another circle ‘C’.

 3
(c)  2,   (d) (1,  2) whose center is at (2, 1), then its radius is_______.
 2
(24-02-2021/Shift-1)
21. Choose the correct statement about two circles whose
equations are given below : 26. Let A 1, 4  and B 1,  5  be two points. Let P be a point
x 2  y 2  10x  10y  41  0 on the circle  x  12   y  12  1 such that
x 2  y2  22x  10y  137  0 (18-03-2021/Shift-1)  PA 2   PB2 have maximum value, then the points, P,,
(a) circles have same centre A and B lie on: (26-02-2021/Shift-2)
(b) circles have no meeting point (a) an ellipse (b) a hyperbola
(c) circles have only one meeting point (c) a straight line (d) a parabola
(d) circles have two meeting points

CIRCLES 20
Questions marked with asterisk (*) are dy ax  by  a

31. Let  , where a , b, c are constants,
dx bx  cy  a
represent a circle passing through the point (2, 5).
27. Let x 2  y 2  Ax  By  C  0 be a circle passing
Then the shortest distance of the point (11, 6) from this
through (0, 6) and touching the parabola y  x 2 at (2, circle is : (JEE Main 2022)
4). Then A  C is equal to ................. . (a) 10 (b) 8
(JEE Main 2022) (c) 7 (d) 5
88 32. The set of values of k for which the circle
(a) 16 (b) C : 4 x 2  4 y 2  12 x  8 y  k  0 lies inside the fourth
5
(c) 72 (d) -8  1
quadrant and the point  1,   lies on or inside the
28. Let a circle C touch the lines L1 : 4 x  3 y  K1  0 and  3
circle C is : (JEE Main 2022)
L2 : 4 x  3 y  K 2  0, K1 , K 2  R. If a line passing  95 
(a) An empty set (b)  6, 
through the centre of the circle C intersects L1 at (–1,  9
 80   92 
2) and L2 at (3, –6), then the equation of the circle C (c)  ,10  (d)  9, 
9   9
is 33. If the tangents drawn at the point O (0, 0) and
P (1  5, 2) on the circle x 2  y 2  2 x  4 y  0
(JEE Main 2022)
intersect at the point Q, then the area of the triangle
(a) ( x  1)  ( y  2)  4
2 2
OPQ is equal to (JEE Main 2022)
3 5 42 5
(b) ( x  1)2  ( y  2)2  4 (a) (b)
2 2
(c) ( x  1) 2  ( y  2)2  16 53 5 73 5
(c) (d)
2 2
(d) ( x  1) 2  ( y  2)2  16
34. *Let the tangent to the circle C1 : x2  y 2  2 at the
29. A circle touches both the y-axis and the line x + y = 0. point M (–1, 1) intersect the circle
Then the locus of its centre is (JEE Main 2022) C2 : ( x  3)2  ( y  2) 2  5, at two distinct points A and
B. If the tangents to C 2 at the points A and B intersect
(a) y  2 x (b) x  2 y
at N, then the area of the triangle ANB is equal to :
(JEE Main 2022)
(c) y 2  x 2  2 xy (d) x 2  y 2  2 xy
1 2
(a) (b)
30. Let C be a circle passing through the points A(2, –1) 2 3
and B (3, 4). The line segment AB is not a diameter of 1 5
C. If r is the radius of C and its centre lies on the circle (c) (d)
13 6 3
( x  5) 2  ( y  1) 2  , then r 2 is equal to: 35. Let a triangle ABC be inscribed in the circle
2

(JEE Main 2022) x 2  2 ( x  y )  y 2  0 such that BAC  . If the
2
length of side AB is 2, then the area of the ABC is
equal to : (JEE Main 2022)
(a) 1 (b) 2
(c) 3 (d) 4
36. Let the abscissae of the two points P and Q on a circle
be the roots of x 2  4 x  6  0 and the ordinates of P
and Q b the roots of y 2  2 y  7  0. If PQ is a
65 diameter of the circle x 2  y 2  2ax  2by  c  0, then
(a) 32 (b)
2 the value of (a  b  c) is (JEE Main 2022)
61 (a) 12 (b) 13
(c) (d) 30
2 (c) 14 (d) 16
CIRCLES 21
43. A rectangle R with end points of the one of its dies as

37. If the circle x  y  2 gx  6 y  19 x  0, g , c  
2 2 (1, 2) and (3, 6) is inscribed in a circle. If the equation
passes through the point (6, 1) and its centre lies on the of a diameter of the circle is 2 x  y  4  0 , then the
line x  2cy  8 , then the length of intercept made by area of R is …………… (JEE Main 2022)
the circle on x-axis is (JEE Main 2022) 44. Let the lines y  2 x  11  7 7 and
(a) 11 (b) 4 2 y  x  2 11  6 7 be normal to a circle
(c) 3 (d) 2 23 2 2
C :  x  h    y  k   r 2 . If the line
38. A circle C1 passes through the origin O and has
5 77
diameter 4 on the positive x-axis. The line y  2 x 11 y  3x   11 is tangent to the circle C, then
3
gives a chord OA of a circle C1 . Let C 2 be the circle 2
the value of  5h  8k   5r 2 is equal to ............... .
with OA as a diameter. If the tangent to C 2 at the
(JEE Main 2022)
point A meets the x-axis at P and y-axis at Q, then QA
45. If one of the diameters of the circle
: AP is equal to : (JEE Main 2022)
(a) 1: 4 (b) 1: 5 x 2  y 2  2 2 x  6 2 y  14  0 is chord of the circle
2 2
(c) 2 : 5 (d) 1: 3
x  2 2  y  2 2  r 2 , then the value of r 2 is
11
39. Let C be the centre of the circle x 2  y 2  x  2 y  equal to (JEE Main 2022)
4 2 2
46. If the circles x  y  6 x  8 y  16  0 and
and P be a point on the circle. A line passes through
the point C, makes an angle of


with the line CP and  
x2  y2  2 3  3 x  x  2 4  6 y  
4
 k  6 3  8 6, k  0 , touch internally at the
intersects the circle at the points Q and R. Then the
2 2
area of the triangle PQR (in unit2) is: point P  ,   , then   3      6  is equal to
(JEE Main 2022)
…….. (JEE Main 2022)
(a) 2 (b) 2 2 47. Let the mirror image of a
    circle c1 : x 2  y 2  2 x  6 y    0 in line y  x  1 be
(c) 8 sin   (d) 8 cos  
8 8
c2 : 5 x 2  5 y 2  10 gx  10 fy  38  0 . If r is the radius
40. Let the tangents at two points A and B on the circle
of circle c2 , then   6r 2 is equal to ____.
x 2  y 2  4 x  3  0 meet at origin O (0, 0). Then the
(JEE Main 2022)
area of the triangle of OAB is (JEE Main 2022)
48. Let AB be a chord of length 12 of the circle
3 3 3 3
(a) (b) 2 2 169
2 4  x  2    y  1  . If tangents drawn to the
4
3 3
(c) (d) circle at points A and B intersect at the point P, then
2 3 4 3 five times the distance of point P from chord AB is
2 2
41. Let a circle C :  x  h    y  k   r 2 , k  0 , touch equal to ………… . (JEE Main 2022)
the x-axis at (1, 0). If the line x  y  0 intersects the 49. The locus of the mid points of the chords of the circle
2 2
circle C at P and Q such that the length of the chord C1 :  x  4    y  5   4 which subtend an angle i at
PQ is 2, then the value of h  k  r is equal to ___. the centre of the circle C1, is a circle of radius ri. If
(JEE Main 2022)  2
1  , 3  and r12  r22  r32 , then 2 is equal to
42. Let the abscissae of the two points P and Q be the 3 3
roots of 2 x2  rx  p  0 and the ordinates of P and Q (JEE Main 2023)
be the roots of x 2  sx  q  0 . If the equation of the  3
(a) (b)
4 4
circle described on PQ as diameter is
 
2 x  y
2 2
  11x  14 y  22  0 , then 2 r  s  2 q  p (c) (d)
6 2
is equal to (JEE Main 2022)
CIRCLES 22
Questions marked with asterisk (*) are 55. If the tangent at the points P and Q on the circle
9 
deleted from JEE Main x 2  y 2  2x  y  5 meet at the point R  , 2  , then
4 
50. The points of intersection of the line ax + by = 0, (ab)
the area of the triangle PQR is: (JEE Main 2023)
and the circle x 2  y 2  2x  0 are A (, 0) and B(1,
5 13
). The image of the circle with AB as a diameter in (a) (b)
4 8
the line x + y + 2 = 0 is: (JEE Main 2023)
13 5
(a) x 2  y 2  5x  5y  12  0 (c) (d)
4 8
(b) x 2  y 2  3x  5y  8  0 56. Let O be the origin and OP and OQ be the tangents to
(c) x 2  y 2  3x  3y  4  0 the circle x 2  y 2  6x  4y  8  0 at the points P and
(d) x 2  y 2  5x  5y  12  0 Q on it. If the circumcircle of the triangle OPQ passes
 1
51*. Let the tangents at the points, A (4, –11) and B (8, –5) through the point  ,  , then a value of  is
 2
on the circle x 2  y 2  3x  10y  15  0 , intersects at
(JEE Main 2023)
the point C. Then the radius of the circle, whose centre
3 1
is C and the line joining A and B is its tangent, is equal (a) (b)
2 2
to (JEE Main 2023)
5
3 3 (c) (d) 1
(a) (b) 2 13 2
4
57. A line segment AB of length  moves such that the
2 13 points A and B remain on the periphery of a circle of
(c) 13 (d)
3 radius . Then the locus of the point, that divides the
52. Let y = x + 2, 4y = 3x + 6 and 3y = 4x + 1 be three line segment AB in the ratio 2 : 3, is a circle of radius
tangent lines to the circle (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2. Then (JEE Main 2023)
h + k is equal to : (JEE Main 2023) 3 2
(a)  (b) 
(a) 5 
(b) 5 1  2  5 3
(c) 6 (d) 5 2 19 19
(c)  (d) 
5 7
53*. Let a circle C1 be obtained on rolling the circle
58. Let A be the point (1, 2) and B be any point on he
x 2  y 2  4x  6y  11  0 upwards 4 units on the
curve x2 + y2 = 16. If the centre of the locus of the
tangent T to it at the point (3, 2). Let C2 be the image point P, which divides the line segment AB in the ratio
of C1 in T. Let A and B be the centers of circles C1 and 3:2 is the point C(), then the length of the line
C2 respectively, and M and N be respectively the feet segment AC is (JEE Main 2023)
of perpendiculars drawn from A and B on the x-axis.
2 5 3 5
Then the area of the trapezium AMNB is: (a) (b)
5 5
(JEE Main 2023)

(a) 2 2  2   
(b) 4 1  2 (c)
6 5
5
(d)
4 5
5
(c) 3  2 2 (d) 2 1  2  59. Let the centre of a circle C be () and its radius
54. 2
The set of all values of a for which the line x + y = 0 r < 8. Let 3x + 4y = 24 and 3x – 4y = 32 be two
bisects two distinct chords drawn from a point tangents and 4x + 3y = l be a normal to C. Then
1 a 1 a       r  is equal to (JEE Main 2023)
P ,  on the circle (a) 5 (b) 6
 2 2 
(c) 7 (d) 9
2x  2y  1  a  x  1  a  y  0 is equal to:
2 2
(JEE Main 2023)

(a)  8,   (b)  4,  
(c)  0, 4  (d)  2, 12 
CIRCLES 23
60. The number of common tangents, to the circles 65. A circle passing through the point P() in the first
2 2 quadrant touches the two coordinate axes at the points
x  y  18x  15y  131  0 and
A and B. The point P is above the line AB. The point
x 2  y 2  6x  6y  7  0 . (JEE Main 2023)
Q on the line segment AB is the foot of perpendicular
(a) 2 (b) 1 from P on AB. If PQ is equal to 11 units, then the
(c) 4 (d) 3
value of  is ____. (JEE Main 2023)
61. Points P(–3, 2), Q (9, 10) and R(, 4) lie on a circle C
66. Consider a circle C1 : x 2  y 2  4x  2y    5 . Let its
with PR as its diameter. The tangents to C at the points
Q and R intersect at the point S. If S lies on the line mirror image in the line y = 2x + 1 be another circle
2x – ky = 1, then k is equal to ____. C2 : 5x 2  5y 2  10fx  10gy  36  0 . Let r be the
(JEE Main 2023) radius of C2. Then + r is equal to _____.
62. A circle with centre (2, 3) and radius 4 intersects the (JEE Main 2023)
line x + y = 3 at the points P and Q. If the tangents at P 67. Two circle in the first quadrant of radii r1 and r2 touch
and Q intersect at the point S(), then 4– 7 is the coordinate axes. Each of them cuts off an intercept
equal to ____. (JEE Main 2023)
of 2 units with the line x + y = 2. Then r12  r22  r1r2 is
63. Let P  a1 , b1  and Q  a 2 , b 2  be two distinct points on a
equal to (JEE Main 2023)
circle with center C  
2, 3 . Let O be the origin and
OC be perpendicular to both CP anc CQ. If the area of
35
the triangle OCP is , then a12  a 22  b12  b22 is
2
64. Let the point (p, p + 1) lie inside the region
E  x, y  : 3  x  y  
9  x2 , 0  x  3 .
If the set of all values of p is the interval (a, b), then

b2 + b – a2 is equal to _____. (JEE Main 2023)
CIRCLES 24
EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 8. The equation of the circle passing through (1, 1) and
the points of intersection of x2 + y2 + 13 x – 3y = 0 and
1. A circle and a square have the same perimeter. Then 2x2 + 2y2 + 4x – 7y – 25 = 0 is :
(a) their areas are equal (a) 4x2 + 4y2 – 30x – 10 y = 25
(b) the area of the circle is large (b) 4x2 + 4y2 + 30x – 13 y – 25 = 0
(c) the area of the square is larger (c) 4x2 + 4y2 – 17x – 10 y + 25 = 0
(d) the area of the circle is  times the area of the square (d) none of these
2. The abscissa of two points A and B are the roots of the 9. If the circle x 2 + y2 + 2x + 2ky + 6 = 0 and
equation x2 + 2ax – b2 = 0 and their ordinates are the roots x2 + y2 + 2ky + k = 0 intersect orthogonally, then k is :
of the equation y2 + 2 py – q2 = 0. The radius of the circle
(a) 2 or –3/2 (b) –2 or –3/2
with AB as a diameter will be-
(c) 2 or 3/2 (d) –2 or 3/2
(a) 2 2 2 2
(b) 2 2
a b  p q b q 10. A rhombus is inscribed in the region common to the two
circles x2 + y2 – 4x – 12 = 0 and x2 + y2 + 4x – 12 = 0 with two
of its vertices on the line joining the centres of the circles.
(c) a 2  b2  p2  q2 (d) a 2  p2
The area of the rhombus is :
3. The circle described on the line joining the points (0, 1),
(a, b) as diameter cuts the x-axis in points whose abscissae (a) 8 3 sq. units (b) 4 3 sq. units
are roots of the equation :
(c) 16 3 sq. units (d) none of these
(a) x2 + ax + b = 0 (b) x2 – ax + b = 0
(c) x2 + ax – b = 0 (d) x2 – ax – b = 0 11. AB is a diameter of a circle and C is any point on the
circumference of the circle. Then :
4. If the squares of the lengths of the tangents from a point P
to the circles x2 + y2 = a2, x2 + y2 = b2 and x2 + y2 = c2 are in (a) the area of  ABC is maximum when it is isosceles
A.P., then (b) the area of  ABC is minimum when it is isosceles
(a) a, b, c are in GP (b) a, b, c are in AP (c) the perimeter of ABC is minimum when it is isosceles
2 2 2 2 2 2
(c) a , b , c are in AP (d) a , b , c are in GP (d) none of these
5. The length of the tangent drawn from any point on the 12. Let x and y be the real numbers satisfying the equation
circle x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + p = 0 to the circle x² – 4x +y² +3 =0. If the maximum and minimum values of
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + q = 0 is : x² + y² are M & m respectively, then the numerical value of
M – m is :
(a) qp (b) pq
(a) 221 (b) 8
(c) 15 (d) none of these
(c) qp (d) none of these
13. From the point A(0, 3) on the circle x² + 4x + (y – 3)² = 0, a
6. The number of common tangents to the circles x2 +y2= 4 chord AB is drawn & extended to a point M such that
and x2 + y2 – 6x – 8y = 24 is : AM = 2AB. The equation of the locus of M is :
(a) 0 (b) 1 (a) x² + 8x + y² = 0 (b) x² + 8x + (y – 3)² = 0
(c) 3 (d) 4 (c) (x – 3)² + 8x + y² = 0 (d) x² + 8x + 8y² = 0
7. Two circles x2 + y2 = 6 and x2 + y2 – 6x + 8 = 0 are
given. 14. The circle x² + y² – 6x – 10y + c = 0 does not intersect or
Then the equation of the circle through their points of touch either axis & the point (1, 4) is inside the circle. Then
intersection and the point (1, 1) is : the range of possible values of c is given by :
(a) x2 + y2 – 6x + 4 = 0 (b) x2 + y2 – 3x + 1 = 0 (a) c > 9 (b) c > 25
(c) x2 + y2 – 4y + 2 = 0 (d) none of these (c) c > 29 (d) 25 < c < 29
CIRCLES 25
15. Two thin rods AB & CD of lengths 2a & 2b move along OX 21. If the radius of the circumcircle of the triangle TPQ, where
& OY respectively, when 'O' is the origin. The equation of PQ is chord of contact corresponding to point T with
respect to circle x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y – 11 = 0, is 6 units, then
the locus of the centre of the circle passing through the
minimum distance of T from the director circle of the given
extremities of the two rods is :
circle is :
(a) x2 + y2 = a2 + b2 (b) x2 – y2 = a2 – b2 (a) 6 (b) 12
(c) x2 + y2 = a2 – b2 (d) x2 – y2 = a2 + b2
(c) 6 2 (d) 12  4 2
16. If a chord of the circle x2 + y2 = 8 makes equal intercepts of
22. From a point R(5, 8) two tangents RP and RQ are drawn to
length a on the coordinate axes, then-
a given circle S = 0 whose radius is 5. If circumcentre of the
triangle PQR is (2, 3), then the equation of circle
(a) |a| < 8 (b) |a| < 4 2
S = 0 is
(c) |a| < 4 (d) |a| > 4 (a) x2 + y2 + 2x + 4y – 20 = 0
17. The equation of a circle which touches x-axis and the line (b) x2 + y2 + x + 2y – 10 = 0
4x –3y +4 =0, its centre lying in the third quadrant and lies (c) x2 + y2 – x – 2y – 20 = 0
on the line x –y –1 =0, is- (d) x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y – 12 = 0
(a) 9 (x2 +y2) + 6x + 24y + 1 =0 23. If tangent at (1, 2) to the circle c1 : x2 + y2 = 5 intersects the
(b) 9 (x2 +y2) – 6x – 24y + 1 =0 circle c 2 : x 2 + y 2 = 9 at A and B and tangents at
A and B to the second circle meet at point C, then the
(c) 9 (x2 +y2) – 6x + 2y + 1 =0 co-ordinates of C are :
(d) None of these
 9 18 
18. The value of 'c' for which the set, (a) (4, 5) (b)  , 
 15 5 
{(x, y) | x²+y² +2x < 1}{(x, y)| x–y + c > 0} contains only
one point in common is :  9 18 
(c) (4, – 5) (d)  , 
(a) (–, –1)  [3, ) (b) {–1, 3} 5 5 
(c) {–3} (d) {–1} 24. If the tangents are drawn from any point on the line
x + y = 3 to the circle x2 + y2 = 9, then the chord of contact
19. A line meets the co-ordinate axes in A & B. A circle is
passes through the point
circumscribed about the triangle OAB. If d1 and d2 are the
(a) (3, 5) (b) (3, 3)
distances of the tangent to the circle at the origin O from
the points A and B respectively, the diameter of the circle (c) (5, 3) (d) none of these
is: 25. If the straight line ax + by = 2, b  0, touches the circle
x2 + y2 – 2x = 3 and is normal to the circle x2 + y2 – 4y = 6, then
2d1  d 2 d1  2d 2 the values of a and b can be
(a) (b)
2 2 (a) a = 1, b = 2 (b) a = 1, b = –1
(c) a = –4/3, b = 1 (d) None of these
d1d 2 26. The equation of the circle whose radius is 3 and which
(c) d1 + d2 (d) d  d
1 2 touches the circle x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y – 12 = 0 internally at the
point (–1, –1) is-
20. If C1 : x2 + y2 = (3 + 2 2 )2 be a circle and PA and PB are pair 2 2
 4  7 2
of tangents on C1 where P is any point on the director (a)  x     y    3
 5  5
circle of C1, then the radius of smallest circle which touch
C1 externally and also the two tangents PA and PB is 2 2
 4  7 2
(b)  x     y    3
(a) 2 2 –3 (b) 2 2 –1  5  5
(c) (x–8)2 + (y–1)2 = 32

(c) 2 2 +1 (d) 1
(d) None of these
CIRCLES 26
27. If the two circles, x2 + y2 + 2g1x + 2f1y = 0 and 34. If a circle passes through the point (a, b) & cuts the circle
x2 + y2 = K2 orthogonally, then the equation of the locus of
x2 + y2 + 2g2x + 2f2y = 0 touch each other then
its centre is :
(a) f1g1 = f2g2 (b) f1 f 2 (a) 2ax + 2by – (a2 + b2 + K2) = 0

g1 g 2 (b) 2ax + 2by – (a2 – b2 + K2) = 0
(c) x2 + y2 – 3ax – 4by + (a2 + b2 – K2) = 0
(c) f1f2 = g1g2 (d) none of these
(d) x2 + y2 – 2ax – 3by + (a2 – b2 – K2) = 0
28. If r1 and r2 be the radius of smallest and largest circle which
35. The circumference of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x + 8y – q = 0 is
passes through (5, 6) and touches the circle
bisected by the circle x2 + y2 + 4x + 12y + p = 0, then
(x – 2)2 + y2 = 4, then r1r2 is p + q is equal to :
4 41 (a) 25 (b) 100

(a) (b)
41 4 (c) 10 (d) 48
36. The distance from the centre of the circle x² + y² = 2x to the
5 41 straight line passing through the points of intersection of
(c) (d) the two circle ;
41 6
x² + y² + 5x – 8y + 1 = 0, x² + y² – 3x + 7y – 25 = 0 is
29. The centre of the smallest circle touching the circles
(a) 1 (b) 2
x2 + y2 – 2y – 3 = 0 and x2 + y2 – 8x – 18y + 93 = 0 is :
(a) (3, 2) (b) (4, 4)
37. The value of 'a' for which the common chord of the circles
(c) (2, 7) (d) (2, 5) C1 : x2 + y2 = 8 and C2 : (x – a)2 + y2 = 8 subtends a right angle
30. The angle of intersection of the two circles at the origin are :
x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y = 0 and x2 + y2 = 4, is– (a) ± 2 (b) ± 2
(a) 30° (b) 60° (c) ± 4 (d) none of these
(c) 90° (d) 45° 38. The length of the common chord of the circles
31. A circle touches a straight line lx + my + n = 0 & cuts the (x – a)2 + y2 = c2 and x2 + (y – b)2 = c2 is-
circle x2 + y2 = 9 orthogonally. The locus of centres of such
circle is : (a) c2  a 2  b2 (b) 4c 2  a 2  b 2
(a) (lx + my + n)2 = (l 2 + m2) (x2 + y2 – 9) (c) 4c 2  a 2  b 2 (d) c2  a 2  b2

2 2 2 2 2
(b) (lx + my – n) = (l + m ) (x + y – 9)
39. A variable circle having fixed radius ‘a’ passes through origin
(c) (lx + my + n)2 = (l 2 + m2) (x2 + y2 + 9) and meets the coordinate axes in point A and B. Locus of
(d) none of these centroid of triangle OAB, ‘O’ being the origin, is
32. Minimum radius of circle which is orthogonal with both (a) 9(x2 + y2) = 4a2 (b) 9(x2 + y2) = a2
(c) 9(x2 + y2) = 2a2 (d) 9(x2 + y2) = 8a2
the circle x2 + y2 –12x + 35 =0 and x2 + y2 + 4x +3 =0 is
40. The triangle PQR is inscribed in the circle x2 + y2 = 25. If Q
(a) 4 (b) 3
and R have coordinates (3, 4) and (–4, 3) respectively,
(c) 15 (d) 1 then QPR is equal to :
(a) /2 (b) /3
33. If a circle passes through the point (1, 2) and cuts the circle
(c) /4 (d) /6
x2 + y2 = 4 orthogonally, then the locus of its centre is-
41. Let AB be a chord of the circle x2 + y2 = r2 subtending a
(a) x2 + y2 – 2x – 6y – 7 = 0
right angle at the centre. Then the locus of the centroid of
(b) x2 + y2 – 3x – 8y + 1 = 0 the triangle PAB as P moves on the circle is :
(c) 2x + 4y – 9 = 0 (a) a parabola (b) a circle
(d) 2x + 4y – 1 = 0 (c) an ellipse (d) a pair of straight lines.
CIRCLES 27
42. The equation of the circle which is touched by y = x, has its Objective Questions II [One or more than one correct option]
centre on the positive x-axis & cuts off a chord of length 2
47. If the area of the quadrilateral formed by the tangents from
units along the line 3 y – x = 0 is- the origin to the circle x2 + y2 + 6x – 10y + C = 0 and the radii
corresponding to the points of contact is 15, then a value
(a) x2 + y2 – 4x + 2 = 0 (b) x2 + y2 – 8x + 8 = 0 of C is
(c) x2 + y2 – 4x + 1 = 0 (d) x2 + y2 – 4y + 2 = 0 (a) 9 (b) 4
2 2
43. Equation of chord of the circle x + y – 3x – 4y – 4 = 0 (c) 5 (d) 25
which passes through the origin such that origin divides 48. Coordinates of the centre of a circle, whose radius is 2 unit
it in the ratio 4 : 1, is and which touches the line pair x2 – y2 – 2x + 1 = 0, are
(a) x = 0 (b) 24x + 7y = 0
(c) 7x + 24y = 0 (d) 7x – 24y = 0
(a) (4, 0) 
(b) 1 2 2 ,0 
44. If the circle C1 : x2 + y2 = 16 intersects another circle C2 of (c) (4, 1) 
(d) 1, 2 2 
radius 5 in such a manner that the common chord is of
49. Let x, y be real variable satisfying the
maximum length and has a slope equal to 3/4, then the co-
x2 + y2 + 8x – 10y – 40 = 0. Let a = max
ordinates of the centre of C2 are :
 9 12   9 12   
( x  22 )  ( y  3) 2 and b = min  
( x  22 )  ( y  3) 2 ,
(a)   ,  (b)   , 
 5 5  5 5 then
(a) a + b = 18 (b) a + b = 4 2
 12 9   12 9 
(c)   ,  (d)   , 
 5 5  5 5
(c) a – b = 4 2 (d) a . b = 73
45. On the line segment joining (1, 0) and (3, 0) an equilateral 50. The equation of the chords of length 5 and passing through
triangle is drawn having its vertex in the fourth quadrant, the point (3, 4) on the circle 4x2 + 4y2 – 24x – 7y = 0 are
then radical centre of the circle described on its sides as (a) 4x + 3y = 0 (b) 4x – 3y = 0
diameter is (c) 4x + 3y – 24 = 0 (d) 4x + 3y – 12 = 0
 1   7 
(a)  3,


3

(b) 3, 3  51. A circle passes through the point  3,
 2 
and touches

the line pair x2 – y2 – 2x + 1 = 0. The co-ordinates of the
 1  centre of the circle are :
(c)  2,


3

(d) 2, 3  (a) (4, 0) (b) (5, 0)
(c) (6, 0) (d) (0, 4)
46. Let PQ and RS be tangents at the extremities of the diameter
PR of a circle of radius r. If PS and RQ intersect at a point 52. Point M moved on the circle (x – 4)2 + (y – 8)2 = 20. Then it
X on the circumference of the circle, then 2r equals. broke away from it and moving along a tangent to the
circle, cuts the x–axis at the point (–2, 0). The
PQ  RS co–ordinates of a point on the circle at which the moving
(a) PQ.RS (b) point broke away is
2
 3 46   2 44 
2PQ  RS 2
PQ  RS 2 (a)   ,  (b)   , 
(c) (d)  5 5   5 5 
PQ  RS 2
(c) (6, 4) (d) (3, 5)
CIRCLES 28
53. Consider the circle x2 + y2 – 10x – 6y + 30 = 0. Let O be the 56. A straight line through the vertex P of a triangle PQR,
intersects the side QR at the point S and the circum-circle
centre of the circle and tangent at A(7, 3) and B(5, 1) meet
of the triangle PQR at the point T. If S is not the circumcentre
at C. Let S = 0 represents family of circles passing through
of the triangle, then
A and B, then
1 1 2
(a) area of quadrilateral OACB = 4 (a)  
PS ST QS  SR
(b) the radical axis for the family of circles S=0 is x+y=10
(c) the smallest possible circle of the family S = 0 is 1 1 2

(b)  
2 2
x + y – 12x – 4y + 38 = 0 PS ST QS  SR
(d) the coordinates of point C are (7, 1)

1 1 4
54. Two circles passing through A(1, 2) and B(2, 1) touch the (c)  
PS ST QR
lines 4x + 8y – 7 = 0 at C and D such that ACED is
parallelogram, then 1 1 4
(d)  
PS ST QR
(a) mid point of AE must lie on CD.
(b) mid point of AE must lie on AC. Numerical Value Type Questions
57. The circle x2 + y2 – 4x – 4y + 4 = 0 is inscribed in a triangle

 13 
(c) E must be the point  ,  4  which has two of its sides along the coordinate axes. The
 2 
locus of the circumcentre of the triangle is
x + y – xy + k (x2 + y2)1/2 = 0, then the value of k must be
15 9
(d) E must be the point  ,   58. If the minimum radius of the circle which contains the
 2 2
three circles x2 + y2 – 4y – 5 = 0, x2 + y2 + 12x + 4y + 31 = 0
55. If the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y + 1 = 0 is inscribed in a triangle  5 

and x2 + y2 + 6x + 12y + 36 = 0 is  3   , then the
whose two sides are axes and one side has negative slope  36 
cutting intercepts a and b on x and y axis, then value of  must be
59. The line Ax + By + C = 0 cuts the circle
1 1 1 1 x2 + y2 + ax + by + c = 0 in P and Q. The lines
(a)  1   2  2
a b a b
A’x + B’y + C’ = 0 cuts the circle x2 + y2 + a’x + b’y + c’=0 in
R and S. If P, Q, R, S are concyclic, then the value of
1 1
(b)   1 is negative
a b a  a b  b c  c 
A B C is
A B C
1 1
(c)  1
a b
60. Circle with radii 3, 4 and 5 touch each other externally. If P
is the point of intersection of tangent to these circles at
their point of contact. And the distance of P from point of
1 1 1 1
(d)  1   2  2 contact is d. Then [d] is (where [ ] is greatest integer
a b a b
function).
CIRCLES 29
Assertion & Reason 65. Assertion : Let S1 : x2 + y2 – 10x – 12y – 39 = 0

S2 : x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y + 1 = 0
(A) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is a S3 : 2x2 + 2y2 – 20x – 24y + 78 = 0
correct explanation for ASSERTION.
The radical centre of these circles taken pairwise is (–2, –3)
(B) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is not Reason : Point of intersection of three radical axis of three
a correct explanation for ASSERTION. circles taken in pairs is known as radical centre
(C) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is false. (a) A (b) B
(D) If ASSERTION is false, REASON is true. (c) C (d) D

Match the Following
61. Assertion : for two non–intersecting circles, direct
common tangents subtends a right angle at either of point Each question has two columns. Four options are given
of intersection of circles with line segment joining the representing matching of elements from Column-I and
centres of circles. Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds
to a correct matching.For each question, choose the option
Reason : If distance between the centres is more than sum corresponding to the correct matching.
of radii, then circles are non–intersecting
66. Match the items of Column I with those of Column II.
(a) A (b) B
Column I Column II
(c) C (d) D (A) Eq uations of the circle 2 2
(P) x + y – 9x –9y + 36 = 0
62. Assertion : Number of common tangents of circumscribing the rectangle
whose sides are x – 3y – 4 = 0,
x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y – 95 =0 and x2 + y2 – 6x – 8y + 16 =0 is zero.
3x + y – 22 = 0, x – 3y – 14 = 0
Reason : If C1 C2 < |r1 – r2|, then there will be no common
and 3x + y – 62 = 0 is
tangent. (where C1, C2 are the centre and r1, r2 are radii of
circles) (B) Two vertices of an equilateral (Q) 3 (x 2  y2 )  2y  3  0
(a) A (b) B triangle are (–1, 0) and (1, 0)
(c) C (d) D and its third vertex lies above

the x-axis. The equation of its
63. Assertion : The equations of the straight lines joining
circumcircle is
origin to the points of intersection of
(C) The equation of a circle (R) x2 + y2 – 9 = 0
x2 + y2 – 4x – 2y = 4 and x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y – 4 = 0 is
with origin at centre and
(y – x)2 = 0
passing through the vertices
Reason : y + x = 0 is a common chord of of an equilateral triangle
2 2 2 2
x + y – 4x – 2y = 4 and x + y – 2x – 4y – 4 = 0 whose median is of length
(a) A (b) B 6 units is
(c) C (d) D (D) The vertices of a triangle (S) x2 + y2 – 27x – 3y + 142 = 0

are (6, 0), (0, 6) and (7, 7).
64. Assertion : Two orthogonal circles intersect to generate a
The equation of the incircle
common chord which subtends complimentary angles at
their circumferences. of the triangle is
(T) x2 + y2 – 16 = 0
Reason : Two orthogonal circles intersect to generate a
The correct matching is :
common chord which subtends supplementary angles at
(a) (A–S; B–Q; C–T; D–P)
their centres
(b) (A–Q; B–S; C–T; D–P)
(a) A (b) B
(c) (A–S; B–Q; C–P; D–T)
(c) C (d) D
(d) (A–T; B–Q; C–S; D–P)
CIRCLES 30
67. Column–I Column–II (C) Number of distinct chords of the (R) 32

(A) If ax + by – 5 = 0 is the equation (P) 6
circle 2x ( x  2 ) + y(2y – 1) = 0;
of the chord of the circle
chords are passing through the
(x – 3)2 + (y – 4)2 = 4, which passes
through (2, 3) and at the greatest  1
point  2 ,  and are bisected
distance from the centre of the  2
circle, then |a + b| is equal to on x–axis is
(B) Let O be the origin and P be a (Q) 3 (D) one of the diameters of the circle (S) 36
variable point on the circle circumscribing the rectangle
x2 + y2 + 2x + 2y = 0. If the ABCD is 4y = x + 7. If A and B are
locus of mid–point of OP is the points (–3, 4) and (5, 4) resp-
2 2
x + y + 2gx + 2fy = 0, then the ectively, then the area of the re-
value of (g + f) is equal to ctangle is.
(C) The x–coordinates of the centre (R) 2 The correct matching is :
of the smallest circle which cuts (a) (A – R; B – P; C – S; D –Q)
the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y – 4 = 0 (b) (A – Q; B – S; C – P; D –R)
and x2 + y2 – 10x + 12y + 52 = 0 (c) (A – P; B – S; C – Q; D –R)
orthogonally, is (d) (A – S; B – Q; C – P; D –R)
(D) If  be the angle between two (S) 1
Using the following passage, solve Q.69 to Q.71
tangents which are drawn to the
Passage – 1
circle x2 + y2 – 6 3 x – 6y + 27
P is a variable point on the line L = 0. Tangents are drawn to
= 0 from the origin, then 2 3 the circle x2 + y2 = 4 from P to touch it at Q and R. The
parallelogram PQSR is completed
tan  equals to
69. If L  2x + y – 6 = 0, then the locus of circumcentre of PQR
is
(a) (A – R; B – S; C – Q; D – P)
(a) 2x – y = 4 (b) 2x + y = 3
(b) (A – S; B – R; C – Q; D – P)
(c) x – 2y = 4 (d) x + 2y = 3
(c) (A – R; B – S; C – P; D – Q)
70. If P  (6, 8), then the area of QRS is
(d) (A – P; B – S; C – Q; D – R)
68. Column–I Column–II
(a)
63 / 2 sq. units (b)
243 / 2 sq. units
(A) The length of the common chord (P) 1 25 25
of two circles of radii 3 and 4 units
48 6 192 6
which intersect orthogonally is (c) sq. units (d) sq. units
25 25
k/5, then k equals to
71. If P  (3, 4), then coordinate of S is
(B) The circumference of the circle (Q) 24
x 2 + y2 + 4x + 12y + p = 0 is  46 63   51 68 
(a)   ,  (b)   , 
2 2
bisected by the circle x + y – 2x  25 25   25 25 
+ 8y – q = 0,
 46 68   68 51 
then p + q is equal to : (c)   ,  (d)   , 
 25 25   25 25 
CIRCLES 31
Using the following passage, solve Q.72 to Q.74 74. The equation of the radical axis of the system of coaxial
circles x2 + y2 + 2ax + 2by + c+ 2(ax – by + 1) = 0 is
Passage – 2
(a) ax – by + 1 = 0 (b) bx + ay – 1 = 0
A system of circles is said to be coaxial when every pair of the (c) 2(ax + by) + 1 = 0 (d) 2(bx – ay) + 1 = 0
circles has the same radical axis. It follows from this definition
Text
that :
1. The centres of all circles of a coaxial system lie on one 75. A circle passes through three points A, B and C with the
straight line, which is perpendicular to the common radical line segment AC as its diameter. A line passing through A
axis. intersects the chord BC at a point D inside the circle. If
2. Circles passing through two fixed points form a coaxial angles DAB and CAB are  and respectively and the
system for which the line joining the fixed points is the distance between the point A and the mid point of the line
common radical axis. segment DC is d, prove that the area of the circle is
3. The equation to a coaxial system, of which two members d 2 cos 2 

are S1 = 0 and S2 = 0, is S1 + S2 = 0,  is parameter. If we 2 2
cos   cos   2 cos  cos  cos (  )
choose the line of centres as x–axis and the common radical
axis as y–axis, then the simplest form of equation of coaxial 76. C1 and C2 are two concentric circles, the radius of C2 being
circles is x2 + y2 + 2gx + c = 0 ...(1) twice that of C1. From a point P on C2, tangents PA and PB
where c is fixed and g is arbitrary. are drawn to C1. Prove that the centroid of the triangle
PAB lies on C1.
If g = ± c , then the radius g 2  c vanishes and the circles 77. Show that the line 3x – 4y = 1 touches the circle
x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y + 1 = 0. Find the co-ordinates of the point
become point circles. The points (± c , 0) are called the limiting of contact.
points of the system of coaxial circles given by (1). 78. Let T1, T2 and be two tangents drawn from (–2, 0) onto the
72. The equation of the circle which belongs to the coaxial circle C : x2 + y2 = 1. Determine the circles touching C and
system of circles for which the limiting points are having T1, T2 as their pair of tangents. Further, find the
(1, –1), (2, 0) and which passes through the origin is equations of all possible common tangents to these circles
(a) x2 + y2 – 4x = 0 (b) x2 + y2 + 4x = 0 when taken two at a time.
(c) x2 + y2 – 4y = 0 (d) x2 + y2 + 4y = 0 79. Consider a curve ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 1 and a point P not on
the curve. A line drawn from the point P intersect the curve
73. If origin be a limiting point of a coaxial system one of
at points Q and R. If the product PQ . PR is independent of
whose member is x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y + c = 0, then the other
the slope of the line, then show that the curve is a circle.
limiting point is
80. Let C be any circle with centre (0, 2) . Prove that at the
 c c   c c 
(a)  2 , 2  (b)  2 , 2  most two rational points can be there on C.
  
2
   2  2
     
2 
(A rational point is a point both of whose coordinates are
rational numbers.)
  c   c c 
(c)  2 2
, 2 
2  (d)   2 2
, 2 
2 
           
CIRCLES 32
EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 7. Tangents drawn from the point P (1, 8) to the circle
x2 + y2 – 6x – 4y – 11 = 0 touch the circle at the points A and
1. If the tangent at the point P on the circle x2+y2+6x+6y = 2
meets the straight line 5x – 2y + 6 = 0 at a point Q on the B. The equation of the circumcircle of the triangle PAB is
y-axis, then the length of PQ is : (2002) (2009)
(a) 4 (b) 2 5 (a) x2 + y2 + 4x – 6y + 19 = 0
(b) x2 + y2 – 4x – 10y + 19 = 0
(c) 5 (d) 3 5
(c) x2 + y2 – 2x + 6y – 29 = 0
2. The centre of circle inscribed in square formed by the lines
x2 – 8x + 12 = 0 and y2 – 14y + 45 = 0, is : (2003) (d) x2 + y2 – 6x – 4y + 19 = 0
(a) (4, 7) (b) (7, 4) 8. The locus of the mid-point of the chord of contact of
(c) (9, 4) (d) (4, 9) tangents drawn from points lying on the straight line
3. If one of the diameters of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x –6y +6 =0 is 4x – 5y = 20 to the circle x2 + y2 = 9 is (2012)
a chord to the circle with centre (2, 1), then the radius of
(a) 20 (x2 + y2) – 36x + 45 y = 0
the circle is : (2004)
(b) 20 (x2 + y2) + 36x – 45 y = 0
(a) 3 (b) 2
(c) 36 (x2 + y2) – 20x + 45 y = 0
(c) 3 (d) 2
4. The locus of the centre of circle which touches (y –1)2 +x2 = 1 (d) 36 (x2 + y2) + 20x – 45 y = 0
externally and also touches x axis is : (2005) 9. A line y = mx + 1 intersect the circle (x – 3)2 + (y + 2)2 = 25
(a) x2 = 4 y  (0, y), y < 0 at points P and Q. If the midpoint of the line segment PQ
(b) x2 = y
3
(c) y = 4x2 has x-coordinate  then which one of the following
5
(d) y2 = 4 x  (0, y), y  R
5. Let ABCD be a quadrilateral with area 18, with side AB options is correct. (2019)
parallel to the side CD and AB = 2CD . Let AD be (a) 6  m  8 (b) 2  m  4
perpendicular to AB and CD. If a circle is drawn inside the
quadrilateral ABCD touching all the sides, then its radius (c) 4  m  6 (d) 3  m  1
is : (2007)
10. Consider a triangle  whose two sides lie on the x-axis
(a) 3 (b) 2
and the line x + y + 1 = 0. If the orthocentre of  is (1, 1),
3
(c) (d) 1 then the equation of the circle passing through the vertices
2
of the triangle  is (2021)
6. Consider the two curves
2 2
C1 : y2 = 4x (a) x  y  3x  y  0
C2 : x2 + y2 – 6x + 1 = 0, then (2008)
2 2
(a) C1 and C2 touch each other only at one point (b) x  y  x  3y  0
(b) C1 and C2 touch each other exactly at two points
2 2
(c) C1 and C2 intersect (but do not touch) at exactly two (c) x  y  2y  1  0
points
2 2
(d) C1 and C2 neither intersect nor touch each other (d) x  y  x  y  0
CIRCLES 33
Objective Questions II [One or more than one correct option] 15. Let G be a circle of radius R > 0. Let G1, G2,....,Gn be n
circles of equal radius r > 0. Suppose each of the n circles
11. Circle(s) touching x-axis at a distance 3 from the origin and G1, G2,....,Gn touches the circle G externally. Also, for i = 1,
having an intercept of length 2 7 on y-axis is (are) 2, ....., n – 1, the circle Gi touches Gi+1 externally, and Gn
touches G1 externally. Then, which of the following
(2013)
statements is/are TRUE ? (2022)
(a) x2 + y2 – 6x + 8y + 9 = 0
(b) x2 + y2 – 6x + 7y + 9 = 0 (a) If n  4, then  
2 1 r  R
(c) x2 + y2 – 6x – 8y + 9 = 0
(b) If n = 5, then r < R
(d) x2 + y2 – 6x – 7y + 9 = 0
12. A circle S passes through the point (0, 1) and is orthogonal (c) If n  8, then  
2 1 r  R
to the circles (x – 1)2 + y2 = 16 and x2 + y2 = 1. Then
(2014) (d) If n  12, then 2  
3 1 r  R
(a) radius of S is 8
Numerical Value Type Questions
(b) radius of S is 7
(c) centre of S is (–7, 1) 16. The centres of two circles C1 and C2 each of unit radius
are at a distance of 6 unit from each other. Let P be the mid
(d) centre of S is (–8, 1)
point of the line segment joining the centres of C1 and C2
13. The circle C1 : x2 + y2 = 3, with centre at O, intersects the and C be a circle touching circles C1 and C2 externally. If a
parabola x2 = 2y at the point P in the first quadrant. Let the common tangents to C1 and C passing through P is also a
tangent to the circle C1 at P touches other two circles C2 common tangent to C2 and C, then the radius of the circle
and C3 at R2 and R3, respectively. Suppose C2 and C3 have C is ...... (2009)
equal radii 2 3 and centres Q2 and Q3, respectively. If Q2 17. For how many values of P, the circle
and Q3 lie on the y-axis, then. (2016) x2 + y2 + 2x + 4y – P = 0 and the coordinate axes have
(a) Q2Q3 = 12 exactly three common points ? (2017)
(b) R2R3 = 4 6 18. Let the point B be the reflection of the point A(2,3) with
respect to the line 8x – 6y – 23 = 0. Let  A and  B be
(c) area of the triangle OR2R3 is 6 2
circles of radii 2 and 1 with centres A and B respectively.
(d) area of the triangle PQ2Q3 is 4 2
Let T be a common tangent to the circles  A and  B
14. Let RS be the diameter of the circle x2 + y2 = 1, where S is
such that both the circles are on the same side of T. If C is
the point (1, 0). Let P be a variable point (other than R and
the point of intersection of T and the line passing through
S) on the circle and tangents to the circle at S and P meet
A and B, then the length of the line segment AC is…..
at the point Q. The normal to the circle at P intersects a
(2019)
line drawn through Q parallel to RS at point E. Then the
locus of E passes through the point(s) (2016) 19. Let O be the centre of the circle x 2  y 2  r 2 , where
1 1  1 1
(a)  ,  (b)  ,  5
3 3 4 2 r> . Suppose PQ is a chord of this circle and the
2
1 1  1 1 equation of the line passing through P and Q is
(c)  3 ,   (d)  4 ,  2 
3
2 x  4 y  5. If the centre of the circumcircle of the triangle
OPQ lies on the line x  2 y  4, then the value of r is

_____. (2020)
CIRCLES 34
20. Let ABC be the triangle with AB = 1, AC = 3 and 23. Consider
 L1 : 2x + 3y + p – 3 = 0
BAC  . If a circle of radius r > 0 touches the sides
2
L2 : 2x + 3y + p + 3 = 0
AB, AC and also touches internally the circumcircle of where p is a real number and
the triangle ABC, then the value of r is ______. (2022)
C : x2 + y2 – 6x + 10y + 30 = 0
21. C1 be the circle of radius 1 with center at the origin. Let C2
Assertion : If line L1 is a chord of circle C, then line L2 is
be the circle of radius r with center at the point A = (4,1) ,
not always a diameter of circle C. and
where 1 < r < 3. Two distinct common tangents PQ and ST
Reason : If line L1 is a diameter of circle C, then line L2
of C1 and C2 are drawn. The tangent PQ touches C1 at P
is not a chord of circle C. (2008)
and C2 at Q. The tangent ST touches C1 at S and C2 at T.
Mid points of the line segments PQ and ST are joined to (a) A (b) B
form a line which meets the x-axis at a point B. If AB = (c) C (d) D
5 , then the value of r2 is (2023) Match the Following
Assertion & Reason Each question has two columns. Four options are given
representing matching of elements from Column-I and
(A) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is a
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds
correct explanation for ASSERTION.
(B) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is not corresponding to the correct matching.
a correct explanation for ASSERTION.
24. Match the conditions/expressions in Column I with
(C) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is false.
statement in Column II. (2007)
(D) If ASSERTION is false, REASON is true.
Column I Column II
22. Assertion : Tangents are drawn from the point (17, 7) to (A) Two intersecting circles (P) have a common tangent
the circle x2 + y2 = 169. The tangents are mutually
(B) Two mutually external (Q) have a common normal
perpendicular.
circles.
Reason : The locus of the points from which mutually
perpendicular tangents can be drawn to the given circle is (C) Two circles, one strictly (R) do not have a common
x2 + y2 = 338. (2007) inside the other tangent
(a) A (b) B (D) Two branches of a (S) do not have a common
(c) C (d) D hyperbola normal
(a) (A-P,Q; B-P,Q; C-Q,R; D-Q,R)
(b) (A-Q,R; B-P,Q; C-P,Q; D-Q,R)
(c) (A-P,Q; B-Q,R; C-Q,R; D-P,Q)
(d) (A-Q,R; B-Q,R; C-P,Q; D-P,Q)

CIRCLES 35
26. Let the circle C1: x2 + y2 = 9 and C2: (x – 3)2 + (y – 4)2 = 16

25. Let the circle C1: x2 + y2 = 9 and C2: (x – 3)2 + (y – 4)2 = 16
intersect at the points X and Y. Suppose that another circle
intersect at the points X and Y. Suppose that another C3: (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2 satisfies the following conditions.
circle C3: (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2 satisfies the following (i) centre of C3 is collinear with the centres of C1& C2,
conditions. (ii) C1& C2 both lie inside C3 and

(iii) C3 touches C1 at M and C2 at N
(i) centre of C 3 is collinear with the centres of C1& C 2,
Let the line through X and Y intersect C3 at Z and W and
(ii) C1& C2 both lie inside C3 and let a common tangent of C1& C3 be a tangent to the
parabola x2 = 8y
(iii) C3 touches C1 at M and C2 at N
There are some expressions given in the list-I, whose
Let the line through X and Y intersect C3 at Z and W and values are given in list-II below :
List–I List–II
let a common tangent of C1& C3 be a tangent to the
(I) 2h + k (P) 6
parabola x2 = 8y
length of ZW
There are some expressions given in the list-I, whose (II) (Q) 6
length of XY
values are given in list-II below :
List–I List–II Area of MZN 5

(III) Area of ZMW (R)
4
(I) 2h + k (P) 6
21
(IV)  (S)
length of ZW 5
(II) (Q) 6
length of XY
(T) 2 6
10
(U)
Area of MZN 5 3
(III) Area of ZMW (R)
4 Which of the following is the only incorrect combination?
(2019)
(a) (IV) - (S) (b) (I) - (P)
21
(IV)  (S) (c) (III) - (R) (d) (IV) - (U)
5

(T) 2 6
Passage – 1
10 Let ABCD be a square of side length 2 unit. C2 is the circle

(U)
3 through vertices A, B, C, D and C1 is the circle touching all the
sides of square ABCD. L is the line through A.
Which of the following is the only correct combination? 27. If P is a point of C 1 and Q is a point on C 2, then
(2019) PA2  PB 2  PC 2  PD 2
is equal to (2006)
QA2  QB 2  QC 2  QD 2
(a) (II) - (T) (b) (I) - (S)
(a) 0.75 (b) 1.25
(c) (II) - (Q) (d) (I) - (U)
(c) 1 (d) 0.5
CIRCLES 36
28. A circle touches the line L and the circle C1 externally such
1
that both the circles are on the same side of the line, then (b) y  x, y  0
the locus of centre of the circle is (2006) 3
(a) ellipse (b) hyperbola

3 3
(c) parabola (d) parts of straight line (c) y  x  1, y   x 1
2 2
29. A line M through A is drawn parallel to BD. Point S moves
such that its distances from the line BD and the vertex A (d) y  3x, y  0
are equal. If locus of S cuts M at T2 and T3 and AC at T1,
then area of T1 T2 T3 is (2006)
Using the following passage, solve Q.33 and Q.34
1 2
(a) sq unit (b) sq unit Passage – 3
2 3
(c) 1 sq unit (d) 2 sq unit A tangent PT is drawn to the circle x2 + y2 = 4 at the point

P  
3,1 . A straight line L, perpendicular to PT is a tangent to
the circle (x – 3)2 + y2 = 1.
Passage – 2
33. A common tangent of the two circles is (2012)
A circle C of radius 1 is inscribed in an equilateral triangle (a) x = 4 (b) y = 2
PQR. The points of contact of C with the sides PQ, QR, RP
(c) x  3 y  4 (d) x  2 2 y  6
are D, E, F respectively. The line PQ is given by the equation
34. A possible equation of L is (2012)
3 3 3
3 x + y – 6 = 0 and the point D is  2 , 2 . Further, it is (a) x  3 y 1 (b) x  3 y 1
 
given that the origin and the centre of C are on the same side (c) x  3 y   1 (d) x  3 y  5
of the line PQ.
30. The equation of circle C is (2008) Using the following passage, solve Q.35 and Q.36
(a) ( x  2 3 ) 2  ( y  1) 2  1 Passage – 4
2 Let S be the circle in the xy-plane defined by the equation


2 1
(b) ( x  2 3 )   y    1 x2 + y2 = 4. (2018)
 2
35. Let E1 E2 and F1F2 be the chords of S passing through the
point P0 (1, 1) and parallel to the x-axis and the y-axis,
(c) ( x  3 ) 2  ( y  1) 2  1
respectively. Let G1 G2 be the chord of S passing through
P0 and having slope -1. Let the tangents to S at E1 and E2
(d) ( x  3 ) 2  ( y  1) 2  1
meet at E3, the tangents to S at F1 and F2 meet at F3, and
31. Points E and F are given by (2008) the tangents to S at G1 and G2 meet at G3. Then, the points
E3, F3, and G3 lie on the curve
 3 3  3 1 (a) x + y = 4 (b) (x - 4)2 + (y - 4)2 = 16
(a)  , , ( 3 ,0) (b)  , , ( 3 ,0)
 2 2   2 2  (c) (x - 4)(y - 4) = 4 (d) xy = 4
36. Let P be a point on the circle S with both coordinates
 3 3  3 1 3 3  3 1 being positive. Let the tangent to S at P intersect the
(c)  , , 

, 
 (d)  , , 

, 
 coordinate axes at the points M and N. Then, the mid-
 2 2  2 2 2 2   2 2 point of the line segment MN must lie on the curve
32. Equations of the sides QR, RP are (2008) 2 2 4
(a) (x + y)2 = 3xy (b) x 3  y 3  2 3
2 2
(a) y  x  1, y   x 1
3 3 (c) x2 + y2 = 2xy (d) x2 + y2 = x2y2
CIRCLES 37
Using the following passage, solve Q.37 and Q.38 Using the following passage, solve Q.39 and Q.40
Passage – 5 Passage – 6
Let M   x, y   R  R : x 2
 y2  r 2 , Consider the region R   x, y   R  R : x  0 and
Where r > 0. Consider the geometric progression


y 2  4  x . Let F be the family of all circles that are
1 contained in R and have centers on the x-axis. Let C be the
an  , n = 1, 2, 3...... Let S = 0 and, for n  1, let S
2n 1 0 n
circle that has largest radius among the circles in F. Let
denote the sum of the first n terms of this progression. For (,) be a point where the circle C meets the curve
y2 = 4 – x. (2021)
n  1, let Cn denote the circle with center  Sn 1 , 0  and
39. The radius of the circle C is ------.
radius an, Dn denote the circle with center  Sn 1 , Sn 1 
40. The value of  is ..... .
and radius an. (2021)
Text
1025
37. Consider M with  r  . Let k be the number of all 41. Let 2x2 + y2 – 3xy = 0 be the equation of a pair of tangents
513
drawn from the origin O to a circle of radius 3 with centre
those circle Cn that are inside M. Let l be the maximum
in the first quadrant. If A is one of the points of contact,
possible number of circles among these k circles such that
find the length of OA. (2001)
no two circle intersect. Then
42. Let C1 and C2 be two circles with C2 lying inside C1. A
(a) k + 2l = 22 (b) 2k + l = 26
circle C lying inside C1 touches C1 internally and C2
(c) 2k + 3l = 34 (d) 3k + 2l = 40 externally. Identify the locus of the centre of C. (2001)
43. Find the equation of circle touching the line
38. Consider M with r 
2 199
1  2
. Let k be the number 2x + 3y + 1 = 0 at the point (1, –1) and is orthogonal to the
2198 circle which has the line segment having end points
of all those circle Dn that are inside M is (0, –1) and (–2, 3) as the diameter. (2004)
(a) 198 (b) 199
(c) 200 (d) 201
Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book
CIRCLES
Please share your valuable feedback by

scanning the QR code.
10
CONIC SECTIONS
Chapter 10 39
CONIC SECTIONS
(i) Section of a right circular cone by a plane passing

1. CONIC SECTIONS
through its vertex is a pair of straight lines passing
A conic section, or conic is the locus of a point which through the vertex as shown in fig. 2
moves in a plane so that its distance from a fixed point is in
a constant ratio to its perpendicular distance from a fixed
straight line.
• The fixed point is called the Focus.
• The fixed straight line is called the Directrix.
• The constant ratio is called the Eccentricity denoted
by e.
• The line passing through the focus & perpendicular to
the directrix is called the Axis.
• A point of intersection of a conic with its axis is called
a Vertex.
(ii) Section of a right circular cone by a plane parallel

to its base is a circle as shown in the fig. 3.
2. SECTION OF RIGHT CIRCULAR CONE BY

DIFFERENT PLANES
A right circular cone is as shown in the fig. 1
(iii) Section of a right circular cone by a plane parallel

to a generator of the cone is a parabola as shown
in the fig. 4.
SCAN CODE
Conic Sections
CONIC SECTIONS
40
(iv) Section of a right circular cone by a plane neither PARABOLA

parallel to any generator of the cone nor
perpendicular or parallel to the axis of the cone is 5. DEFINITION AND TERMINOLOGY
an ellipse or hyperbola as shown in the fig. 5 & 6. A parabola is the locus of a point, whose distance from a
fixed point (focus) is equal to perpendicular distance from
a fixed straight line (directrix).
PS = PM
3. GENERAL EQUATION OF A CONIC :

FOCAL DIRECTRIX PROPERTY
Four standard forms of the parabola are
The general equation of a conic with focus (p, q) & directrix y² = 4ax ; y² = –4ax ; x² = 4ay ; x² = –4ay
lx + my + n = 0 is obtained using the relation PS2 = e2PM2 For parabola y² = 4ax :
This gives (l² + m²)[(x – p)² + (y – q)²] = e²(lx + my + n)² (i) Vertex is (0, 0) (ii) Focus is (a, 0)
 ax² + 2hxy + by² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 (iii) Axis is y = 0 (iv) Directrix is x + a = 0
Focal Distance : The distance of a point on the parabola
4. DISTINGUISHING VARIOUS CONICS from the focus.
Focal Chord : A chord of the parabola, which passes
The nature of the conic section depends upon the position through the focus.
of the focus S w.r.t. the directrix & also upon the value of Double Ordinate : A chord of the parabola perpendicular
the eccentricity e. Two different cases arise. to the axis of the symmetry.
Latus Rectum : A double ordinate passing through the
Case (I) When The Focus Lies On The Directrix.
focus or a focal chord perpendicular to the axis of parabola
In the case  abc + 2fgh – af 2 – bg2 – ch2 = 0 & the general is called the Latus Rectum (L.R.).
equation of a conic represents a pair of straight lines if : For y² = 4ax.  Length of the latus rectum = 4a
 ends of the latus rectum are
e > 1  h2 > ab, the lines will be real and distinct intersecting
L(a, 2a) & L' (a, –2a).
at S.
NOTES :
e = 1  h2 = ab, the lines will coincident.
(i) Perpendicular distance from focus on directrix = half the
e < 1  h2 < ab, the lines will be imaginary.
latus rectum
Case (II) When The Focus Does Not Lie On Directrix. (ii) Vertex is middle point of the focus & the point of
intersection of directrix & axis.
a parabola : e = 1,   0, h² = ab
(iii) Two parabolas are said to be equal if they have the same
an ellipse : 0 < e < 1;  0, h² < ab latus rectum.
a hyperbola : e > 1;  0, h² > ab (iv) If vertex of parabola y2 = 4ax is shifted to (h, k) without
rotation, then equation of new parabola is
rectangular hyperbola : e > 1 ;  0, h² > ab; a + b = 0
(y – k)2= 4a(x – h)
SCAN CODE
Conic Sections
CONIC SECTIONS
41
6. PARAMETRIC REPRESENTATION 9. TANGENTS TO THE PARABOLA y² = 4ax

The simplest & the best form of representing the (i) y y1 = 2a (x + x1) at the point (x1, y1) ;(T = O, Point form)
co-ordinates of a point on the parabola is (at2, 2at) i.e. the
equations x = at2 & y = 2at together represents the parabola a  a 2a 
(ii) y = mx + (m  0) at  2 ,  (Slope from)
y2 = 4ax, t being the parameter. m m m 
(iii) t y = x + at2 at point (at2, 2at).(Parametric form)

7. POSITION OF A POINT RELATIVE TO A PARABOLA
The point (x1 y1) lies outside, on or inside the parabola NOTES :
y2 = 4ax according as the expression y12 – 4ax1 is positive,
zero or negative. Point of intersection of the tangents at the point t1 & t2 is
[at1 t2, a(t1 + t2)].
8. LINE & A PARABOLA
The line y = mx + c meets the parabola y² = 4ax in : 10. NORMALS TO THE PARABOLA y2 = 4ax
• two real points if a > mc
–y1
• two coincident points if a = mc (i) y – y1= (x – x1) at (x1, y1)
2a
• two imaginary points if a < mc
 condition of tangency is, c = a/m. (ii) y = mx – 2am – am3 at point (am2, – 2am)
Length of the chord intercepted by the parabola on the (iii) y + tx = 2at + at3 at point (at2, 2at).
line y = mx + c is :
NOTES :
 4  2
 2  a(1 + m )(a - mc) (i) If the normals to the parabola y² = 4ax at the point t1
m 
meets the parabola again at the point t2 then
The equation of a chord joining t1 & t2 is
2x – (t1 + t2)y + 2 at1t2 = 0.  2
t2 = –  t1  
 t1 
NOTES :
(ii) If the normals to the parabola y2 = 4ax at the points t1 &
(i) If t1 and t2 are the ends of a focal chord of the parabola t2 intersect again on the parabola at the point 't3' then
y2 = 4ax then t1t2 = –1.
t1t2 = 2 ; t3 = –(t1 + t2) and the line joining t1 & t2 passes
Hence the co-ordinates at the extremities of a focal chord through a fixed point (–2a, 0).
 a 2a 
can be taken as : (at2, 2at) &  2 ,  11. PAIR OF TANGENTS
t t 
(ii) Lenght of focal chord with (at2, 2at) as one of its end The equation to the pair of tangents which can be drawn
2 from any point (x1, y1) to the parabola y2 = 4ax is given by:
 1
point is a  t   SS1 = T2 where :
 t
S  y2 – 4ax ; S1 = y12 – 4ax1 ; T  y y1 – 2a(x + x1).
(iii) Length of the focal chord making an angle  with the
x-axis is 4 a cosec2.
SCAN CODE
Conic Sections
CONIC SECTIONS
42
12. DIRECTOR CIRCLE (iv) Any tangent to a parabola & the perpendicular on it from
the focus meet on the tangent at the vertex.
Locus of the point of intersection of the perpendicular (v) Semi latus rectum of the parabola y2 = 4ax, is the harmonic
tangents to a curve is called the director circle. For parabola
mean between segments of any focal chord of the parabola.
y2 = 4ax it's equation is
x + a = 0 which is parabola's own directrix. (vi) The area of the triangle formed by three points on a parabola
is twice the area of the triangle formed by the tangents at
13. CHORD OF CONTACT these points.
(vii) If normal are drawn from a point P(h, k) to the parabola
Equation to the chord of contact of tangents drawn from a
y2 = 4ax then
point P(x1, y1) is yy1 = 2a (x + x1) ; (i.e., T = 0)
k = mh – 2am – am3
NOTES : am3 + m(2a – h) + k = 0.
The area of the triangle formed by the tangents from the point m1 + m2 + m3 = 0;
(x1, y1) & the chord of contact is Where m1, m2 & m3 are the slopes of the three concurrent
(y12 – 4ax1)3/2 / 2a. normals.
* algebraic sum of the slopes of the three concurrent
14. CHORD WITH A GIVEN MIDDLE POINT normals is zero.
* algebraic sum of the ordinates of the three conormal
Equation of the chord of the parabola y2 = 4ax whose
middle point is : (x1 y1) is : points on the parabola is zero
2a * Centroid of the triangle formed by three co-normal

y – y1 = y (x – x1)  T = S1. points lies on the x-axis.
1
* Condition for three real and distinct normals to be
15. IMPORTANT RESULTS drawn from a point P(h, k) is
(i) If the tangent & normal at any point ‘P’ of the parabola 4
h  2a & k 2  ( h  2 a )3
intersect the axis at T & G then ST = SG = SP where ‘S’ is 27 a
the focus. In other words the tangent and the normal at a
(viii) Length of subnormal is constant for all points on the
point P on the parabola are the bisectors of the angle
parabola & is equal to the semi latus rectum.
between the focal radius SP & the perpendicular from P on
the directrix. From this we conclude that all rays emanating ELLIPSE
from S will become parallel to the axis of the parabola after
reflection. Ellipse is a conic with 0 < e < 1.
(ii) The portion of a tangent to a parabola cut off between the
directrix & the curve subtends a right angle at the focus. 16. STANDARD EQUATION AND DEFINITIONS
(iii) The tangents at the extremities of a focal chord intersect at
Standard equation of an ellipse referred to its principal
right angles on the directrix, and hence a circle on any
axes along the co-ordinate axes is
focal chord as diameter touches the directrix. Also a circle
on any focal radii of a point P (at2, 2at) as diameter touches
x2 y2
the tangent at the vertex and intercepts a chord of length + = 1 where a>b & b2 = a2 (1 – e2).
a2 b2
a 1  t 2 on a normal at the point P..
SCAN CODE
Conic Sections
CONIC SECTIONS
43
NOTES :
x 2 y2
(i) If the equation of the ellipse is given as  1
a 2 b2
and nothing is mentioned then the rule is to assume
that a > b.
(ii) If b > a is given, then the y-axis will become major axis
and x-axis will become the minor axis and all other points
and lines will change accordingly.
(iii) If centre of standard ellipse is shifted to (h, k) without
b2
Eccentricity : e  1  2 , (0 < e < 1) 2 2
a  x – h  y – k
rotation, then new ellipse is  1
a2 b2
Foci : S  (a e, 0) & S'  (–a e, 0)
a a 17. AUXILIARY CIRCLE/ECCENTRIC ANGLE

Equations of Directrices : x  &x  
e e
A circle described on major axis as diameter is called the
Major Axis : The line segment A'A in which the foci S'
& S lie is of length 2a & is called the major axis auxiliary circle. Let Q be a point on the auxiliary circle
(a > b) of the ellipse. Point of intersection of major axis x2 + y2 = a2 such that QP produced is perpendicular to
with directrix is called the foot of the directrix (Z). the x-axis then P & Q are called as the Corresponding
Points on the ellipse and the auxiliary circle respectively.
Minor Axis : The y-axis intersects the ellipse in the
points B'  (0, –b) and B  (0, b). The line segment '' is called the Eccentric Angle of the point P on the
B'B of length 2b (b < a) is called the minor axis of the ellipse. ellipse (– < ).
Principal Axis : The major and minor axis together are

called principal axis of the ellipse.
Vertices : A'  (–a, 0) & A  (a, 0).
Focal Chord : A chord which passes through a focus is
called a focal chord.
Double Ordinate : A chord perpendicular to the major
axis is called a double ordinate.
Latus Rectum : The focal chord perpendicular to the
major axis is called the latus rectum.
Length of latus rectum (LL’) :
NOTES :
2b 2 (minor axis)2
= = 2a(1 – e2)
a major axis (PN) b Semi major axis
(i)  
(QN) a Semi major axis
= 2e (distance from focus to the corresponding directrix).
Centre : (ii) If from each point of a circle perpendiculars are
The point which bisects every chord of the conic drawn drawn upon a fixed diameter then the locus of the
through it is called the centre of the conic. C  (0, 0) points dividing these perpendiculars internally in a
given ratio is an ellipse of which the given circle
x 2 y2
the origin is the centre of the ellipse  1 is the auxiliary circle.
a 2 b2
SCAN CODE
Conic Sections
CONIC SECTIONS
44
18. PARAMETRIC REPRESENTATION xx1 yy 1

(b) Point form: + = 1 is tangent to the ellipse
2
a b2
The equation x = a cos  & y = b sin  together represent
at (x1,y1). (Using T = 0)
x 2 y2
the ellipse  1 xcosθ ysinθ
a 2 b2 (c) Parametric form: + = 1 is tangent
a b
Where  is a parameter. Note that if
to the ellipse at the point (a cos , b sin ).
P()  (a cos , b sin ) is on the ellipse then;
Q ()  (a cos , a sin ) is on the auxiliary circle.
NOTES :
19. POSITION OF A POINT W.R.T. AN ELLIPSE
(i) There are two tangents to the ellipse having the same
The point P (x1, y1) lies outside, inside or on the ellipse
m, i.e. there are two tangents parallel to any given
according as ; direction. These tangents touches the ellipse at
x12 y12 extremities of a diameter.
2
 2 –1>0 (outside)
a b (ii) Point of intersection of the tangents at the point  &
x12 y12  is :
2
 2 –1<0 (inside)
a b
x12 y12
 –1=0 (on)     
a2 b2  cos sin 
a 2 ,b 2 
20. LINE AND AN ELLIPSE  cos    cos    
 
 2 2 
x 2 y2
The line y = mx + c meets the ellipse   1 in two
a 2 b2
points real, coincident or imaginary according as c² is (iii) The eccentric angles of point of contact of two parallel
<, = or > a2m2 + b2. tangents differ by .
x 2 y2
Hence y = mx + c is tangent to the ellipse  1
a 2 b2
if c2 = a2m2 + b2.
22. NORMALS
The equation to the chord of the ellipse joining two points
(i) Equation of the normal at (x1, y1) is
with eccentric angles  and  is given by
x α +β y α +β α -β a2 x b2 y
cos + sin = cos - = a2 – b2 = a2e2.
. x1 y1
a 2 b 2 2
21. TANGENTS (ii) Equation of the normal at the point (acos , bsin ) is;
ax sec – by cosec = (a2 – b2).
(a) Slope form: y = mx ± a 2m 2 + b 2 is tangent to (iii) Equation of a normal in terms of its slope 'm' is
the ellipse for all values of m. (a 2 - b 2 )m

y = mx -
a2 + b 2m2
SCAN CODE
Conic Sections
CONIC SECTIONS
45
(i) PF. PG = b2
23. DIRECTOR CIRCLE
(ii) PF. Pg = a2
Locus of the point of intersection of the tangents which
(iii) PG. Pg = SP. S'P
meet at right angles is called the Director Circle. The
equation to this locus is x2 + y2 = a2 + b2 i.e. a circle (iv) CG. CT = CS2
whose centre is the centre of the ellipse & whose radius (v) locus of the mid point of Gg is another
is the length of the line joining the ends of the major & ellipse having the same eccentricity as
minor axis. that of the original ellipse.
[Where S and S' are the foci of the ellipse and T
NOTES : is the point where tangent at P meet the major
axis]
Pair of tangents, Chord of contact, Chord with a given Middle
* The circle on any focal distance as diameter
point are to be interpreted as they are in Parabola/Circle.
touches the auxiliary circle. Perpendiculars from
the centre upon all chords which join the ends
24. IMPORTANT RESULTS of any perpendicular diameters of the ellipse are
of constant length.
x 2 y2 * If the tangent at the point P of a standard ellipse
Referring to the ellipse  1
a 2 b2 meets the axis in T and t and CY is the
(a) If P be any point on the ellipse with S & S' as perpendicular on it from the centre then :
to foci then l(SP) + l(S'P) = 2a. (i) T t. PY = a2 – b2 and
(b) The tangent & normal at a point P on the ellipse (ii) least value of T t is a + b.
bisect the external and internal angles between
the focal distances of P. This refers to the well HYPERBOLA
known reflection property of the ellipse which
The Hyperbola is a conic whose eccentricity is greater
states that rays from one focus are reflected
through other focus & vice-versa. Hence we than unity (e > 1).(S)
can deduce that the straight lines joining each
focus to the foot of the perpendicular from the 25. STANDARD EQUATION & DEFINITION (S)
other focus upon the tangent at any point P meet
on the normal PG and bisects it where G is the
point where normal at P meets the major axis.
(c) The product of the length's of the perpendicular
segments from the foci on any tangent to the
ellipse is b² and the feet of these perpendiculars
lie on its auxiliary circle and the tangents at these
feet to the auxiliary circle meet on the ordinate
of P and that the locus of their point of
intersection is a similar ellipse as that of the
original one.
(d) The portion of the tangent to an ellipse between
the point of contact & the directrix subtends a x2 y 2
Standard equation of the hyperbola is - =1,
right angle at the corresponding focus. a2 b2
(e) If the normal at any point P on the ellipse with where b2 = a2 (e2 – 1).
centre C meet the major and minor axes in G & 2
g respectively & if CF be perpendicular upon b2  C.A 
Eccentricity (e) : e2 = 1 + 2
= 1+ 
this normal then : a  T.A 
SCAN CODE
Conic Sections
CONIC SECTIONS
46
(C.A  Conjugate Axis;

26. RECTANGULAR OR EQUILATERAL HYPERBOLA
T.A  Transverse Axis)
Foci : S  (ae, 0) & S'  (–ae, 0). The particular kind of hyperbola in which the lengths of
the transverse and conjugate axis are equal is called an
a a Equilateral Hyperbola. Note that the eccentricity of the
Equations of Directrix : x  &x 
e e
rectangular hyperbola is 2.
Transverse Axis : The line segment A'A of length 2a in
which the foci S' & S both lie is called the transverse axis
27. CONJUGATE HYPERBOLA
of the hyperbola.
Conjugate Axis : The line segment B'B between the Two hyperbolas such that transverse & conjugate axes
two points B' (0, –b) & B (0, b) is called as the of one hyperbola are respectively the conjugate & the
conjugate axis of the hyperbola. transverse axes of the other are called Conjuagate
Principal Axes : The transverse & conjugate axis Hyperbolas of each other.
together are called Principal Axes of the hyperbola.
x2 y2 x2 y2
Vertices : A  (a, 0) & A'  (–a, 0) e.g. – =1 & – + = 1 are conjugate
a2 b2 a2 b2
Focal Chord : A chord which passes through a focus is
hyperbolas of each other.
called a focal chord.
Double Ordinate : A chord perpendicular to the transverse
NOTES :
axis is called a double ordinate.
Latus Rectum (l) L : The focal chord perpendicular to (a) If e1 and e2 are the eccentricities of the hyperbola
the transverse axis is called the latus rectum. and its conjugate then e1–2 + e2–2 = 1.
(b) The foci of a hyperbola and its conjugate are concyclic
2b 2 (C.A.)2 and form the vertices of a square.
= = = 2a (e2 – 1)
a T.A.
(c) Two hyperbolas are said to be similiar if they have the
same eccentricity.
NOTES : (d) Two similiar hyperbolas are said to be equal if they
have same latus rectum.
(i) l (L.R.) = 2 e (distance from focus to corresponding
directrix). (e) If a hyperbola is equilateral then the conjugate
hyperbola is also equilateral.
(ii) Centre : The point which bisects every chord of the
conic drawn through it is called the centre of the conic.
C  (0, 0) the origin is the centere of the hyperbola 28. AUXILIARY CIRCLE
2 2
x y
 1 A circle drawn with centre C & T.A. as a diameter is
a 2 b2 called the Auxiliary Circle of the hyperbola. Equation of
(iii) Since the fundamental equation to the hyperbola only the auxiliary circle is x2 + y2 = a2.
differs from that to the ellipse in having –b2 instead Note from the figure that P & Q are called the
of b2 it will be found that many propositions for the "Corresponding Points" on the hyperbola and the
hyperbola are derived from those for the ellipse by auxiliary circle.
simply changing the sign of b2.
In the hyperbola any ordinate of the curve does not meet
(iv) If centre of standard hyperbola is shifted to (h, k) the circle on AA' as diameter in real points. There is
without rotation, then hyperbola equation is therefore no real eccentric angle as in the case of the
2 2 ellipse.
 x – h y – k
– 1
a2 b2
SCAN CODE
Conic Sections
CONIC SECTIONS
47
32. TANGENTS
(i) Slope Form : y = mx + a 2 m 2 - b 2 can be taken
x 2 y2
as the tangent to the hyperbola  1
a 2 b2
(ii) Point Form : Equation of tangent to the
x 2 y2
hyperbola   1 at the point (x1 y1) is
a 2 b2
xx1 yy 1
- = 1 (Using T = 0)
29. PARAMETRIC REPRESENTATION a2 b 2
(iii) Parametric Form : Equation of the tangent to the
The equation x = a sec  & y = b tan  together represents
x 2 y2
hyperbola   1 at the point (a sec , b tan )
a 2 b2
x 2 y2
the hyperbola   1 where  is a parameter..
a 2 b2 xsecθ ytanθ
- = 1.
a b
Note that if P()  (a sec, b tan ) is on the hyperbola
then ; NOTES :
Q ()  (a cos, a sin) is on the auxiliary circle.
(i) Point of intersection of the tangents at 1 & 2 is :
30. POSITION OF A POINT 'P' W.R.T. A HYPERBOLA 1   2

cos
xa 2 , y  b tan 1   2 
1   2  2 
x12 y12 cos
The quantity S1   –1 is positive, zero or 2
a 2 b2
(ii) If |1 + 2| = , then tangents at these points
negative according as the point (x1, y1) lies inside, on or
(1 & 2) are parallel.
outside the curve.
(iii) There are two parallel tangents having the same slope
m. These tangents touches the hyperbola at the
31. LINE AND A HYPERBOLA extremities of a diameter.
The straight line y = mx + c is a secant, a tangent or

33. NORMALS
x 2 y2
passes outside the hyperbola 2  2  1 according as (i) The equation of the normal to the hyperbola
a b
: c2 > or = or < a2m2 – b2, respectively. x 2 y2
  1 at the point P (x 1 , y1) on it is
a 2 b2
The equation to the chord of the hyperbola joining two
a2 x b2 y
points with eccentric angles  and  is given by + = a2 + b2 = a2e2
x1 y1
x α –β y α+β α+β (ii) The equation of the normal at the point
cos – sin = cos .
a 2 b 2 2 P (a sec , b tan ) on the hyperbola
SCAN CODE
Conic Sections
CONIC SECTIONS
48
x 2 y2 ax by
35. RECTANGULAR HYPERBOLA (xy = c2)
2
 2  1 is + = a2 + b2 = a2e2.
a b secθ tanθ
(iii) Equation of a normal in terms of its slope 'm' is It is referred to its asymptotes as axes of co-ordinates.
(a2 + b 2 )m Vertices : (c, c) and (–c, –c) ;
y = mx  .
a2 - b2m 2
NOTES :
Equation to the chord of contact, chord with a given middle

point, pair of tangents from an external point is to be
interpreted as in parabola/circle.
34. DIRECTOR CIRCLE Foci : ( 2c, 2c) & ( 2c,  2c),
The locus of the intersection point of tangents which are Directrices : x + y = ± 2c

at right angles is known as the Director Circle of the
Latus Rectum (l) : l = 2 2 c = T.A. = C.A.
hyperbola. The equation to the director circle is :
Parametric equation x = ct, y = c/t, t  R – {0}
x2 + y2 = a2 – b2.
Equation of a chord joining the points P(t1) & Q(t2) is
If b2 < a2 this circle is real. x + t1t2y = c(t1 + t2).
If b2 = a2 (rectangular hyperbola) the radius of the circle
x y
is zero and it reduces to a point circle at the origin. In Equation of the tangent at P (x1 y1) is x + y = 2 and
1 1
this case the centre is the only point from which the
tangents at right angles can be drawn to the curve. x
at P(t) is + ty = 2c.
t
If b2 > a2, the radius of the circle is imaginary, so that
Equation of the normal at P(t) is xt3 – yt = c(t4 – 1).
there is no such circle & so no pair of tangents at right
Chord with a given middle point as (h, k) is kx + hy = 2hk.
angle can be drawn to the curve.
36. IMPORTANT RESULTS

NOTES :
(i) The difference of of focal distances of any point
A simple method to find the co-ordinates of the centre of P on hyperbola constant, i.e, |PS – PS’| = 2a
the hyperbola expressed as a general equation of degree 2
should be remembered as : (ii) Locus of the feet of the perpendicular drawn from
Let f(x y) = 0 represents a hyperbola. x 2 y2
focus of the hyperbola   1 upon any
a 2 b2
f f
Find & . Then the point of intersection of tangent is its auxiliary circle i.e.
x y x2 + y2 = a2 & the product of the feet of these
perpendiculars is b2.
f f (iii) The portion of the tangent between the point of
0&  0 gives the centre of the hyperbola.
x y contact & the directrix subtends a right angle at
the corresponding focus.
SCAN CODE
Conic Sections
CONIC SECTIONS
49
(iv) The tangent & normal at any point of a

hyperbola bisect the angle between the focal x2 y2
hyperbola  =1
radii. This spell the reflection property of the a 2  k 2 k 2  b2
hyperbola as "An incoming light ray" aimed (a > k > b > 0) are confocal and therefore
towards one focus is reflected from the outer orthogonal.
surface of the hyperbola towards the other focus.
(v) The foci of the hyperbola and the points P and
It follows that if an ellipse and a hyperbola have
Q in which any tangent meets the tangents at
the same foci, they cut at right angles at any of
the vertices are concyclic with PQ as diameter of
their common point.
the circle.
(vi) A rectangular hyperbola circumscribing a triangle
Y also passes through the orthocentre of this
Light Ray
Tangent  c
Q triangle. If  ct i ,  i = 1, 2, 3 be the angular
  t i 
P points P, Q, R then orthocentre is


X  c 
S’ S  ,ct1 t 2 t 3 .
t t
 12 3t 
(vii) If a circle and the rectangular hyperbola xy = c2

meet in the four points, t1, t2, t3 and t4, then
(a) t1 t2 t3 t4 = 1
(b) The centre of the circle through the points t1,
x2
y2 t2, and t3 is :
Note that the ellipse   1 & the
a 2 b2
 c  1  c 1 1 1 
  t1  t 2  t 3  ,     t1  t 2  t 3 
 2  t 1t 2 t 3  2  t1 t 2 t 3 
SCAN CODE
Conic Sections
CONIC SECTIONS 50

Identifying the conic 9. The length of the latus-rectum of the parabola
x = ay2 + by + c is
1. The name of the conic represented by the equation
x2 + y2 – 2xy + 20x + 10 = 0 is a a
(a) (b)
(a) a hyperbola (b) an ellipse 4 3
(c) a parabola (d) circle
1 1
2. The name of the curve described parametrically by the (c) (d)
a 4a
equations x = t2 + t + 1, y = t2 – t + 1 is
(a) a circle (b) an ellipse 10. Vertex, focus, latus rectum, length of the latus rectum and
(c) a hyperbola (d) a parabola equation of directrix of the parabola y2 = 4x + 4y are
3. The equation x2 + 4xy + y2 + x + 3y + 2 = 0 represents a (a) (1, 2), (0, 2), y = 0, 4, x = –2
parabola, if is (b) (–1, 2), (0, 2), x = 0, 4, x = –2
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) (–1, 2), (1, 2), x = 0, 4, x = 2

(d) (–1, 2), (0, 2), y = 0, 2, y = –2
(c) 4 (d) 5
11. If the vertex = (2, 0) and the extremities of the latus rectum
Standard parabola & their equations
are (3, 2) and (3, –2), then the equation of the parabola is
4. The equation of the parabola whose focus is (–1, 1) and (a) y2 = 2x – 4 (b) x2 = 2y – 8
directrix is 4x + 3y – 24 = 0 is (c) y2 = 4x – 8 (d) none of these
2 2
(a) 9x + 16y – 24xy + 242x + 94y – 526 = 0 12. If focus of a parabola is (2, 0) and one extremity of latus
2 2
(b) 16x + 9y – 24xy + 242x + 94y – 526 = 0 rectum is (2, 2), then its equation is
(c) 2x2 – 23y2 + 7xy + 32x + 17y + 40 = 0 (a) y2 = 4 (3 – x) (b) y2 = 4x – 4
(d) none of these (c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these
2
5. The equation of the directrix of the parabola y = 12 x is – 13. Equation of parabola which has its axis along x-axis and
(a) x + 3 = 0 (b) y + 3 = 0 which passes through the points (3, 2) and (–2, –1) is
(c) x – 3 = 0 (d) y – 3 = 0 (a) 5y2 = 3x + 11 (b) y2 = 3x – 1
6. The equation of the latus rectum of the parabola (c) y2 = x + 3 (d) none of these
2
x = –12y is–
14. The equation of the parabola whose axis is parallel to
(a) y = 3 (b) x = 3 y-axis and which passes through the points (0, 4), (1, 9)
(c) y = –3 (d) x = –3
and (–2, 6) is given by
7. The coordinates of an end-point of the latus-rectum of the
(a) 2y2 + 3y – x + 4 = 0 (b) 3x2 + 2x + y – 4 = 0
parabola (y–1)2 = 4(x+1) are
(c) 2x2 + 3x – y + 4 = 0 (d) none of the above
(a) (0, –3) (b) (0, –1)
(c) (0, 1) (d) (1, 3) 15. The equation of the parabola having its axis parallel to
x-axis and which passes through the points (1, 2), (–1,3)
8. Coordinates of the focus of the parabola
and (–2, 1) is
x2 – 4x – 8y – 4 = 0 are
(a) 5y2 + 2x – 21y + 20 = 0 (b) 5y2 – 2x – 21y + 20 = 0
(a) (0, 2) (b) (2, 1)
(c) 5x2 – 2x – 21y – 20 = 0 (d) none of the above
(c) (1, 2) (d) (–2, –1)
CONIC SECTIONS 51
16. The locus of the vertex of the family of parabolas 23. The equation of the tangent to the parabola y2 = 4ax at
point (a/t2, 2a/t) is
a 3x 2 a 2 x (a) ty = xt2 + a (b) ty = x + at2
y=  – 2a is
3 2
(c) y = tx + at2 (d) y = tx + (a/t2)
24. The equations of common tangents to y2 = 4ax and
105 3
(a) xy = (b) xy = (x + a)2 + y2 = a2 are
64 4
 x   a 
35 64 (a) y   a (b) y    3x  
(c) xy = (d) xy =  3   3
16 105
17. Let P be the point (1, 0) and Q a point on the locus  x 

(c) y     3 a (d) none of these
y2 = 8x. The locus of mid point of PQ is  3 
(a) x2 – 4y + 2 = 0 (b) x2 + 4y + 2 = 0
25. Two common tangents to the circle x2 + y2 = 2a2 and
(c) y2 + 4x + 2 = 0 (d) y2 – 4x + 2 = 0 parabola y2 = 8ax are
Parametric form of a parabola (a) x = ± (y + 2a) (b) y = ± (x + 2a)
(c) x = ± (y + a) (d) y = ± (x + a)
18. The parametric equation of the curve (y – 2)2 = 12 (x – 4)
26. The slope of the line touching both the parabolas y2 = 4x
are–
and x2 = –32y is :
(a) 6t, 3t2 (b) 2 + 3t, 4 + t2
(c) 4 + 3t2, 2 + 6t (d) None of these 2 1
(a) (b)
3 2
19. The parametric equation of a parabola is x = t2 + 1,
y = 2t + 1. The Cartesian equation of its directrix is
3 1
(a) x = 0 (b) x + 1 = 0 (c) (d)
2 8
(c) y = 0 (d) none of these
Standard ellipse & their equations
20. Any point on the parabola whose focus is (0, 1) and the
directrix is x + 2 = 0 is given by 27. The equation to the ellipse, whose focus is the point
(a) (t2 + 1, 2t–1) (b) (t2 + 1, 2t + 1) (–1, 1), whose directrix is the straight line x – y + 3 = 0, and
(c) (t2, 2t) (d) (t2 – 1, 2t + 1) 1
whose eccentricity is is
2
Various forms of tangents in parabola
(a) 7x2 + 2xy + 7y2 + 10x – 10y + 7 = 0
21. The focus of the parabola is (1, 1) and the tangent at the (b) x2 + 2xy + 10x – 10y + 3 = 0
vertex has the equation x + y = 1. Then which of the (c) 3x2 + xy + 10x – 10y + 3 = 0
following is incorrect (d) None of these
(a) equation of the parabola is (x – y)2 = 2 (x + y – 1)
x2 y2
(b) equation of the parabola is (x – y)2 = 4 (x + y – 1) 28. The equation   1 represents an ellipse, if
10  a 4  a
1 1 (a) a < 4 (b) a > 4
(c) the co-ordinates of the vertex are  , 
2 2 (c) 4 < a < 10 (d) a > 10
29. A line of fixed length a + b moves so that its ends are
(d) length of the latus rectum is 2 2 always on two fixed perpendicular straight lines; then
22. The tangent to the parabola y2 = 16x, which is perpendicular the locus of a point, which divides this line into
to a line y – 3x – 1 = 0 is portions of length a and b, is a/an
(a) 3y + x + 36 = 0 (b) 3y – x – 36 = 0 (a) ellipse (b) parabola
(c) x + y – 36 = 0 (d) x – y + 36 = 0 (c) straight line (d) none of these
CONIC SECTIONS 52
30. The equation of the latus rectum of the ellipse 38. If P is a moving point in the xy–plane in such a way that
9x2 + 4y2 –18x – 8y – 23 = 0 are perimeter of triangle PQR is 16
(a) y   5 (b) y   5 {where Q  (3, 5 ), R  (7, 3 5 )} then maximum area

of triangle PQR is
(c) y  1  5 (d) x  1  5 (a) 6 sq. unit (b) 12 sq. unit
31. An ellipse has its centre at (1, –1) and semi major axis equal (c) 18 sq. unit (d) 9 sq. unit
to 8. If this ellipse passes through the point (1, 3), its
Parametric form of a ellipse
eccentricity is equal to
(a) 1/ 2 (b) 1/2 39. The curve represented by x = 2 (cos t + sin t),
y = 5 (cos t – sin t) is
(c) 3/2 (d) none of these (a) a circle (b) a parabola
32. The equation of the ellipse which passes through origin (c) an ellipse (d) a hyperbola
and has its foci at the points (1, 0) and (3, 0) is -
x 2 y2
(a) 3x2 + 4y2 = x (b) 3x2 + y2 = 12x 40. Parametric equation of the ellipse   1 is
16 9
(c) x2 + 4y2 = 12x (d) 3x2 + 4y2 = 12x
(a) x = 4 cos , y = 3 sin 
33. If the latus rectum of an ellipse is half of its minor axis, its
eccentricity is (b) x = 3 cos , y = 3 sin 
(a) 3/4 (b) 1/4 (c) x = 4 cos , y = 4 sin 

(d) x = 3 cos , y = 4 sin 
(c) 1/2 (d) 3/2
41. The parametric representation of a point on the ellipse
34. The length of the latus rectum of an ellipse is one third of
the major axis, its eccentricity would be 1
whose foci are (–1,0) and (7, 0) and eccentricity is
2
(a) 2/3 (b) (2 / 3)
(a) (3  8cos , 4 3 sin ) (b) (8cos , 4 3 sin )
(c) 1/ 3 (d) 1/ 2
(c) (3  4 3 cos , 8sin ) (d) none of these
35. Equation of the ellipse whose foci are (4, 0) and (–4, 0) and
e = 1/3 is
Position of line wrt ellipse
(a) x2 /9 + y2/8 = 16 (b) x2/8 + y2/9 = 16
(c) x2/9 + y2/8 = 32 (d) none of these x2 y2
42. The ellipse   1 and the straight line y = mx + c
36. The eccentricity of an ellipse, with its centre at the origin, a 2 b2
is 1/2. If one of the directrices is x = 4, then the equation of
intersect in real points only, if
the ellipse is
(a) a2m2 < c2 – b 2 (b) a2m2 > c2 + b2
(a) 4x2 + 3y2 = 12 (b) 3x2 + 4y2 = 12
(c) a2m2  c2 – b 2 (d) c  b
(c) x2 + y2 = 1 (d) 4x2 + 3y2 = 1
37. Equation of ellipse whose minor axis is equal to the distance x 2 y2
43. The line y = 2t2 intersects the ellipse   1 in real
between the foci and whose latus rectum is 10, is given by 9 4
(take origin as centre and major axis along x-axis) points, if
2 2 2 2
(a) 2x + y = 100 (b) x + 2y = 100 (a) | t |  1 (b) | t | < 2
2 2
(c) 2x + y = 50 (d) none of these (c) | t | > 1 (d) | t | 1
CONIC SECTIONS 53
44. The number of values of c such that the straight line 49. A circle of radius r is concentric with an ellipse
x2
y = 4x + c touches the curve  y 2  1 is x 2 y2
4   1. If common tangent is inclined to the
a 2 b2
(a) 0 (b) 1
2
(c) 2 (d) infinite major axis at an angle of  , then tan  equals-
Various forms of tangents in ellipse

r 2  b2 r 2  b2
(a) (b)
45. The equation of the tangents to the ellipse 4x2 + 3y2 = 5 a 2  b2 a2  r2
which are parallel to the line y = 3x + 7 are
r 2  b2 r2  a2
155 155 (c) (d)
(a) y  3x  (b) y  3x  r2  a2 b2  r 2
3 12
50. The locus of the foot of perpendicular drawn from the
95 centre of the ellipse x2 + 3y2 = 6 on any tangent to it is :
(c) y  3x  (d) none of these
12
(a) (x2 + y2)2 = 6x2 – 2y2 (b) (x2 – y2)2 = 6x2 + 2y2
x 2 y2 (c) (x2 – y2)2 = 6x2 – 2y2 (d) (x2 + y2)2 = 6x2 + 2y2
46. Equation of tangents to the ellipse   1, which are
9 4
Hyperbola & its standard equation
perpendicular to the line 3x + 4y = 7, are
51. Find the equation of the hyperbola whose directrix is
(a) 4x  3y   6 5 (b) 4x  3y   12
2x + y = 1, focus (1, 2) and eccentricity 3 .
(c) 4x  3y   2 (d) 4x – 3y = ± 1
(a) 7x2 – 2y2 + 12xy – 2x + 14y – 22 = 0
x2 y2 (b) 7x2 – 2y2 + 2xy – 2x + 14y – 22 = 0

47. The points on the ellipse   1 , such that the
a 2 b2 (c) 7x2 – 2y2 + xy – 14x + 2y – 22 = 0
tangent at that point makes equal angles with
(d) none of the above
coordinate axes is
52. If latus rectum of the hyperbola is half of its transverse
 a2 b2  axis, then its eccentricity is
(a)   ,  
 a 2  b2 a 2  b2 
(a) 3/2 (b) 3/2
 b2 a2 
(b)   2 ,  (c) (3 / 2) (d) none of these
 a  b2 a 2  b2 
x 2 y2
 1 1  53. If hyperbola   1 passes through the focus of
(c)   2 ,  b2 a 2
 a  b2 a 2  b2 
(d) None of these x 2 y2

ellipse   1 then eccentricity of hyperbola is -
48. The minimum area of a triangle formed by any tangent to a 2 b2
x 2 y2
the ellipse   1 and the co-ordinate axes is: 2
16 81 (a) 2 (b)
3
(a) 12 (b) 18
(c) 26 (d) 36 (c) 3 (d) None of these.
CONIC SECTIONS 54
54. The equation 16x2 – 3y2 – 32x + 12y – 44 = 0 represents 60. The eccentricity of the conjugate hyperbola of the
a hyperbola hyperbola x2 – 3y2 = 1 is
(a) the length of whose transverse axis is 4 3 2

(a) 2 (b)
3
(b) the length of whose conjugate axis is 4
(c) whose centre is (–1, 2) 4
(c) 4 (d)
3
19
(d) whose eccentricity is Various forms of tangents in hyperbola
3
55. The locus of the point of intersection of the lines 61. The equations of the tangents to the hyperbola
x 2 – 4y 2 = 36 which are perpendicular to the line
3 x  y  4 3k  0 and 3kx  ky  4 3  0 for x – y + 4 = 0 are
different values of k is-
(a) y   x  3 3 (b) y = –x ± 2
(a) Ellipse (b) Parabola
(c) Circle (d) Hyperbola (c) y   x  5 (d) none of these
62. The tangent at an extremity (in the first quadrant) of latus

x 2 y2
56. The two conics bx2 = y and 2  2  1 intersect iff - x 2 y2
a b rectum of the hyperbola   1, meets x-axis and y-
4 5
1 1 1 axis at A and B respectively. Then (OA)2–(OB)2, where O
(a)  a (b) a   is the origin, equals :
2 2 2
20 16
1 (a)  (b)
9 9
(c) a  (d) a < b
2
4
57. The foci of a hyperbola coincide with the foci of the ellipse (c) 4 (d) 
3
x2/25 + y2/9 = 1. If eccentricity of the hyperbola is 2, then its
equation is : 63. Equation of a common tangents to the curves y2 = 8x
and xy = -1 is
(a) x2 – 3y2 – 12 = 0 (b) 3x2 – y2 – 12 = 0
(a) 3y = 9x + 2 (b) y = 2x + 1
(c) x2 – y2 – 4 = 0 (d) none of these
(c) 2y = x + 8 (d) y = x + 2
Conjugate hyperbolas
58. One of the focus of the hyperbola
64. If the parabola y2 = 4ax passes through the point (–3, 2),
2 2
3(y – 1) – 4 ( x – 2) = 12 is
k
and the length of its latus rectum is . Then the value of
(a) (0, 7) (b) (2, 1  7) 3
k is
(c) (0, 1  7) (d) (0,  7)
65. A double ordinate of the parabola y2 = 8px is of length 16p. If
59. The eccentricity of the conic represented by the angle subtended by it at the vertex of the parabola is
x2 – y2 – 4x + 4y + 16 = 0 is 
, then the value of k is
k
(a) 1 (b) 2
66. Given the two ends of the latus rectum, the maximum
(c) 2 (d) 1/2 number of parabolas that can be drawn, is
CONIC SECTIONS 55
67. The point on y2 = 4ax nearest to the focus has its abscissa 75. The number of real tangents that can be drawn to the
equal to ellipse 3x2 + 5y2 = 32 passing through (3, 5) is
68. If the latus rectum of a parabola whose focal chord is PSQ 76. If the angle between pair of tangents drawn to the ellipse
k  k 
such that SP = 3 and SQ = 2 is given by . Then the value 3x2 + 2y2 = 5 from the point (1, 2) is tan 1   . Then k
5  5
of k is equals
2  1 x2 y2
69. If y = 2x –3 is a tangent to the parabola y  4a  x   ,   1 and the hyperbola
 3 77. If the foci of the elipse
25 b 2
k
and a is equal to  , then the value of k is x2 y2 1
3   coincide, then the value of b 2 is
144 81 25
70. If P (t2, 2t) t  [0, 2] is an arbitrary point on parabola
78. If the eccentricity of the hyperbola whose conjugate axis
y2 = 4x. Q is foot of perpendicular from focus S on the
tangent at P, then maximum area of PQS is 2
is equal to half the distance between the foci, is . Then
k
71. The angle between the tangents drawn to the parabola
y2 = 12x from the point (–3, 2) in degrees is the value of k is
72. The angle between the tangents drawn from the point 79. If e 1 and e 2 are the eccentricities of a hyperbola
(1, 4) to the parabola y2 = 4x in degree is 3x2 – 3y2 = 25 and its conjugate, then e12  e22 equals
73. If the centre of the ellipse 8x2 + 6y2 – 16x + 12y + 13 = 0 is
80. If e and e1 are the eccentricities of the hyperbolas xy = c2
(a, b), then 2a + b equals
and x2 – y2 = a2, then (e + e1)2 is equal to
x2 y2
74. S and T are the foci of the ellipse   1 and B is
a 2 b2
an end of the minor axis. If STB is an equilateral triangle,
1
and the eccentricity of the ellipse is . Then the value
k
of k is
CONIC SECTIONS 56

Questions marked with asterisk (*) are 5 *. Let a parabola P be such that its vertex and focus lie on
the positive x-axis at a distance 2 and 4 units from the
1. Let y  mx  c, m  0 be the focal chord of y 2  64x, origin, respectively. If tangents arte drawn O(0, 0) be the
parabola P which mets P at S and R, then the area (in sq.
which is tangent to  x  10   y 2  4. Then, the value of
2
units of SOR is equal to ? (25-07-2021/Shift-1)
4 2  m  c  is equal to ____. (20-07-2021/Shift-1) (a) 16 2 (b) 32
2. Let P be a variable point on the parabola y  4x 2  1 . (c) 16 (d) 8 2

Then the locus of the mid-point of the point P and the
6. A ray of light through (2,1) is reflected at a point P on the
foot of the perpendicular drawn from the point P to the
y – axis and then passes through the point (5,3). If this
line y  x is ? (20-07-2021/Shift-2) reflected ray is the directrix of an ellipse with eccentricity
(a)  3x  y    x  3y   2  0
2
1
and the distance of the nearer focus from this directrix
3
(b) 2  x  3y    3x  y   2  0
2
8
is , then the equation of the other directrix can be :
(c) 2  3x  y    x  3y   2  0 53
2
(27-07-2021/Shift-1)
(d)  3x  y   2  x  3y   2  0
2
(a) 2x  7y  39  0 or 2x  7y  7  0
3 *. If the point on the curve y  6x, nearest to the point
2
(b) 11x  7y  8  0 or 11x  y  15  0

 3
 3,  is  ,   , then 2      is equal to ______ ? (c) 2x  7y  29  0 or 2x  7y  7  0
 2
(20-07-2021/Shift-2) (d) 11x  7y  8  0 or 11x  7y  15  0
4. The locus of the centroid of the triangle formed by any 7 *. Let E be an ellipse whose axes are parallel to the
point P on the hyperbola co-ordinates axes, having its centre at (3, –4), one focus at
16x 2  9y 2  32x  36y  164  0, and its foci is ? (4, – 4) and one vertex at (5, –4). If mx  y  4, m  0 is a
(25-07-2021/Shift-1) tangent to the ellipse E , then the value of 5m 2 is equal to
(a) 9x 2  16y 2  36x  32y  36  0 (27-07-2021/Shift-2)
(b) 16x 2  9y 2  32x  36y  36  0 8 *. Let a line L : 2x  y  k, k  0 be a tangent to the
hyperbola x 2  y 2  3. If L is also a tangent to the

(c) 16x 2  6y 2  32x  36y  144  0
parabola y 2  x, then  is equal to :
(d) 9x 2  16y 2  36x  32y  144  0
(22-07-2021/Shift-2)
(a) 24 (b) –12
(c) –24 (d) 12
CONIC SECTIONS 57

13*. 
The point P 2 6, 3  lies on the hyperbola
x 2 y2 x 2 y2 5
9. Let E1 :   1, a  b. Let E 2 be another ellipse such   1 having eccentricity . If the tangent and
a 2 b2 a 2 b2 2
that it touches the end points of major axis of E1 and the normal at P to the hyperbola intersect its conjugate axis at
the points Q and R respectively, then QR is equal to:
foci E 2 are the end points of minor axis of E1 . If E1 . and
(26-08-2021/Shift-2)
E 2 have same eccentricities, then its value is :
(22-07-2021/Shift-2) (a) 6 3 (b) 4 3
1  3 1  6 (c) 6 (d) 3 6
(a) (b)
2 2 14*. If the minimum area of the triangle formed by a tangent to
1  5 1  8 x 2 y2
(c) (d) the ellipse 2  2  1 and the coordinate axis is kab ,
2 2 b 4a
10. If a tangent to the ellipse x 2  4y 2  4 meets the tangents then k is equal to ______. (27-08-2021/Shift-1)
at the extremities of its major axis at B and C, then the
circle with BC as diameter passes through the point 15*. A tangent and a normal are drawn at the point P  2, – 4 
(25-07-2021/Shift-2) on the parabola y 2  8x, which meet the directrix of the

(a) (–1, 1) (b) (1, 1) parabola at the points A and B respectively. If Q  a, b 
(c)  3, 0  (d)  2, 0  is a point such that AQBP is a square, then 2a  b is
equal to: (27-08-2021/Shift-1)
1 3
11. Consider the parabola with vertex  ,  and the directrix (a) –16 (b) –20
2 4
(c) –18 (d) –12
1
y  . Let P be the point where the parabola meets the
2
x 2 y2
16. On the ellipse   1 let P be a point in the second
1 8 4
line x   . If the normal to parabola at P intersects the
2 quadrant such that the tangent at P to the ellipse is
parabola at the point Q, then  PQ  is equal to
2
perpendicular to the line x  2y  0. Let S and S be the
(01-09-2021/Shift-2) foci of the ellipse and e be its eccentricity. If A is the area
of the triangle SPS then, the value of  5  e  . A is:

2
25 75
(a) (b)
2 8 (26-08-2021/Shift-1)
15 125 (a) 24 (b) 6
(c) (d)
2 16 (c) 14 (d) 12
12. The locus of the midpoints of the chords of the hyperbola 17*. If a line along a chord of the circle
x  y  4, which touch the parabola y 2  8x is:
2 2
4x 2  4y 2  120x  675  0, passes through the point

(26-08-2021/Shift-2)
(–30, 0) and is tangent to the parabola y 2  30x, then
(a) x 3  x  2   y 2 (b) x 2  x  2   y3
the length of this chord is: (26-08-2021/Shift-1)
(c) y 2  x  2   x 3 (d) y3  x  2   x 2
(a) 5 (b) 3 5
(c) 7 (d) 5 3
CONIC SECTIONS 58
Questions marked with asterisk (*) are (31-08-2021/Shift-2)

deleted from JEE Main 24*. Let C be the locus of the mirror image of a point on the
18*. If two tangents drawn from a point P to the parabola parabola y2 = 4x with respect to the line y = x. Then the
equation of tangent to C at P(2,1) is :
y 2  16  x  3 are at right angles, then the locus of point
(16-03-2021/Shift-2)
P is : (27-08-2021/Shift-2)
(a) x – y = 1 (b) 2x + y = 5
(a) x  3  0 (b) x  2  0
(c) x + 2y = 4 (d) x + 3y = 5
(c) x  4  0 (d) x  1  0
x 2 y2
 1
19*. Let A  
2 sec , tan  and B  
2 sec , tan  , where
25. If the points of intersections of the ellipse
16 b 2
and the circle x2 + y2 = 4b, b > 4 lie on the curve y2 = 3x2,
 then b is equal to (16-03-2021/Shift-2)
    , be two points on the hyperbola x 2  2y 2  2.
2
(a) 10 (b) 5
If  ,   is the point of the intersection of the normals to
(c) 12 (d) 6
the hyperbola at A and B, then  2  is equal to _____.
2
26*. The locus of the midpoints of the chord of the circle
(27-08-2021/Shift-2) x 2  y 2  25 which is tangent to the hyperbola
20*. The line 12x cos   5y sin   60 is tangent to which of x 2 y2

  1 is (16-03-2021/Shift-1)
the following curves ? (31-08-2021/Shift-1) 9 16
(a) 25x 2  12y 2  3600 (b) 144x 2  25y 2  3600 (a)  x 2  y 2   9x 2  16y 2  0
2
(c) x 2  y 2  169 (d) x 2  y 2  60

 
2
(b) x 2  y 2  9x 2  16y 2  0
21. The length of the latus rectum of a parabola, whose vertex
and focus are on the positive x-axis at a distance R and S
(c)  x 2  y 2   16x 2  9y 2  0
2
 R  respectively from the origin, is ?
(d)  x 2  y 2   9x 2  144y 2  0
2
(31-08-2021/Shift-1)
(a) 4  S  R  (b) 2  S  R 
27*. If the three normals drawn to the parabola y 2  2x pass
(c) 2  S  R  (d) 4  S  R  through the point  a, 0  a  0 , then ‘ a ’ must be greater
22. The locus of mid-points of the line segments joining than (16-03-2021/Shift-1)
x 2 y2 1
(–3, –5) and the points on the ellipse   1 is: (a)  (b) 1
4 9 2
(31-08-2021/Shift-2)
1
(c) (d) 1
(a) 36x  16y  90x  56y  145  0
2 2
2
(b) 36x 2  16y 2  108x  80y  145  0 28*. Let L be a tangent line to the parabola y 2  4x  20 at
(c) 36x 2  16y 2  72x  32y  145  0 x 2 y2

(6, 2). If L is also a tangent to the ellipse   1, then
2 b
(d) 9x 2  4y 2  18x  8y  145  0 the value of b is equal to : (17-03-2021/Shift-2)
23*. A tangent line L is drawn at the point (2, –4) on the parabola (a) 16 (b) 20
y 2  8x . If the line L is also tangent to the circle (c) 11 (d) 14
x 2  y 2  a , then ‘ a ’ is equal to _______________.

CONIC SECTIONS 59
Questions marked with asterisk (*) are 34. A hyperbola passes through the foci of the ellipse
deleted from JEE Main x 2 y2
  1 and its transverse and conjugate axes
29*. Consider a hyperbola H : x 2  2y 2  4. Let the tangent 25 16
coincide with major and minor axes of the ellipse,
at a point P (4, 6) meet the x-axis at Q and latus rectum
respectively. If the product of their eccentricities is one,
at R (x1 , y1 ), x1  0. If F is a focus of H which is nearer then the equation of the hyperbola is:
to the point P, then the area of QFR is equal to. (25-02-2021/Shift-2)
(18-03-2021/Shift-2)
x 2 y2
(a)  1 (b) x 2  y 2  9
7 9 16
(a) 4 6  1 (b) 2
6
x 2 y2 x 2 y2
(c)  1 (d)  1
(c) 4 6 (d) 6 1 9 25 9 4
30*. A line is common tangent to the circle  x  3   y 2  9

2
A square ABCD has all its vertices on the curve x 2 y 2  1. 35*.
The midpoints of its sides also lie on the same curve.
and y 2  4x. If the two points of contact  a, b  and
Then, the square of area of ABCD is .................. .
(18-03-2021/Shift-1)  c, d  are distinct and lie in the first quadrant, then
31*. For which of the following curves, the line 2  a  c  is equal to: (25-02-2021/Shift-2)
x  3y  2 3 is the tangent at the point
36*. A tangent is drawn to the parabola y 2  6x which is
(24-02-2021/Shift-2)
perpendicular to the line 2x  y  1 . Which of the
(a) 2x  18y  9
2 2
(b) x  9y  9
2 2
following points does NOT lie on it?
(25-02-2021/Shift-1)
1
(c) y 
2
x (d) x  y  7
2 2
(a) (0, 3) (b) (4, 5)
6 3
(c) (-6, 0) (d) (5, 4)
32. The locus of the mid-point of the line segment joining the
37. The locus of the point of intersection of the lines
focus of the parabola y 2  4ax to a moving point of the
parabola, is another parabola whose directrix is  3  kx  ky  4 3  0 and 3x  y  4  3  k  0 is a
(24-02-2021/Shift-1) conic, whose eccentricity is _____.
(25-02-2021/Shift-1)
a
(a) x  (b) x  0
2 38*. Let L be a common tangent line to the curves
4x 2  9y 2  36 and  2x    2y   31.
2 2
a
(c) x   (d) x  a
2 Then the square of the slope of the line L is ________.
33. If the curve x 2  2y 2  2 intersects the line x  y  1 at (26-02-2021/Shift-2)
two points P and Q , then the angle subtended by the 39*. Let the tangent to the parabola S : y 2  2x at the point
line segment PQ at the origin is : P  2, 2  meet the x  axis at Q and normal at it meet the
(25-02-2021/Shift-2) parabola S at the point R. Then the area (in sq. units) of
the triangle PQR is equal to: (26-02-2021/Shift-2)
 1  1
(a)  tan 1   (b)  tan 1  
2 3 2 4 25
(a) 25 (b)
2
 1  1
(c)  tan 1   (d)  tan 1  
2 4 2  3 15 35
(c) (d)
2 2
CONIC SECTIONS 60
Questions marked with asterisk (*) are (a)

3
(b)
1
2 2 2
40. *Let  x  2 y   be a tangent to the hyperbola 1 1
(c) (d)
2 2 2 2
  
a 2 x 2  y 2  b 2 . Then      is equal to : x2 y2
a b 46. The normal to the hyperbola   1 at the point
a2 9
(JEE Main 2022)
(a) -2 (b) -4 (8, 3 3) on it passes through the point :
(c) 2 (d) 4 (JEE Main 2022)
t 2
(a) (15, 2 3) (b) (9, 2 3)
41. Let x  2t , y be conic. Let S be the focus and B
3 (c) (1, 9 3) (d) (1, 6 3)
be the point on the axis of the conic such that
x2 y2
SA  BA, where A is any point on the conic. If k is the 47. Let the eccentricity of an ellipse   1, a  b, be
a2 b2
ordinate of the centroid of SAB, then lim k is equal
t 1
1  2 
to (JEE Main 2022)
. If this ellipse passes through the point  4 , 3  ,
4  5 
17 19
(a) (b) then a 2  b2 is equal to :
18 18
(JEE Main 2022)
11 13
(c) (d) (a) 29 (b) 31
18 18 (c) 32 (d) 34
x2 y2 48. If the equation of the parabola, whose vertex is at (5,
42. The line y  x  1 meets the ellipse   1 at two
4 2 4) and the directrix is
points P and Q. If r is the radius of the circle with PQ 3 x  y  29  0, is x  ay  bxy  cx  dy  k  0
2 2
as diameter then (3r )2 is equal to (JEE Main 2022) then a  b  c  d  k is equal to (JEE Main 2022)
(a) 20 (b) 12 (a) 575 (b) -575
(c) 11 (d) 8 (c) 576 (d) -576
43. *Let the normal at the point P on the parabola x2 y2
49. *Let the eccentricity of the hyperbola H :  1
y  6 x pass through the point (5, –8). If the tangent
2
a2 b2
at P to the parabola intersects its directrix at the point 5
be and length of its latus rectum be 6 2 , If
Q, then the ordinate of the point Q is : (JEE Main 2
2022) y  2 x  c is a tangent to the hyperbola H, then the
9
(a)  3 (b)  value of c 2 is equal to (JEE Main 2022)
4
(a) 18 (b) 20
5 (c) 24 (d) 32
(c)  (d)  2
2 50. Let a  0, b  0 . Let e and  respectively be the
44. *If m is the slope of a common tangent to the curves eccentricity and length of the latus rectum of the
x2 y2 x2 y2
  1 and x 2  y 2  12, then 12m 2 is equal to : hyperbola   1. Let e and   respectively
16 9 a 2 b2
(JEE Main 2022) the eccentricity and length of the latus rectum of its
(a) 6 (b) 9 11 11
(c) 10 (d) 12 conjugate hyperbola. If e2   and (e)2  ,
14 8
45. The locus of the mid point of the line segment joining
then the value of 77a  44b is equal to
the point (4, 3) and the points on the ellipse
(JEE Main 2022)
x  2 y  4 is an ellipse with eccentricity :
2 2
(a) 100 (b) 110
(JEE Main 2022) (c) 120 (d) 130
CONIC SECTIONS 61
Questions marked with asterisk (*) are 56. Let the foci of the ellipse
x2 y 2
  1 and the
16 7
x2 y2 1
51. If vertex of a parabola is (2,  1) and the equation of hyperbola   coincide. Then the length of
144  25
its directrix is 4 x  3 y  21, then the length of its latus the latus rectum of the hyperbola is :-
rectum is (JEE Main 2022) (JEE Main 2022)
(a) 2 (b) 8 32 18
(a) (b)
(c) 12 (d) 16 9 5
52. Let PQ be a focal chord of the parabola y 2  4 x such 27 27
(c) (d)
 4 10
that it subtends an angle of at the point (3,0). Let
2 57. *Let the tangent drawn to the parabola y 2  24 x at
the line segment PQ be also a focal chord of the ellipse
the point ( ,  ) is perpendicular to the line
x2 y 2
E:   1, a 2  b 2 . If e is the eccentricity of the 2 x  2 y  5. Then the normal to the hyperbola
a 2 b2
2 2
1 x y
ellipse E, then the value of is equal to:   1 at the point (  4,   4) does NOT
e2 2 2
(JEE Main 2022) pass through the point :
(JEE Main 2022)
(a) 1  2 (b) 3  2 2
(a) (25, 10) (b) (20, 12)
(c) 1  2 3 (d) 4  5 3 (c) (30, 8) (d) (15, 13)
53. *Let P  y  4ax, a  0 be a parabola with focus S.
2
58. *Let P and Q be any points on the curves
 ( x 1)2  ( y  1) 2  1 and y  x 2 , respectively. The
Let the tangents to the parabola P make an angle of
4 distance between P and Q is minimum for some value
with the line y  3 x  5 touch the parabola P at A and of the abscissa of P in the interval (JEE Main 2022)
B. Then the value of a for which A, B and S are  1 1 3
(a)  0,  (b)  , 
collinear is : (JEE Main 2022)  4 2 4
(a) 8 only (b) 2 only
1 1 3 
1 (c)  ,  (d)  , 1
(c) only (d) any a  0 4 2 4 
4
59. *The acute angle between the pair of tangents drawn
x2 y 2 x y
54. If the ellipse 2  2  1 meets the line  1 to the ellipse 2 x 2  3 y 2  5 from the point (1, 3) is
a b 7 2 6
(JEE Main 2022)
x y
on the x-axis and the line   1 on the y-axis,  16 
7 2 6 (a) tan 1  
then the eccentricity of the ellipse is 7 5
(JEE Main 2022)  24 
(b) tan 1  
5 2 6 7 5
(a) (b)
7 7  32 
(c) tan 1  
3 2 5 7 5
(c) (d)
7 7  38 5 
(d) tan 1 
55. *The tangents at the point A (1, 3) and B (1, –1) on  35 
 
the parabola y 2  2 x  2 y  1 meet at the point P.
60. *The equation of a common tangent to the parabolas
Then the area (in unit 2 ) of the triangle PAB is :-
y  x 2 and y   ( x  2)2 is (JEE Main 2022)
(JEE Main 2022) (a) y  4 ( x  2) (b) y  4 ( x  1)
(a) 4 (b) 6
(c) y  4 ( x  1) (d) y  4 ( x  2)
(c) 7 (d) 8
CONIC SECTIONS 62
Questions marked with asterisk (*) are 17  x 2  y 2   16 , then the eccentricity of the ellipse
deleted from JEE Main x2 y2
  1 is: (JEE Main 2022)
61. If the line x  1  0, is a directrix of the hyperbola 5 b2
kx 2  y 2  6, then the hyperbola passes through the (a)
2
(b)
3
point (JEE Main 2022) 5 5
(a) (2 5, 6) (b) (  5, 3) 1 2
(c) (d)
(c) (  5, 2) (d) (2 5, 3 6) 5 5
62. *Let P  a, b  be a point on the parabola y  8 x such
2
67. *Let the focal chord of the parabola P : y 2  4 x along
that the tangent at P passes through the centre of the the line L : y  mx  c, m  0 meet the parabola at the
circle x 2  y 2  10 x  14 y  65  0. Let A be the points M and N. Let the line L be a tangent to the
product of all possible values of a and B be the product hyperbola H : x 2  y 2  4 . If O is the vertex of P and
of all possible values of b. Then the value of A  B is F is the focus of H on the positive x-axis, then the area
equal to : (JEE Main 2022) of the quadrilateral OMFN is : (JEE Main 2022)
(a) 0 (b) 25 (a) 2 6 (b) 2 14
(c) 40 (d) 65 (c) 4 6 (d) 4 14
63. If the length of the latus rectum of a parabola, whose
68. *If two tangents drawn from a point  ,   lying on
focus is  a, a  and the tangent at its vertex is
the ellipse 25 x 2  4 y 2  1 to the parabola y 2  4 x are
x  y  a , is 16, then a is equal to: such that the slope of one tangent is four times the
10  5  16  2  50 
2 2
(JEE Main 2022) other, then the value of
(a) 2 2 (b) 2 3 equals _____. (JEE Main 2022)
(c) 4 2 (d) 4 x2
69. Let the hyperbola H : 2  y 2  1 and the ellipse
64. *If the tangents drawn at the points P and Q on the a
parabola y 2  2 x  3 intersect at the point R (0, 1), E : 3 x2  4 y 2  12 be such that the length of latus
then the orthocentre of the triangle PQR is : rectum of H is equal to the length of latus rectum of E.
(JEE Main 2022) If eH and eE are the eccentricities of H and E
(a)  0,1 (b)  2, 1 respectively, then the value of 12  eH 2  eE 2  is equal
(c)  6, 3 (d)  2,1 to ____. (JEE Main 2022)
x2
y2 70. Let P1 be a parabola with vertex (3, 2) and focus (4, 4)
65. Let the hyperbola H :   1 pass through the
a2 b2 and P2 be its mirror image with respect to the line
 
point 2 2, 2 2 . A parabola is drawn whose focus x  2 y  6 . Then the directrix of P2 is x  2 y 
_____. (JEE Main 2022)
is same as the focus of H with positive abscissa and
x2 y2
the directrix of the parabola passes through the other 71. *Let the eccentricity of the hyperbola 2  2  1 be
focus of H. If the length of the latus rectum of the a b
parabola is e times the length of the latus rectum of H, 5
where e is the eccentricity of H, then which of the . If the equation of the normal at the point
4
following points lies on the parabola?
 8 12 
(JEE Main 2022)  ,  on the hyperbola is 8 5 x   y   , then

(a) 2 3, 3 2  
(b) 3 3, 6 2   5 5
   is equal to (JEE Main 2022)
(c)  3,  6  (d)  3 6,6 2  72. *Let the common tangents to the curves
66. Let a line L pass through the point of intersection of 4  x  y 2   9 and y 2  4 x intersect at the point Q.
2
the lines bx  10 y  8  0 and Let an ellipse, centered at the origin O, has lengths of
4 semi-minor and semi-major axes equal to OQ and 6,
2 x  3 y  0, b  R    . If the line L also passes
3 respectively. If e and l respectively denote the
through the point (1, 1) and touches the circle eccentricity and the length of the latus rectum of this
l
ellipse, then 2 is equal to ___. (JEE Main 2022)
e
CONIC SECTIONS 63
Questions marked with asterisk (*) are 80. *A common tangent T to the curves C1 :
x2 y 2
 1
4 9
x2 y 2
x2 y2 and C2 :   1 does not pass through the fourth
73. *Let a line L1 be tangent to the hyperbola   1 42 143
16 4
quadrant. If T touches C1 at  x1 , y1  and C 2 at
and let L2 be the line passing through the origin and
perpendicular to L1 . If the locus of the point of  x2 , y2  , then 2 x1  x2 is equal to ………..
(JEE Main 2022)
intersection of L1 and L2 is x 2
y 
2 2
  x2   y2 ,
81. *For the hyperbola H : x 2  y 2  1 and the
then    is equal to _____. (JEE Main 2022)
x2 y2
74. *A circle of radius 2 unit passes through the vertex ellipse E :   1, a  b  0 , let the
a 2 b2
and the focus of the parabola y 2  2 x and touches the (1) eccentricity of E be reciprocal of the eccentricity
2 of H, and
 1
parabola y   x     , where  0. Then 5
 4 (2) the line y  x  K be a common tangent of E
2
 4  8 
2
is equal to _____. (JEE Main 2022)
and H.
Then 4  a 2  b 2  is equal to ……….. .
2 2
x y
75. Let H : 2  2  1, a  0, b  0 , be a hyperbola such
a b (JEE Main 2022)
that the sum of lengths of the transverse and the
82. *Let the tangents at the points P and Q on the ellipse
 
conjugate axes is 4 2 2  14 . If the eccentricity H
x2 y 2
11 2

4

 1 meet at the point R 2, 2 2  2 . If S is 
is , then the value of a 2  b 2 is equal to _____.
2 the focus of the ellipse on its negative major axis, then
(JEE Main 2022)
SP 2  SQ2 is equal to (JEE Main 2022)
76. *Let the equation of two diameters of a circle
x 2  y 2  2 x  2 fy  1  0 be 2 px  y  1 and 83. *Two tangent lines l1 and l2 are drawn from the point
2 x  py  4 p . Then the slope m   0,   of the (2, 0) to the parabola 2 y 2   x . If the lines l1 and l2
tangent to the hyperbola 3x 2  y 2  3 passing through  x  5
2
are also tangent to the circle  y 2  r 2 , then
the centre of the circle is equal to ………… . 17r is equal to (JEE Main 2022)
(JEE Main 2022)
84*. Let a tangent to the curve y = 24x meet the curve
2
77. *The sum of diameters of the circles that touch (i) the
xy = 2 at the points A and B. Then the mid points of
8 6
parabola 75 x 2  64  5 y  3 at the point  ,  and such line segments AB lie on a parabola with the
5 5
(JEE Main 2023)
(ii) the y-axis, is equal to ………… .
(JEE Main 2022) (a) directrix 4x = 3
x2 y2 (b) directrix 4x = – 3
78. An ellipse E : 2  2  1 passes through the vertices 3
a b (c) Length of latus rectum
x2 y 2 2
of the hyperbola H :   1 . Let the major and (d) Length of latus rectum 2
49 64
minor axes of the ellipse E coincide with the 85. The equations of the sides AB and AC of a triangle
transverse and conjugate axes of the hyperbola H. Let ABC are    1 x   y  4 and  x  1    y    0
1 respectively. Its vertex A is on the y-axis and its
the product of the eccentricities of E and H be . If l
2 orthocenter is (1, 2). The length of the tangent from the
is the length of the latus rectum of the ellipse E, then point C to the part of the parabola y2 = 6x in the first
the value of 113l is equal to …………… .
quadrant is (JEE Main 2023)
(JEE Main 2022)
79. If the length of the latus rectum of the ellipse (a) 6 (b) 2 2
(c) 2 (d) 4
x  4 y  2 x  8 y    0 is 4, and l is the length of
2 2
its major axis, then   l is equal to …………. .

(JEE Main 2022)
CONIC SECTIONS 64
Questions marked with asterisk (*) are 92. The parabolas: ax 2  2bx  cy  0 and
deleted from JEE Main dx 2  2cx  fy  0 intersect on the line y = 1. If
86*. The distance of the point  6, 2 2  from the common

a,b,c,d,e,f are positive real numbers and a,b,c are in
G.P., then (JEE Main 2023)
tangent y = mx + c, m > 0, of the curves x = 2y2 and x d e f
= 1 + y2 is (JEE Main 2023) (a) d,e, f are in A.P. (b) , , are in G.P.
a b c
1
(a) (b) 5 d e f
3 (c) , , are in A.P. (d) d, e, f are in G.P.
a b c
14
(c) (d) 5 3 93*. If the maximum distance of normal to the ellipse
3
x 2 y2
87*. The equations of two sides of a variable triangle are   1, b  2, from the origin is 1, then
4 b2
x = 0 and y = 3, and its third side is a tangent to the
parabola y2 = 6x. The locus of its circumcentre is: eccentricity of the ellipse is: (JEE Main 2023)
(JEE Main 2023) 1 3
(a) (b)
(a) 4y 2  18y  3x  18  0 2 2
(b) 4y 2  18y  3x  18  0 1 3
(c) (d)
2
(c) 4y  18y  3x  18  0
2 4
 1 
(d) 4y 2  18y  3x  18  0 94. Let y = f (x) represent a parabola with focus   , 0 
 2 
88. Let T and C respectively be the transverse and
1
conjugate axes of the hyperbola and directrix y   . Then
2
16x 2  y 2  64x  4y  44  0 . Then the area of the
region above the parabola x2 = y + 4, below the

S   x  R : tan

1
  
f (x)  sin 1 f (x)  1  
2

transverse axis T and on the rght of the conjugate axis
C is: (JEE Main 2023) (JEE Main 2023)
(a) contains exactly two elements
44 28
(a) 4 6  (b) 4 6  (b) contains exactly one element
3 3 (c) is an infinite set
44 28 (d) is an empty set
(c) 4 6  (d) 4 6 
3 3 
95. Let H be the hyperbola, whose foci are 1  2, 0 and 
89*. If the tangent at a point P on the parabola y = 3x is
2
eccentricity is 2 . Then the length of its latus return
parallel to the line x + 2y =1 and the tangents at the
is _________. (JEE Main 2023)
x 2 y2 (a) 2 (b) 3
points Q and R on the ellipse   1 are
4 1 5 3
perpendicular to the line x – y = 2, then the area of the (c) (d)
2 2
triangle PQR is: (JEE Main 2023)
9 96*. Let P(x0, y0) be the point on the hyperbola
(a) (b) 5 3 3x 2  4y 2  36, which is nearest to the line 3x + 2y =
5
3 1. Then 2  y 0  x 0  is equal to : (JEE Main 2023)
(c) 5 (d) 3 5
2 (a) –3 (b) 9
90*. If P (h, k) be point on the parabola x = 4y2, which is (c) –9 (d) 3
nearest to the point Q(0, 33), then the distance of P 97. In a group of 100 persons 75 speak English and 40
from the directrix of the parabola y2 = 4 (x + y) is speak Hindi. Each person speaks at least one of the
equal to: (JEE Main 2023) two languages. If the number of persons, who speak
(a) 2 (b) 4 only English is  and the number of persons who
(c) 8 (d) 6 speak only Hindi is  , then the eccentricity of the
91*. Let A be a point on the x-axis. Common tangents are ellipse 25   2 x 2   2 y 2    2  2 is (JEE Main 2023)
drawn from A to the curves x2 + y2 = 8 and y2 = 16x. If
one of these tangents touches the two curves at Q and 3 15 117
(a) (b)
R, then (QR)2 is equal to (JEE Main 2023) 12 12
(a) 64 (b) 76 119 129
(c) 81 (d) 72 (c) (d)
12 12
CONIC SECTIONS 65
Questions marked with asterisk (*) are   0,   ,    0, 2 and    0,5 , be such that the
line segment A B divides the area of the rectangle R
in the ratio 4:1 . Then, the mid-point of AB lies on a
98. Let R be the focus of the parabola y 2  20 x and the (JEE Main 2023)
line y  mx  c intersect the parabola at two points P (a) straight line (b) hyperbola
and Q Let the point G 10,10  be the centroid of the (c) circle (d) parabola
104. If the radius of the largest circle with centre  2,0 
triangle PQR . If c  m  6 , then  PQ  is
2
inscribed in the ellipse x 2  4 y 2  36 is r , then 12r 2

(JEE Main 2023)
is equal to (JEE Main 2023)
(a) 346 (b) 296
(a) 115 (b) 92
(c) 317 (d) 325
99. Let A (0, 1), B(1, 1) and C (1, 0) be the mid-points of (c) 69 (d) 72
the sides of a triangle with incentre at the point D, If 2 3 6 
105. Let P 
 7
,  , Q, R and S be four points on the
the focus of the parabola y 2  4ax passing through D  7 
is    
2,0 , where  and  are rational ellipse 9 x 2  4 y 2  36 . Let PQ and RS be mutually
perpendicular and pass through the origin. If

numbers, then is equal to (JEE Main 2023) 1 1 p
2   , where p and q are coprime,
 PQ   RS 
2 2
q
(a) 8 (b) 6
9 then p  q is equal to (JEE Main 2023)
(c) 12 (d) (a) 137 (b) 157
2
(c) 143 (d) 147
100. Let the ellipse E : x  9 y  9 intersect the positive
2 2
x and y -axes at the points A and B respectively. 106*.Let the tangent and normal at the point 3 3,1 on  
Let the major axis of E be a diameter of the circle C . x 2
y 2
the ellipse   1 meet the y-axis at the points A
Let the line passing through A and B meet the 36 4
circle C at the point P . If the area of the triangle with and B respectively. Let the circle C be drawn taking
m AB as a diameter and the line x  2 5 intersect C at
vertices A, P and the origin O is , where m and n
n the points P and Q . If the tangents at the points P
are coprime, then m  n is equal to
and Q on the circle intersect at the point  ,   , then
(JEE Main 2023)
(a) 18 (b) 16  2   2 is equal to (JEE Main 2023)
(c) 17 (d) 15 (a) 60 (b) 61
101*.Let a circle of radius 4 be concentric to the ellipse 314 304
15 x 2  19 y 2  285 . Then the common tangents are (c) (d)
5 5
inclined to the minor axis of the ellipse at the angle 107. Let PQ be a focal chord of the parabola y 2  36 x of
(JEE Main 2023)
length 100, making an acute angle with the positive x
  -axis. Let the ordinates of M be the point on the line
(a) (b)
4 3 segment PQ such that PM : MQ  3 :1 . Then which
  of the following points does NOT lie on the line
(c) (d)
12 6 passing through M and perpendicular to the line
102. Consider ellipses Ek : kx 2  k 2 y 2  1, k  1, 2,..., 20 . Let PQ ? (JEE Main 2023)
Ck be the circle which touches the four chords joining (a)  3, 43 (b)  6, 29 
the end points (one on minor axis and the another on (c)  3,33 (d)  6, 45 
major axis) of the ellipse Ek . If rk is the radius of the
108. Let C be the largest circle centred at  2,0  and
1
20
circle Ck , then the value of  2 is x 2
y 2
k 1 rk inscribed in the ellipse    1 . If 1,   lies on

36 16
(JEE Main 2023)
C, then 10 2 is equal to _____. (JEE Main 2023)
(a) 3080 (b) 3320
(c) 3210 (d) 2870 109*.Let a tangent to the curve 9 x 2  16 y 2  144 intersect
103. Let R be a rectangle given by the lines the coordinate axes at the points A and B. Then, the
x  0, x  2, y  0 and y  5 . Let A  , 0  and minimum length of the line segment AB is ________.
(JEE Main 2023)
CONIC SECTIONS 66
Questions marked with asterisk (*) are 118*.Let a common tangent to the curves y 2  4 x and
 x  4
2
deleted from JEE Main  y 2  16 touch the curves at the points P
110. The urns A, B and C contain 4 red, 6 black; 5 red, 5 and Q . Then  PQ  is equal to _____.
2
black and  red, 4 black balls respectively. One of the

(JEE Main 2023)
urns is selected at random and a ball is drawn. If the
ball drawn is red and the probability that it is drawn x2 y2
119. Let H n :   1, n  N . Let k be the smallest
from urn C is 0.4 then the square of the length of the 1 n 3  n
side of the largest equilateral triangle, inscribed in the even value of n such that the eccentricity of H k is a
parabola y 2   x with one vertex at the vertex of the rational number. If l is the length of the latus rectum
parabola is (JEE Main 2023) of H k , then 21l is equals to _____.
111*.The vertices of a hyperbola H are   6, 0  and its (JEE Main 2023)
5 120*.Let the tangent to the parabola y 2  12 x at the
eccentricity is . Let N be the normal to H at a
2 point  3,   be perpendicular to the line 2 x  2 y  3 .
point in the first quadrant and parallel to the line
Then the square of distance of the point  6, 4  from
2 x  y  2 2 . If d is the length of the line segment
the normal to the hyperbola  2 x 2  9 y 2  9 2 at its
of N between H and the y-axis then d 2 is equal to
____. (JEE Main 2023) point   1,   2  is equal to _________.
112*.A triangle is formed by the tangents at the point  2, 2  (JEE Main 2023)
121*.Let m1 and m2 be the slopes of the tangents drawn
on the curves y  2 x and x  y  4 x , and the line
2 2 2
x  y  2  0 . If r (JEE Main 2023) from the point P  4,1 to the hyperbola

2 2
113*.Let S be the set of all a  N such that the area of the y x
H:   1 . If Q is the point from which the
triangle formed by the tangent at the point 25 16
P  b, c  , b, c  N , on the parabola y 2  2ax and the tangents drawn to H have slopes m1 and m2 and
lines x  b, y  0 is 16 unit2, then a is equal to they make positive intercepts  and  on the x -
 PQ 
aS 2
_____. (JEE Main 2023) axis, then is equal to _____.

114*.The line x 8 is the directrix of the 
(JEE Main 2023)
x2 y2
ellipse E :   1 with the corresponding focus 122*.The foci of a hyperbola are   2, 0  and its
a 2 b2
 2, 0  . If the tangent to E at the point P in the first eccentricity is
3
. A tangent, perpendicular to the line
2
quadrant passes through the point  0, 4 3  and 2 x  3 y  6 , is drawn at a point in the first quadrant
intersects the x-axis at Q then  3PQ  is equal to on the hyperbola. If the intercepts made by the tangent
2
on the x- and y-axes are a and b respectively,

(JEE Main 2023)
115. If the x-intercept of a focal chord of the parabola then 6a  5b is equal to ___. (JEE Main 2023)
y 2  8 x  4 y  4 is 3 , then the length of this chord is 123. Let an ellipse with centre 1, 0  and latus rectum of
equal to (JEE Main 2023) 1
x2 y 2 length have its major axis along x-axis. If its minor
116. Let the eccentricity of an ellipse   1 is 2
a 2 b2 axis subtends an angle 60 at the foci, then the square
reciprocal to that of the hyperbola 2 x 2  2 y 2  1 . If of the sum of the lengths of its minor and major axes is
the ellipse intersects the hyperbola at right angles, equal to ____. (JEE Main 2023)
then square of length of the latus-rectum of the ellipse
is ____. (JEE Main 2023)
117*.The ordinates of the points P and Q on the parabola
with focus (3, 0) and directrix x = –3 are in the ratio 3 :
1. If R  ,   is the point of intersection of the
2
tangents to the parabola at P and Q, then is equal

to _____ : (JEE Main 2023)
CONIC SECTIONS 67

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 7. Length of the focal chord of the parabola y2 = 4ax at a
distance p from the vertex is
1. If the line x + my + am2 = 0 touches the parabola
y2 = 4ax, then the point of contact is 2a 2 a3
(a) (b) 2
p p
 a  2a 
(a) (am2, –2am) (b)  2 , 
m m 
4a 3 p3
(c) (–am2, –2am) (d) The line does not touch (c) (d)
p2 a
2. A hyperbola has centre ' C ' and one focus at P  6,8  . If
8. From the focus of the parabola, y2 = 8x as centre, a circle
its two directrices are 3 x  4 y  10  0 and is described so that a common chord of the curves is
equidistant from the vertex & focus of the parabola. The
3 x  4 y  10  0 then CP 
equation of the circle is :
(a) 14 (b) 8
(a) (x – 2)2 + y2 = 9 (b) (x – 2)2 + y2 = 6
(c) 10 (d) 6
(c) (x – 2)2 + y2 = 4 (d) (x – 2)2 + y2 = 18
3. The equation
9. A circle is described whose centre is the vertex and whose
2 2 diameter is three–quarters of the latus rectum of the
x y
 = 1, |r| < 1 represents parabola y2 = 4ax. If PQ is the common chord of the circle
1 r 1 r
and the parabola and L1 L2 is the latus rectum, then the
(a) an ellipse (b) a hyperbola area of the trapezium PL1 L2Q is
(c) a circle (d) None of these
(a) 3 2 a2 (b) 2 2 a2
4. The equation 9x2 – 16y2 – 18x + 32y – 151 = 0 represents a
hyperbola -  2 2  2
(a) The length of the transverse axis is 4 (c) 4 a2 (d)   a
 2 
(b) Length of latus rectum is 9
10. The condition that the line, x. cos + y. sin  =p touches
21 11 the parabola, y2 = 4a (x + a) is :
(c) Equation of directrix is x  and x  
5 5
(a) a – p cos  = 0 (b) a + p cos  = 0
(d) None of these (c) a cos  – p = 0 (d) a cos  + p = 0
5. The length of the side of an equilateral triangle inscribed 11. If the distance of 2 points P and Q on parabola y2 = 4ax
in the parabola, y2 = 4x so that one of its angular point is from the focus are 4 and 9 respectively, then the distance
at the vertex is : of the point of intersection of tangents at P and Q from the
(a) 8 3 (b) 6 3 focus is
(a) 8 (b) 6
(c) 4 3 (d) 2 3 (c) 5 (d) 13
6. The points (s) on the parabola y2 = 4x which are closest 12. AB, AC are tangents to a parabola y2 = 4ax. p1, p2 and
to the circle : p3 are the lengths of the perpendiculars from A, B and C
x2 + y2 – 24y + 128 = 0 is/are respectively to any tangent to the curve expect at points
B and C, then p2, p1, p3 are in :
(a) (0, 0) (b) (2, 2 2 )
(a) A.P. (b) G.P.
(c) (4, 4) (d) none of these (c) H.P. (d) none of these
CONIC SECTIONS 68
13. From an external point P, pair of tangent lines are drawn 21. The normal chord at a point 't' on the parabola
to the parabola, y2 = 4x. If 1 and 2 are the inclinations y2 = 4ax subtends a right angle at the vertex. Then t² is
of these tangents with the axis of x such that, equal to :
 (a) 3 (b) 1
1   2  , then the locus of P is :
4 (c) 4 (d) 2
(a) x – y + 1 = 0 (b) x + y – 1 = 0 22. If the normals at two points P, Q of the parabola,
(c) x – y – 1 = 0 (d) x + y + 1 = 0 y2 = 4x intersect at a third point R on the parabola, then
14. The equation of common tangent to the parabola, the product of the ordinates of P & Q is :
y2 = 2x and x2 = 16y is : (a) 4 (b) 6
Ax + By + C = 0, where A, B, C N, such that their sum (c) 16 (d) 8

is least then A = ____ , B = ____ , C = _____ : 23. If P, Q, R are three co-normal points on the parabola
(a) 1, 2, 2 (b) 2, 2, 1 y2 = 4ax then the centroid of the triangle PQR always
lies on :
(c) 2, 1, 2 (d) none of these
15. If the straight line x + y = 1 is a normal to the parabola (a) the x-axis
x2 = ay, then the value of a is (b) the y-axis
(a) 4/3 (b) 1/2 (c) the line y = x
(c) 3/4 (d) 1/4 (d) the directrix of the parabola
16. Which of the following lines, is a normal to the parabola
y2 = 16 x 24. Tangents are drawn to y 2  4 a x from a variable point P
(a) y = x – 11 cos  – 3 cos 3  moving on x  a  0, then the locus of foot of perpendicular

(b) y = x – 11 cos  – cos 3  drawn from P on the chord of contact of P is
(c) y = (x – 11) cos  + cos 3  (a) y  0 (b)  x  a 2  y 2  a 2
(d) y = (x – 11) cos  – cos 3 
17. The equation of the other normal to the parabola (c)  x  a 2  y 2  0 (d) y  x  a   0
y2 = 4ax which passes through the intersection of those at
(4a, –4a) & (9a, –6a) is : 25. A ray of light travels along a line y = 4 and strikes the
surface of a curve y2 = 4(x + y) then equation of the line
(a) 5x – y + 115a = 0 (b) 5x + y – 135a = 0
along reflected ray travel is
(c) 5x – y – 115a = 0 (d) 5x + y + 115 = 0
(a) x = 0 (b) x = 2
18. If two normals to a parabola y2 = 4ax intersect at right
(c) x + y = 4 (d) 2x + y = 4
angles then the chord joining their feet passes through
a fixed point whose co-ordinates are : 26. The circles on focal radii of a parabola as diameter touch
(a) (–2a, 0) (b) (a, 0) (a) the tangent at the vertex (b) the axis
(c) (2a, 0) (d) none of these (c) the directrix (d) none of these
19. If the normal to the parabola y2 = 4ax at the point 27. If M is the foot of the perpendicular from a point P of a
(at2, 2at) cuts the parabola again at (aT2, 2aT), then parabola y2 = 4ax to its directrix and SPM is an equilateral
(a) – 2T2 (b) T (––8)(8, ) triangle, where S is the focus, then SP is equal to :
2
(c) T < 8 (d) T28 (a) a (b) 2a
20. A normal is drawn to the parabola y2 = 4ax at the point (c) 3a (d) 4a
(2a, –2 2 a) then the length of the normal chord, is 28. The locus of the middle points of the focal chords of the
parabola, y2 = 4x is :
(a) 4 2a (b) 6 2 a (a) y2 = x – 1 (b) y2 = 2(x – 1)
(c) 4 3 a (d) 6 3 a (c) y2 = 2(1 – x) (d) none of these
CONIC SECTIONS 69
29. The locus of the foot of the perpendiculars drawn from 35. If  +  = 3 then the chord joining the points  and  for
the vertex on a variable tangent to the parabola y2 = 4ax
x2 y2
is : the hyperbola   1 passes through
a 2 b2
(a) x (x2 + y2) + ay2 = 0 (b) y (x2 + y2) + ax2 = 0
(a) focus
(c) x (x2 – y2) + ay2 = 0 (d) none of these
(b) centre
30. The eccentricity of the conic
(c) one of the end points of the transverse axis
4(2y – x – 3)2 – 9 (2x + y – 1)2 = 80 is
(d) one of the end points of the conugates axis
3 13 36. The locus of the mid point of the chords of the circle
(a) (b)
13 3 x 2 + y 2 = a2, which are tangent to the hyperbola
(c) 13 (d) 3 x2 y2
  1 is
a 2 b2
x 2 y2 (a) x2 + y2 = a2 – b2
31. The distance of a point on the ellipse   1 from
6 2
(b) (x2 + y2)2 = a2 – b2
the centre is 2. The eccentric angle of the point is (c) (x2 + y2)2 = a2x2 – b2y2
 (d) (x2 + y2)2 = a2 + b2

(a) ± (b) ± 
2 37. The area of a triangle formed by the lines x – y = 0, x + y = 0 and
any tangent to the hyperbola x2 – y2 = a2 is
 3  (a) a2 (b) 2a2
(c) , (d) ±
2 4 4
(c) 3a2 (d) 4a2
38. The equation of the common tangents to the parabola
a2
32. If tan 1 tan 2 = – , then the chord joining two point y2 = 8x and the hyperbola 3x2 – y2 = 3 is-
b2
(a) 2x ± y + 1 = 0 (b) x ± y + 1 = 0
x 2 y2 (c) x ± 2y + 1 = 0 (d) x ± y + 2 = 0
1 and 2 on the ellipse   1 will subtend a right
a 2 b2 39. The triangle PQR of area 'A' is inscribed in the parabola
y2 = 4ax such that the P lies at the vertex of the parabola
angle at
and the base QR is a focal chord. The modulus of the
(a) Focus (b) Centre difference of the ordinates of the points Q and R is :
(c) End of the major axes (d) End of minor axes
A A
33. The equation of tangents to the ellipse 9x2 + 16y2 = 144 (a) (b)
2a a
which pass through the point (2, 3)
(a) y = 3 (b) x + y = 2 2A 4A
(c) (d)
a a
(c) x – y = 3 (d) y = 3; x + y = 5
34. An ellipse with major axis 4 and minor axis 2 touches both 40. The ends of a line segment are P (1, 3) and Q (1, 1). R is a
the coordinate axis, then locus of its centre is point on the line segment PQ such that PR : QR = 1 : . If R
is an interior point of a parabola y2 = 4x, then
(a) x 2  y 2  5 (b) x 2 .y 2  5
3
(a) (0, 1) (b)   – , 1 
2  5 
x
(c)  y2  5 (d) x 2  y 2  5
4
1 3
(c)   ,  (d) none of these
 2 5
CONIC SECTIONS 70
41. Through the vertex O of the parabola y2 = 4ax two chords 47. From the point (15, 12) three normals are drawn to the
OP & OQ are drawn and the circles on OP & OQ as diameter parabola y2 = 4x, then centroid of triangle formed by three
intersect in R. If 1 , 2 &  are the angles made with the co–normal points is
axis by the tangents at P & Q on the parabola & by OR
16
then cot 1 + cot 2 is equal to (a)  , 0  (b) (4, 0)
3 
(a) –2 tan  (b) – 2 tan ( – )
(c) 0 (d) 2 cot 
 26 
42. T is a point on the tangent to a parabola y2 = 4ax at its (c)  , 0  (d) (6, 0)
 3 
point P. TL and TN are the perpendiculars on the focal
radius SP and the directrix of the parabola respectively. 48. Normals at three points P, Q, R at the parabola y2 = 4ax
Then : meet in a point A and S be its focus, if |SP|. |SQ| . |SR| =
(a) SL = 2 (TN) (b) 3(SL) = 2 (TN) (SA)2, then  is equal to
(c) SL = TN (d) 2 (SL) = 3 (TN) (a) a3 (b) a2
43. Two tangents to the parabola y2 = 4ax make angle 1 (c) a (d) 1
and 2 with the x-axis. The locus of their point of 49. A tangent to the parabola x2 + 4ay = 0 cuts the parabola
cot 1 x2 = 4by at A and B the locus of the mid point of AB is :
intersection if  2 is :
cot  2 (a) (a + 2b) x2 = 4 b2y (b) (b + 2a) x2 = 4 b2y
(c) (a + 2b) y2 = 4 b2x (d) (b + 2x) x2 = 4 a2y
(a) 2y2 = 9 ax (b) 4y2 = 9 ax
50. Tangent are drawn from the points on the line
(c) y2 = 9 ax (d) none of these
x – y – 5 = 0 to x2 + 4y2 = 4, then all the chords of
44. If A & B are points on the parabola y2 = 4ax with vertex O
contact pass through a fixed point, whose coordinates
such that OA perpendicular to OB & having lengths
are
4/3 4/3
1 r 2r
r1 & r2 respectively, then the value of 2/3 2/3
is 4 1 4 1
r
1 r
2 (a)  ,   (b)  , 
5 5 5 5
(a) 16a2 (b) a2
(c) 4a (d) None of these  4 1
(c)   ,  (d) None of these
 5 5
45. The two parabola y2 = 4ax and y2 = 4c (x –b) cannot have a
common normal, other than the axis unless, if 51. Let P(a sec, b tan) and Q (a sec , b tan ), where
a –b b  x 2 y2
(a) 2 (b) a – c  2 += , be two points on the hyperbola 2  2  1 If
b 2 a b
(h, k) is the point of the intersection of the normals at P
b and Q, then k is equal to
(c) a  b  2 (d) None of these
46. If the normals drawn from any point to the parabola a 2  b2  a 2  b2 

(a) (b)   

y2 = 4ax cut the line x = 2a in points whose ordinates are in a  a 
arithmetic progression, then tangents of the angles which
the normals makes with the axis, are
a 2  b2  a 2  b2 
(a) in A.P. (b) in G.P. (c) (d)   

b  b 
(c) in H.P. (d) None of these
CONIC SECTIONS 71
Objective Questions II [One or more than one correct option] 58. Consider a circle with its centre lying on the focus of the
parabola, y2 = 2 px (p > 0) such that it touches the directrix
52. Let V be the vertex and L be the latus rectum of the parabola of the parabola. Then a point of intersection of the circle
x2 = 2y + 4x – 4. Then the equation of the parabola whose & the parabola is :
vertex is at V, latus rectum is L/2 and axis is perpendicular
to the axis of the given parabola. p  p 
(a) y2 = x – 2 (b) y2 = x – 4 (a)  , p  (b)  ,p 
2  2 
(c) y2 = 2 – x (d) y2 = 4 – x
53. If equation of tangent at P, Q and vertex A of a parabola are  p   p 
(c)   , p  (d)   , p 
3x + 4y – 7 = 0, 2x + 3y – 10 = 0 and x – y = 0 respectively,  2   2 
then
(a) focus is (4, 5) x2 y2
59. If P is a point of the ellipse   1, whose foci are S
a 2 b2
(b) length of latus rectum is 2 2
and S’. Let PSS’ =  and PS’S= , then
(c) axis is x + y – 9 = 0
(a) PS + PS’ = 2a, if a > b
9 9
(d) vertex is  ,  (b) PS + PS’ = 2b, if a < b
2 2
  1 e
54. The locus of the mid point of the focal radii of a variable (c) tan tan 
2 2 1 e
point moving on the parabola, y2 = 4ax is a parabola whose
(a) Latus rectum is half the latus rectum of the original
  a2  b2
parabola (d) tan tan  [ a  a 2  b 2 ] when a > b
2 2 b2
(b) Vertex is (a/2, 0)
(c) Directrix is y–axis 60. If the chord through the points whose eccentric angles
(d) Focus has the co–ordinates (a, 0) x2 y2
are  &  on the ellipse,   1 passes through a
55. The equation, 3x2 + 4y2 – 18x + 16y + 43 = c. a 2 b2
(a) cannot represent a real pair of straight lines for any focus, then the value of tan (/2) tan (/2) is :
value of c
(b) represents an ellipse, if c > 0 e 1 e 1
(a) (b)
e 1 e 1
(c) represents empty set, if c < 0
(d) a point, if c = 0 1 e 1 e
56. If (5, 12) and (24, 7) are the foci of a conic passing through (c) (d)
1 e 1 e
the origin then the eccentricity of conic is
(a) 386 /12 (b) 386 / 13
61. The equation to the parabola whose axis parallel to the y-
(c) 386 / 25 (d) 386 / 38
axis and which passes through the points (0, 4), (1, 9) and
(4, 5). If latus rectum of parabola is , then the value of
x2 y2
57. If foci of   1 coincide with the foci of 361must be
a 2 b2
62. The distance between the focus and directrix of the conic
x2 y2
  1 and eccentricity of the hyperbola is 2, then 2
25 9  3x  y  
 48 x  3y is :
(a) a2 + b2 = 16 63. The locus of a point that divides a chord of slope 2 of the
(b) there is no director circle to the hyperbola parabola y2 = 4x internally in the ratio 1 : 2 is a parabola. If
(c) centre of the director circle is (0, 0) the vertex of parabola is (, ), then the value of 729 (+
)2 must be
(d) length of latus rectum of the hyperbola = 12
CONIC SECTIONS 72
2 2
71. Assertion : In a triangle ABC, if base BC is fixed and
64. Tangents are drawn to the ellipse x  y  1 at ends of perimeter of the triangle is constant, then vertex A moves
9 5 on an ellipse.
latus rectum. If the area of quadrilateral formed is  sq unit, Reason : If sum of distances of a point ‘P’ from two fixed
then the value of must be points is constant then locus of ‘P’ is a real ellipse.
65. If the product of slopes of tangents drawn from point (a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
x2
P(9, k) to ellipse  y 2  1 is equal to 2. Then the 72. Assertion : Feet of perpendiculars drawn from foci of an
9
ellipse 4x 2 + y2 = 16 on the line 2 3 x + y = 8 lie on the
value of k2 is
circle x2 + y2 = 16.
x 2 y2 Reason : If perpendicular are drawn from foci of an ellipse
66. If common tangent of x 2  y 2  r 2 and   1 forms to its any tangent then feet of these perpendiculars lie on
16 9
director circle of the ellipse.
a square then find its area.
(a) A (b) B
67. If a circle cuts a rectangular hyperbola xy = c2 in A, B, C (c) C (d) D
and D and the parameters of these four points be t1, t2, t3
and t4 respectively, then the value of 16t1t2t3t4 must be Match the Following
Assertion & Reason Each question has two columns. Four options are given
(A) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is a Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds
correct explanation for ASSERTION. to a correct matching.For each question, choose the option
corresponding to the correct matching.
(B) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is not
a correct explanation for ASSERTION. 73. Column – I Column – II
(C) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is false. (A) Area of a triangle formed by the (P) 8
(D) If ASSERTION is false, REASON is true. tangents drawn from a point
(–2, 2) to the parabola y2 = 4(x + y)
68. Assertion : If straight line x = 8 meets the parabola y2 = 8x
at P & Q then PQ substends a right angle at the origin. and their corresponding chord
of contact is
Reason : Double ordinate equal to twice of latus rectum of
a parabola subtands a right angle at the vertex. (B) Length of the latus rectum of (Q) 4 3
(a) A (b) B the conic 25{(x – 2)2 + (y – 3)2} =
(c) C (d) D (3x + 4y – 6)2 is
69. Assertion : The perpendicular bisector of the line segment (C) If focal distance of a point on (R) 4
joining the point (–a, 2 at) and (a, 0) is tangent to the parabola the parabola y = x2 – 4 is 25/4
y2 = 4ax, where t  R and points are of the form
Reason : Number of parabolas with a given point as vertex
(± a , b) then value of a + b is
and length of latus rectum equal to 4, is 2.
(a) A (b) B (D) Length of side of an equilateral (S) 24/5
(c) C (d) D triangle inscribed in a parabola
y2 – 2x – 2y – 3 = 0 whose one
70. Assertion : Circumcircle of a triangle formed by the lines x
= 0, x + y + 1 = 0 & x – y + 1 = 0 also passes through the angular point is vertex of the
point (1, 0) parabola, is
Reason : Circumcircle of a triangle formed by three tangents The correct matching is :
of a parabola passes through its focus. (a) (A–R;B–S; C–P; D–Q)
(a) A (b) B (b) (A–S;B–R; C–P; D–Q)
(c) C (d) D (c) (A–Q;B–S; C–P; D–R)
(d) (A–P;B–S; C–P; D–Q)
CONIC SECTIONS 73
74. Column – I Column – II 76. The length of smallest focal chord of this curve C is :
(A) If the mid point of a chord of (P) 6 1 1
(a) (b)
2 2 12a 4a
x y
the ellipse   1 is
16 25 1 1
(c) (d)
(0, 3), then length of the 16a 8a
77. The curve C is symmetric about the line :
4k
chord is , then k is
5 3 3
(a) y = – (b) y =
(B) If the line y = x +  touches (Q) 8 2 2
the ellipse 9x2 + 16y2 = 144, 3 3
(c) x = – (d) x =
then the sum of values of  is 2 2
(C) If the distance between a (R) 0
focus and corresponding
directix of an ellipse be 8 Passage – 2
and the eccentricity be 1/2, If P is a variable point and F1 and F2 are two fixed points such
then length of the minor that |PF1 – PF2| = 2a. Then the locus of the point P is a
hyperbola, with points F1 and F2 as the two focii (F1F2 > 2a). If
k
axis is , then 2k is x2 y2
3   1 is a hyperbola, then its conjugate hyperbola is
a 2 b2
(D) Sum of distances of a (S) 16
x2 y2
point on the ellipse   1. Let P(x, y) is a variable point such that
a 2 b2
x2 y2
  1 from the foci | ( x  1) 2  ( y  2) 2  ( x  5) 2  ( y  5) 2 |  3.
9 16
78. If the locus of the point P represents a hyperbola of
The correct matching is : eccentricity e, then the eccentricity e’ of the corresponding
(a) (A–Q; B–Q; C–P; D–S) conjugate hyperbola is :
(b) (A–Q; B–R; C–S; D–Q) 5 4
(c) (A–S; B–R; C–Q; D–P) (a) (b)
3 3
(d) (A–P; B–Q; C–R; D–S)
5 3
Using the following passage, solve Q.75 to Q.77 (c) (d)
4 7
Passage – 1 79. Locus of intersection of two perpendicular tangents to
the given hyperbola is
If the locus of the circumcentre of a variable triangle having
2
sides y–axis, y = 2 and lx + my = 1, where (l,m) lies on the 7 55
(a) (x – 3)2 +  y   
parabola y2 = 4ax is a curve C, then  2 4
75. Coordinates of the vertex of this curve C is
2
7 25
(b) (x – 3)2 +  y   
3  3
(a)  2a,  (b)  2a,    2  4
 2  2
2
 7 7
 3  3 (c) (x – 3)2 +  y   
(c)  2a,  (d)  2a,    2 4
 2  2
(d) none of these
CONIC SECTIONS 74
83. Let ABC be an equilateral triangle inscribed in the circle

 7
80. If origin is shifted to point  3,  and the axes are rotated x2 + y2 = a2. Suppose perpendiculars from A, B, C to the
 2
through an angle  in clockwise sense so that equation of x2 y2
major axis of the ellipse   1, (a > b) meets the
given of given hyperbola changes to the standard form a2 b2
ellipse respectively at P, Q, R so that P, Q, R lie on the same
x2 y2
  1, then  is : side of the major axis as A, B, C respectively. Prove that,
a 2 b2
the normals to the ellipse drawn at the points P, Q and R
are concurrent.
4 3
(a) tan–1   (b) tan–1   84. Let C1 and C2 be, respectively, the parabola x2 = y – 1 and
3 4
y2 = x – 1. Let P be any point on C1 and Q be any point on
C2. Let P1 and Q1 be the reflections of P and Q, respectively,
5 3
(c) tan–1   (d) tan–1   with respect to the line y = x. Prove that P1 lies on C2, Q1
3 5 lies on C1 and PQ  min {PP1, QQ1}. Hence or otherwise,
determine points P0 and Q0 on the parabolas C1 and C2
Text
respectivley such the P 0Q0  PQ for all pairs of points
81. Through the vertex O of parabola y2 = 4x, chords OP and (P, Q) with P on C1 and Q on C2.
OQ are drawn at right angles to one another. Show that for
all positions of P, PQ cuts the axis of the parabola at a fixed x2 y2
85. Let P be a point on the ellipse   1, 0 < b < a. Let
point. Also find the locus of the middle point of PQ. a2 b2
82. If for an ellipse, focus is (0, 0), corresponding directrix is the line parallel to y–axis passing through P meet the circle
x2 + y2 = a2 at the point Q such that P and Q are on the
1 same side of x–axis. For two positive real numbers r and s,
x + y - 1 = 0 and eccentricity is . Then find the vertex
3 find the locus of the point R on PQ such that PR : RQ = r : s
between this focus and directrix as P varies over the ellipse.
CONIC SECTIONS 75

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 8. The focal chord to y2 = 16x is tangent to (x – 6)2 + y2 = 2,
1. If x + y = k is normal to y2 = 12x, then k is (2000) then the possible values of the slope of this chord, are
(a) 3 (b) 9 (2003)
(c) –9 (d) –3 (a) {–1, 1} (b) {–2, 2}
2. If the line x – 1 = 0 is the directrix of the parabola (c) {–2, 1/2} (d) {2, –1/2}
y2 – kx + 8 = 0, then one of the values of k is (2000)
x2 y2
(a) 1/8 (b) 8 9. For hyperbola   1, which of the
2
cos  sin 2 
(c) 4 (d) 1/4
following remains constant with change in ‘’ ? (2003)
3. The equation of the common tangent touching the circle
(x – 3)2 + y2 = 9 and the parabola y2 = 4x above the (a) abscissae of vertices (b) abscissae of foci
x–axis is (2001) (c) eccentricity (d) directrix
(a) 3 y = 3x + 1 (b) 3 y = – (x + 3)
10. If the line 2x + 6 y = 2 touches the hyperbola
(c) 3 y = x + 3 (d) 3 y = – (3x + 1) x2 – 2y2 = 4, then the point of contact is (2004)
4. The equation of the directrix of the parabola (a) (2, 6 ) (b) (5, 2 6 )
y2 + 4y + 4x + 2 = 0 is (2001)
(a) x = – 1 (b) x = 1 1 1 
(c)  ,  (d) (4, 6 )
(c) x = – 3/2 (d) x = 3/2 2 6 
5. The locus of the mid point of the line segment joining the
11. Axis of a parabola is y = x and vertex and focus are at a
focus to a moving point on the parabola y2 = 4ax is another
parabola with directrix (2002) distance 2 and 2 2 respectively from the origin. Then
(a) x = – a (b) x = – a/2 equation of the parabola is (2006)
(c) x = 0 (d) x = a/2 (a) (x – y)2 = 8 (x + y – 2)
6. The equation of the common tangent to the curves (b) (x + y)2 = 2 (x + y – 2)
y2 = 8x and xy = – 1 is (2002)
(c) (x – y)2 = 4 (x + y – 2)
(a) 3y = 9x + 2 (b) y = 2x + 1
(d) (x + y)2 = 2 (x – y + 2)
(c) 2y = x + 8 (d) y = x + 2
x 2 y2
x2 12. If e1 is the eccentricity of the ellipse   1 and e2 is
7. Tangent is drawn to ellipse + y2 = 1 at 16 25
27
the eccentricity of the hyperbola passing through the foci
( 3 3 cos, sin) (where (0, /2)). of the ellipse and e1e2 = 1, then equation of the hyperbola
is (2006)
Then, the value of  such that the sum of intercepts on
axes made by this tangent is minimum, is (2003)
x 2 y2 x 2 y2
(a)  1 (b)   1
  9 16 16 9
(a) (b)
3 6
x 2 y2
  (c)  1 (d) None of these
(c) (d) 9 25
8 4
CONIC SECTIONS 76
13. A hyperbola, having the transverse axis of length 2sin ,

x 2 y2
is confocal with the ellipse 3x2 + 4y2 = 12. Then its equation 18. Let P (6, 3) be a point on the hyperbola   1 . If the
is (2007) a 2 b2
(a) x2cosec2 – y2sec2 = 1 normal at the point P intersects the x-axis at (9, 0), then the
eccentricity of the hyperbola is (2011)
(b) x2sec2 – y2 cosec2 = 1
(c) x2sin2 – y2 cos2 = 1 5 3
(a) (b)
(d) x2 cos2 – y2 sin2 = 1 2 2
14. Consider a branch of the hyperbola (c) (d)
2 3
x 2 – 2y2 – 2 2 x  4 2 y – 6 = 0 19. The common tangents to the circle x2 + y2 = 2 and the
parabola y2 = 8x touch the circle at the points P, Q and the
with vertex at the point A. Let B be one of the end points
parabola at the points R, S. Then the area of the
of its latus rectum. If C is the focus of the hyperbola nearest
quadrilateral PQRS is (2014)
to the point A, then the area of the triangle ABC is
(a) 3 (b) 6
(2008)
(c) 9 (d) 15
2 3 20. If a chord, which is not a tangent, of the parabola y2 = 16x
(a) 1 – sq unit (b) – 1 sq unit
3 2 has the equation 2x + y = p, and midpoint (h, k), then
which of the following is(are) possible value(s) of p, h
2 3 and k ? (2017)
(c) 1 + sq unit (d) + 1 sq unit
3 2 (a) p = 2, h = 3, k = – 4
15. The line passing through the extremity A of the major axis (b) p = 5, h = 4, k = –3
and extremity B of the minor axis of the ellipse (c) p = –1, h = 1, k = –3
x2 + 9y2 = 9 meets its auxiliary circle at the point M. Then (d) p = –2, h = 2, k = –4
the area of the triangle with vertices at A, M and the origin
O is (2009) 21. Let a, b and  be positive numbers. Suppose P is an end
point of the latus rectum of the parabola y 2  4 x, and
31 29
(a) (b)
10 10 x2 y2
suppose the ellipse   1 passes through the point
a 2 b2
21 27
(c) (d) P. If the tangents to the parabola and the ellipse at the
10 10
point P are perpendicular to each other, then the
16. The normal at a point P on the ellipse x2 + 4y2 = 16 meets eccentricity of the ellipse is (2020)
the x–axis at Q. If M is the mid point of the line segment
PQ, then the locus of M intersects the latus rectum of the 1 1
(a) (b)
given ellipse at the points (2009) 2 2
 3 5 2  3 5 19  1 2
(a)   ,  (b)   , (c) (d)
 2 7   2 4  3 5

22. Let P be a point on the parabola y2 = 4ax, where a > 0. The
 normal to the parabola at P meets the x-axis at a point Q.
 1 4 3 
(c)   2 3 ,   (d)   2 3 ,  The area of the triangle PFQ, where F is the focus of the
 7
 7 
parabola, is 120. If the slope m of the normal and a are
both positive integers, then the pair (a,m) is (2023)
17. Let (x, y) be any point on the parabola y2 = 4x. Let P be the
point that divides the line segment from (0, 0) to (a) (2, 3) (b) (1, 3)
(x, y) in the ratio 1 : 3. Then, the locus of P is (2011) (c) (2, 4) (d) (3, 4)
(a) x2 = y (b) y2 = 2x
(c) y2 = x (d) x2 = 2y
CONIC SECTIONS 77
Objective Questions II [One or more than one correct option] 28. Let L be a normal to the parabola y2 = 4x. If L passes
23. Equation of common tangent of y = x2, y = – x2 + 4x – 4 is through the point (9, 6), then L is given by (2011)
(2006) (a) y – x + 3 = 0 (b) y + 3x – 33 = 0
(a) y = 4 (x – 1) (b) y = 0 (c) y + x – 15 = 0 (d) y – 2x + 12 = 0
(c) y = – 4 (x – 1) (d) y = – 30x – 50
x 2 y2
24. Let P(x1, y1) and Q(x2, y2), y1 < 0, y2 < 0, be the end points 29. Let the eccentricity of the hyperbola   1 be
a 2 b2
of the latus rectum of the ellipse x2 + 4y2 = 4. The equation
of parabola with latus rectum PQ are (2008) reciprocal to that of the ellipse x2 + 4y2 = 4. If the hyperbola
passes through a focus of the ellipse, then (2011)
(a) x 2  2 3y  3  3
x 2 y2
(a) the equation of the hyperbola is  1
(b) x 2  2 3 y  3  3 3 2
(b) a focus of the hyperbola is (2, 0)
(c) x 2  2 3y  3  3
5
(c) the eccentricity of the hyperbola is
(d) x 2  2 3 y  3  3 3
25. The tangent PT and the normal PN to the parabola (d) the equation of the hyperbola is x2 – 3y2 = 3
y2 = 4ax at a point P on it meet its axis at points T and N,
30. Let P and Q be distinct points on the parabola y2 = 2x
respectively. The locus of the centroid of the triangle PTN such that a circle with PQ as diameter passes through the
is a parabola whose (2009)
vertex O of the parabola. If P lies in the first quadrant and
 2a  the area of the triangle OPQ is 3 2, then which of the
(a) vertex is  ,0  (b) directrix is x = 0
 3  following is (are) the coordinates of P ? (2015)
(c) latus rectum is

2a
(d) focus is (a, 0)

(a) 4,2 2  
(b) 9,3 2 
3
1 1 
26. An ellipse intersects the hyperbola 2x 2 – 2y 2 = 1 (c)  ,
4 2
 
(d) 1, 2 
orthogonally. The eccentricity of the ellipse is reciprocal
to that of the hyperbola. If the axes of the ellipse are along 31. Let E1 and E2 be two ellipses whose centres are at the
the coordinate axes, then (2009) origin. The major axes of E1 and E2 lie along the x-axis and
the y-axis, respectively. Let S be the circle x2 + (y  1)2 = 2.
(a) Equation of ellipse is x2 + 2y2 = 2
The straight line x + y = 3 touches the curves S, E1 and E2
(b) The foci of ellipse are (± 1, 0)
2 2
(c) Equation of ellipse is x2 + 2y2 = 4 at P, Q and R respectively. Support that PQ = PR = .
3
(d) The foci of ellipse are (± 2 , 0) If e1 and e2 are the eccentricities of E1 and E2, respectively,
27. Let A and B be two distinct points on the parabola then the correct expression(s) is (are) (2015)
y2 = 4x. If the axis of the parabola touches a circle of radius
2 2 43
r having AB as its diameter, then the slope of the line (a) e1  e2 
joining A and B can be (2010)
40
1 1 7
(a)  (b) (b) e1e 2 
r r 2 10
2 5
(c) 2 (d)  2 2
(c) e1  e 2 
r r 8
3
(d) e1e2 
4
CONIC SECTIONS 78
32. Consider the hyperbola H : x2 – y2 = 1 and a circle S with (c) The area of the region bounded by the ellipse between
centre N(x2, 0). Suppose that H and S touch each other at
1 2
a point P(x1, y1) with x1 > 1 and y1 > 0. The common tangent the lines x= and x = 1 is
to H and S at P intersects the x-axis at point M. If (l, m) is 2 4 2
the centroid of the triangle PMN, then the correct (d) The area of the region bounded by the ellipse between
expression(s) is (are) : (2015)
1 2
dl 1 the lines x= and x=1 is
(a) dx  1  3x 2 for x1  1 2 16 2
1 1
35. Define the collections {E1, E2, E3…………..} of ellipses and
dm x1 {R1, R2, R3…………..} of rectangles as follows:
(b) dx  for x1  1
1 3  x12 1  x2 y2
E1 :   1;
9 4
dl 1
(c) dx  1  3x 2 for x1  1 R1: rectangle of largest area with sides parallel to the axes,
1 1
inscribed in E1:
dm 1
(d)  for y1  0 x2 y2
dy1 3 En: ellipse   1 of largest area inscribed in Rn–1,
an2 bn2
33. Let P be the point on the parabola y2 = 4x which is at the
n>1
shortest distance from the center S of the circle x2 + y2 – 4x
– 16y + 64 = 0. Let Q be the point on the circle dividing the Rn: rectangle of largest area, with sides parallel to the
line segment SP internally. Then (2016) axes, inscribed in En, n >1
Then which of the following options is/are correct ?
(a) SP  2 5
(2019)
(b) SQ : QP   5 1 : 2 (a) The eccentricities of E18 and E19 are NOT equal
(c) the x-intercept of the normal to the parabola at P is 6 1
(b) The length of latus rectum of E9 is
1 6
(d) the slope of the tangent to the circle at Q is
2 N
34. Consider two straight lines, each of which is tangent to (c)  (area of R )  24 , for each positive integer N
n 1
n
1
both the circle x 2  y2  and the parabola y2 = 4x. Let
2 5
(d) The distance of a focus from the centre in E9 is
these lines intersect at the point Q. Consider the ellipse 32
whose center is at the origin O(0,0) and whose semi-major
36. Let a and b be positive real numbers such that a >1 and
axis is OQ. If the length of the minor axis of this ellipse is
b < a. Let P be a point in the first quadrant that lies on the
2, then which of the following statement(s) is (are)
x2 y2
TRUE? (2018) hyperbola  = 1. Suppose the tangent to the
a 2 b2
1 hyperbola at P passes through the point (1,0), and
(a) For the ellipse, the eccentricity is and the length
2 suppose the normal to the hyperbola at P cuts off equal
intercepts on the coordinate axes. Let denote the area
of the latus rectum is 1
of the triangle formed by the tangent at P, the normal
1 at P and the x-axis. If e denotes the eccentricity of the
(b) For the ellipse, the eccentricity is and the length of hyperbola, then which of the following statements is/are
2
TRUE? (2020)
1
the latus rectum is (a) 1 < e < 2 (b)
2 2 <e < 2
(c)  = a 4 (d)  = b4
CONIC SECTIONS 79
37. Let denote the parabola y2 = 8x. Let P = (–2, 4) and let Q
1
and Q’ be two distinct points on E such that the line PQ the point P  , 2  on the parabola and 2 be the area of
and PQ’ are tangents to E. Let F be the focus of E. Then 2 
which of the following statements is (are) TRUE? the triangle formed by drawing tangents at P and at the
(2021) 1
end points of the latus–rectum. Then is.... (2011)
(a) The triangle PFQ is a right-angled triangle 2
(b) The triangle QPQ’ is a right-angled triangle 42. If the normal of the parabola y2 = 4x drawn at the end
(c) The distance between P and F is 5 2 points of its latus rectum are tangents to the circle
(x  3)2 + (y + 2)2 = r2, then the value of r2 is (2015)
(d) F lies on the line joining Q and Q’
43. Let the curve C be the mirror image of the parabola y2 = 4x
38. Consider the parabola y2 = 4x. Let S be the focus of the with respect to the line x + y + 4 = 0. If A and B are the
parabola. A pair of tangents drawn to the parabola from points of intersection of C with the line y = 5, then the
the point P = (-2, 1) meet the parabola at P1 and P2. Let Q1 distance between A and B is (2015)
and Q2 be points on the lines SP1 and SP2 respectively
such that PQ 1 is perpendicular to SP 1 and SP 2 is x 2 y2
44. Suppose that the foci of the ellipse  1 are (f1, 0)
perpendicular to SP2. Then, which of the following is/are 9 5
TRUE ? (2022) and (f2, 0) where f1 > 0 and f2 < 0. Let P1 and P2 be two
parabolas with a common vertex at (0, 0) and with foci at
3 10 (f1, 0) and (2f2, 0), respectively. Let T1 be a tangent to P1
(a) SQ1 = 2 (b) Q1Q 2 
5 which passes through (2f2, 0) and T2 be a tangent to P2
(c) PQ1 = 3 (d) SQ2 = 1 which passes through (f1, 0). If m1 is the slope of T1 and m2
39. Let T1 and T2 be two distinct common tangents to the  1 2

is the slope of T2, then the value of  m 2  m 2  is
 1 
x 2 y2
ellipse E :   1 and the parabola P : y2 =12x.
6 3 (2015)
Suppose that the tangent T1 touches P and E at the point
x 2 y2
A1 and A2, respectively and the tangent T2 touches P and 45. Let E be the ellipse   1 . For any three distinct
16 9
E at the points A4 and A3, respectively. Then which of the
following statements is(are) true ? (2023) points P,Q and Q’on E, let M(P, Q) be the mid-point of the
line segment joining P and Q, and M(P,Q’) be the mid-
(a) The area of the quadrilateral A1A2A3A4 is 35 square
point of the line segment joining P and Q’. Then the
units
maximum possible value of the distance between M(P, Q)
(b) The area of the quadrilateral A1A2A3A4 is 36 square and M(P, Q’), as P, Q and Q’ vary on E, is _____. (2021)
units
46. Consider the hyperbola
(c) The tangents T1 and T2 meet the x-axis at the point
(–3, 0) x 2 y2
 1
(d) The tangents T1 and T2 meet the x-axis at the point 100 64
(–6, 0)
with foci at S and S1, where S lies on the positive x-axis.
Numerical Value Type Questions Let P be a point on the hyperbola, in the first quadrant. Let
x 2 y2 
40. The line 2x + y = 1 is tangent to the hyperbola  1. SPS1 = , with  < . The straight line passing through
a 2 b2 2
the point S and having the same slope as that of the tangent
If this line passes through the point of intersection of the
at P to the hyperbola, intersects the straight line S1P at P1.
nearest directrix and the x-axis, then the eccentricity of the
Let  be the distance of P from the straight line SP1, and 
hyperbola is..... (2010)
41. Consider the parabola y2 = 8x. Let 1 be the area of the 
= S1P. Then the greatest integer less than or equal to
triangle formed by the end points of its latus–rectum and 9

sin is ________. (2022)
2
CONIC SECTIONS 80
Match the Following

 3
Each question has two columns. Four options are given (III) If   , then the area of the (R)
6 4
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds triangle FGH is
 1
corresponding to the correct matching. (IV) If   , then the area of the (S)
12 2 3
2 2
x y triangle FGH is
47. Let H :   1, where a  b  0, be a hyperbola in
2
a b2
the xy-plane whose conjugate axis LM subtends an angle 3 3
(T)
of 60° at one of its vertices N. Let the area of the triangle 2
LMN be 4 3 . (2018) The correct matching is :
(A) The length of the conjugate axis of H is (P) 8 (a) (I-R, II-S, III-Q, IV-P)
(b) (I-R, II-T, III-S, IV-P)
4
(B) The eccentricity of H is (Q) (c) (I-Q, II-T, III-S, IV-P)
3
(d) (I-Q, II-S, III-Q, IV-P)
2 Using the following passage, solve Q.49 and Q.50
(C) The distance between the foci of H is (R)
3 Passage – 1
(D) The length of the latus rectum of H is (S) 4
x 2 y2
The circle x2 + y2 – 8x = 0 and hyperbola  1
The correct matching is : 9 4
(a) (A-S, B-R, C-P, D-Q ) intersect at the points A and B. (2010)
(b) (A-Q, B-P, C-Q, D-S ) 49. Equation of a common tangent with positive slope to the
(c) (A-S, B-Q, C-Q, D-P ) circle as well as to the hyperbola is
(d) (A-Q, B-S, C-Q, D-P )
(a) 2x  5 y  20  0 (b) 2x  5 y  4  0
48. Consider the ellipse
(c) 3x – 4y + 8 = 0 (d) 4x – 3y + 4 = 0
2 2
x y 50. Equation of the circle with AB as its diameter is
  1.
4 3 (a) x2 + y2 – 12x + 24 = 0
Let H(, 0), 0 <  < 2, be a point. A straight line drawn (b) x2 + y2 + 12x + 24 = 0
through H parallel to the y-axis crosses the ellipse and its (c) x2 + y2 + 24x – 12 = 0
auxiliary circle at points E and F respectively, in the first
(d) x2 + y2 –24x – 12 = 0
quadrant. The tangent to the ellipse at the point E
intersects the positive x-axis at a point G. Suppose the Using the following passage, solve Q.51 and Q.52
straight line joining F and the origin makes an angle  Passage – 2
with the positive x-axis. (2022)
Let F1(x1, 0) and F2(x2, 0), for x1 < 0 and x2 > 0, be the foci
List – I List – II
x 2 y2
of the ellipse   1. Suppose a parabola having
4 9 8
(I)

If   , then the area of the (P)
 3 1  vertex at the origin and focus at F2 intersects the ellipse
4 8 at point M in the first quadrant and at point N in the
triangle FGH is fourth quadrant. (2016)
51. The orthocentre of the triangle F1MN is

(II) If   , then the area of the (Q) 1  9  2 
3 (a)   ,0  (b)  ,0 
 10  3 
triangle FGH is
 9  2 
(c)  ,0  (d)  , 6 
 10  3 
CONIC SECTIONS 81
52. If the tangents to the ellipse at M and N meet at R and the 55. For a  2, if a tangent is drawn to suitable conic
normal to the parabola at M meets the x-axis at Q, then the
(Column 1) at the point of contact (–1, 1), then which of
ratio of area of the triangle MQR to area of the quadrilateral
the following options is the only CORRECT combination
MF1NF2 is
for obtaining its equation?
(a) 3 : 4 (b) 4 : 5
(a) (II) (ii) (Q) (b) (I) (i) (P)
(c) 5 : 8 (d) 2 : 3
(c) (I) (ii) (Q) (d) (III) (i) (P)
Text
Passage – 3
56. Prove that, in an ellipse, the perpendicular from a focus
Columns 1, 2 and 3 contain conics, equations of tangents to the upon any tangent and the line joining the centre of the
conics and points of contact, respectively. ellipse of the point of contact meet on the corresponding
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 directrix. (2002)
 a 2a  57. Normals are drawn from the point P with slopes m1, m2, m3
(I) x2 + y2 = a2 (i) my = m2x + a (P)  , 
 m2 m  to the parabola y2 = 4x. If locus of P with m1m2 =  is a part
of the parabola itself, then find . (2003)
 ma 
(II) x2 + a2y2 = a2 (ii) y  mx  a m 2  1 (Q)  ,
a
 58. At any point P on the parabola y2 – 2y – 4x + 5 = 0 a
2
 m 1 m2  1  tangent is drawn which meets the directrix at Q. Find the
locus of point R, which divides QP externally in the ratio
 a 2 m 1 
(III) y2 = 4ax (iii) y  mx  a 2 m 2  1 (R)  2 2
, 

 a m 1 a 2 m2  1  1
: 1. (2004)
 a 2 m 
2
2 2 1
(IV) x2 –a2y2 = a2 (iv) y  mx  a m 1 (S) 
 2 2
, 

a 2 m2  1 
 a m 1 59. Find the equation of the common tangent in 1st quadrant
(2017) x 2 y2
to the circle x2 + y2 = 16 and the ellipse   1. Also
25 4
 1
53. The tangent to a suitable conic (Column 1) at  3,  is find the length of the intercept of the tangent between the
 2
coordinate axes. (2005)
found to be 3x  2y  4, then which of the following 60. Tangents are drawn from any point on the hyperbola
options is the only CORRECT combination ?
x 2 y2
(a) (IV) (iii) (S) (b) (II) (iii) (R)   1 to the circle x2 + y2 = 9. Find the locus of mid
9 4
(c) (IV) (iv) (S) (d) (II) (iv) (R) point of the chord of contact. (2005)
54. If a tangent to a suitable conic (Column 1) is found to be
y = x + 8 and its point of contact is (8, 16), then which of
the following options is the only CORRECT combination?
(a) (III) (i) (P) (b) (I) (ii) (Q)
(c) (II) (iv) (R) (d) (III) (ii) (Q)
CONIC SECTIONS

11
BINOMIAL THEOREM
Chapter 11 83
BINOMIAL THEOREM
1. BINOMIAL THEOREM 3. NUMERICALLY GREATEST TERM
If a, b R and n N, then The term with greatest numerical/absolute value in the
expansion of (a + b)n can be found in following way
(a + b)n = nC0 anb0 + nC1 an–1 b1 + nC2 an–2b2 +...+ nCn a0bn
n 1
(i) Find the value of
REMARKS : a
1
b
1. If the index of the binomial is n then the expansion
contains n + 1 terms. (ii) If it equals an integer, say m, then tm and tm+1 are
numerically greatest terms.
2. In each term, the sum of indices of a and b is always n.
(iii) If it is not an integer, then tm+1 is numerically greatest
3. Coefficients of the terms in binomial expansion
equidistant from both the ends are equal. n 1
term (where m is the integral part of ).
a
4. (a–b)n = nC0anb0 – nC1an–1 b 1 + nC2an–2b 2– ...+ (–1)n 1
b
n
C0a0bn.
Also middle terms in binomial expansions have the greatest
binomial coefficients. (nC0, nC1, nC2 ........ nCn are called Binomial
2. GENERAL TERM AND MIDDLE TERMS IN
Coefficients).
EXPANSION OF (a + b)n
4. BINOMIAL COEFFICIENTS
tr+1 = nCr an–r br
tr+1 is called a general term for all r W and 0 r n. Using The coefficients nC0, nC1, nC2,..., nCn in the expansion of (a+b)n
this formula we can find any term of the expansion. are called the binomial coefficients and denoted by C0, C1,
C2, ....., Cn respectively
MIDDLE TERM (S) : Now
(1 + x)n = nC0x0 + nC1x1 + nC2x2 + ... + nCnxn ..... (i)
1. In (a + b)n if n is even then the number of terms in the
Put x = 1.
expansion is odd. Therefore there is only one middle
(1 + 1)n = nC0 + nC1 + nC2 + ... + nCn
n2
th  2n = nC0 + nC1 + nC2 +...+ nCn
term and it is   term.
 n
C0 + nC1 + nC2 +...+ nCn = 2n
 2 
 C0 + C1 + C2 +...+ Cn = 2n
n
2. In (a + b) , if n is odd then the number of terms in the  The sum of all binomial coefficients is 2n.
expansion is even. Therefore there are two middle Put x = –1, in equation (i),
th th
(1–1)n = nC0 – nC1 + nC2 – ... + (–1)n nCn
 n 1   n 3  0 = nC0 – nC1 + nC2 – ... + (–1)n nCn
terms and those are   and   terms.
 2   2  n
 C0 – nC1 + nC2 – nC3 +....+ (–1)n nCn = 0
SCAN CODE
Binomial Theorem
BINOMIAL THEOREM
84
n
 C0 + nC2 + nC4 + ... = nC1 + nC3 + nC5 +...
1
 C0 + C2 + C4 +... = C1 + C3 + C5 +... Put x = 0, we get C = –
(n  1)
C0, C2, C4, ... are called as even coefficients
C1, C3, C5... are called as odd coefficients Therefore
Let C0 + C2 + C4 +... = C1 + C3 + C5 +... = k (1  x) n 1  1 C x2 C x3 C x n 1 ... (2)

n
 C0 x  1  2  .........  n
Now C0 + C1 + C2 + C3+... + Cn = 2 n 1 2 3 n 1
 (C0 + C2 + C4 +...) + (C1 + C3 + C5...) = 2n
Put x = 1 in (2) we get
 k + k = 2n
2k = 2n 2 n 1  1 C C
 C 0  1  .........  n
n 1 2 n 1
2n
 k Put x = – 1 in (2) we get,
2
 k = 2n–1 1 C C
 C 0  1  2  .............
 C0 + C2 + C4 + ... = C1 + C3 + C5 +... = 2 n–1 n 1 2 3
 The sum of even coefficients = The sum of odd coefficients
= 2n–1 5. BINOMIAL THEOREM FOR ANY INDEX
Properties of Binomial Coefficient
If n is any real number and |x| < 1 then
(i) C0 + C1 + C2 + ............ + Cn = 2n
n (n  1) 2 n (n  1) (n  2) 3
(ii) C0 – C1 + C2 – ............ + (–1)n Cn = 0 (1 + x)n = 1 + nx + x  x  ...
2! 3!
(iii) C0 + C2 + C4 + ............ = C1 + C3 + C5 +.......... = 2n – 1.
(iv) n
Cr1 n Cr2  r1  r2 or r1  r2  n Here there are infinite number of terms in the expansion,
The general term is given by
n
(v) Cr + nCr – 1 = n + 1Cr
(vi) r nCr = nn – 1Cr–1 n ( n  1) ( n  2)...(n  r  1) x r
t r 1  ,r  0
r!
Some Important Results
(i) Differentiating (1 + x)n = C0 + C1x + C2x2 + ........ + Cnxn, NOTES :

on both sides we have,
n(1 + x)n – 1 = C1 + 2C2x + 3C3x2 + ....... +nCnxn – 1 ....(1) (i) Expansion is valid only when – 1 < x < 1
Put x = 1 n
(ii) Cr can not be used because it is defined only for natural
 n2n – 1 = C1 + 2C2 + 3C3 + ........ + nCn
number, so nCr will be written as
Put x = –1
 0 = C1 – 2C2 + ........ +(–1)n – 1 nCn. n (n  1).........(n  r  1)
Differentiating (1) again and again we will have r!
different results.
(iii) As the series never terminates, the number of terms in
(ii) Integrating (1 + x)n, we have,
the series is infinite.
(1  x ) n 1 C x 2 C x3 C x n 1 (iv) If first term is not 1, then make it unity in the following

 C  C 0 x  1  2  .........  n
n 1 2 3 n 1 x
way. (a  x ) n  a n (1  x / a ) n if 1
(where C is a constant) a
SCAN CODE
Binomial Theorem
BINOMIAL THEOREM
85
NOTES : 6. MULTINOMIAL EXPANSION

In the expansion of (x1 + x2 +........ +xn)m where m, n  N and
While expanding (a + b)n where n is a negative integer or a
x1, x2, ..........., xn are independent variables, we have
fraction, reduce the binomial to the form in which the first term
is unity and the second term is numerically less than unity. (i) Total number of terms = m + n – 1Cn – 1
Particular expansion of the binomials for negative index, (ii) Coefficient of x1r1 x 2 r2 x 3 r3 .........x n rn (where r1 + r2 +
|x|<1
m!
........... + rn = m, ri  N  {0} is
1 r1!r2 !.......rn !
1.  (1  x ) 1
1 x (iii) Sum of all the coefficients is obtained by putting all
= 1 – x + x2 – x3 + x4 – x5 + ..... the variables x1 equal to 1.
1
2.  (1  x ) 1
1 x
= 1 + x + x2 + x3 + x4 + x5 + .....
1
3.  (1  x )  2
(1  x ) 2
= 1 – 2x + 3x2 – 4x3 + .....
1
4.  (1  x )  2
(1  x ) 2
= 1 + 2x + 3x2 + 4x3 + .....
SCAN CODE
Binomial Theorem
BINOMIAL THEOREM 86

Binomial theorem for positive integral index 12
 x3 2 
9. 5th term from the end in the expansion of   2  is
 2 x 
1 1 x  
1. If   , then x is equal to
8 9 10
(a) – 7920 x–4 (b) 7920 x4
(a) 100 (b) 90 (c) 7920 x–4 (d) –7920 x4
(c) 170 (d) none of these 10. If the coefficients of (r + 4)th term and (2r + 1)th term in the
2. n n n n n–1 1 n
The expansion (x + a) = C0 x + C1 x a + ..... + Cn a is validn expansion of (1 + x)18 are equal, then r =
when n is (a) 3 (b) 5
(a) an integer (b) a natural number (c) 3 or 5 (d) none of these
(c) a rational number (d) none of these 9
 3 
11. The term independent of x in the expansion of  2x  2  is
3. ( x  x 3  1) 5  ( x  x 3  1 ) 5 is a polynomial of degree  x 
(a) 5 (b) 6 (a) 33 . 9C3 (b) 26 . 33 9C3

(c) 7 (d) 8 (c) –33 . 9C3 (d) –26 . 33 . 9C3
4. (1.003)4 is nearly equal to 8
1 1 1
 
(a) 1.012 (b) 1.0012 12. In the expansion of  x 3  x 5  , the term independent of
2 
 
(c) 0.988 (d) 1.003
x is
5. The number of non-zero terms in the expansion of
(a) T5 (b) T7
 1  3 2 x 9  1 3 2 x 9 


  
 is
(c) T6 (d) T8
13. The term independent of x in the expansion of
(a) 9 (b) 10 8
 t 1 1 x  t 1  1 1
(c) 5 (d) None of these 
    x 1  is :

General term of binomial expansion
3 3
 1 t   1 t 
18
(a) 56   (b) 56  
3  1 t   1 t 
6. The term void of x in the expanion of  x  2  is
 x 
4 4
 1 t   1 t 
(a) 18C6 (b) 18C6 36 (c) 70   (d) 70  
 1 t   1 t 
(c) 18C12 (d) 18C6 312
7. If n  N and the coefficients of x–7 and x–8 to the expansion of 14. The greatest value of the term independent of x, as  varies
20
 1 
n
 sin  
 2   are equal then n = over R, in the expansion of  x cos    is :
3x   x 

(a) 56 (b) 15 (a) 20C10 (b) 20C19
(c) 45 (d) 55 10
8. If n,p  N and in the expansion of (1 + x)n the coefficient of (c) 20C6 (d) 20C10  1 
2
pth and (p + 1)th terms are respectively p and q. The p + q =
15. The coefficient of x8 y10 in the expansion of (x + y)18 is
(a) n + 3CP (b) n + 1C1
(a) 18C8 (b) 18P10
(c) n + 2C1 (d) nCP
(c) 218 (d) None of these
BINOMIAL THEOREM 87
0
25. The coefficient of x 50 in the binomial expansion of
  
16. If the term independent of x in the expansion of  x  2  (1 + x)1000 + x(1 + x)999 + x2(1 + x)998 + ..... + x1000 is:
 x 
is 405, then  equals 1000 ! 1000 !
(a) 50 ! 950 ! (b) 49 ! 951 !
(a) –3 (b) 3      
(c) 3 or –3 (d) None of these
17. If (1 + ax)m =1 + 8x + 24x2 + ..., then the value of a and m are 1001! 1001!
(c) 51 ! 950 ! (d) 50 ! 951 !
respectively.      
(a) 4,2 (b) 2,4
Binomial coefficient problems
(c) 1,8 (d) None of these
Application of binomial theorem 26. If nC3 = nC2, then n is equal to

(a) 2 (b) 3
18. If n  N then 49n + 16 n – 1 is divisible by
(a) 3 (b) 19
27. If n+1C4 = 9 nC2 , then n =
(c) 64 (d) 29
(a) 10 (b) 9
19. Remainder when 7100 is divided by 25 is
(c) 12 (d) 11
(a) 1 (b) 24
28. If n  N and (1+x) = 1 + a1x + a2x2 + ... + anxn. If a1, a2 and a3
n
are in A.P., then the value of n is
20. The co-efficient of x4 in the expansion of (1 + x + x2 + x3)n is
(a) 4 (b) 5
(a) nC4 (b) nC4 + nC2
(c) 6 (d) 7
(c) nC4 + nC1 + nC4 . nC2 (d) nC4 + nC2 + nC1 . nC2
29. The sum rCr + r+1Cr + r+2Cr + ... + nCr (n > r) equals
21. Co-efficient of x5 in the expansion of (x2 – x – 2)5 is :
(a) nCr+1 (b) n+1
Cr+1
(a) –83 (b) –82
(c) n+1Cr–1 (d) n+1Cr
(c) –81 (d) 0
30. The sum of coefficient in the expansion of (1 + x – 3x2)3148 is
22. The number of integral terms in the expansion of
(a) 8 (b) 7
500
 3 2  is : (c) 1 (d) –1
(a) 128 (b) 129 31. If the sum of the coefficients in the expansion of
(a2x2 – 6ax + 11)10, where a is constant, is 1024, then the
(c) 251 (d) 512
value of a is :
23. The coefficient of x99 in
(a) 5 (b) 1
(x + 1) (x + 3) (x + 5) ..... (x + 199) is
(c) 2 (d) 3
(a) 1 + 2 + 3 + .... + 99 (b) 1 + 3 + 5 + .... + 199
32. If n  N and (1 – x + x2)n = a0 + a1x + a2x2 + ...... + a2nx2n, then
(c) 1.3.5. ....... 199 (d) None of these a0+ a2+ a4 + ... +a2n is equal to :
24. The coefficient of x17 in the expansion of
(x – 1) (x – 2) ........ (x – 18) is 3n  1 3n 1
(a) (b)
2 2
(a) 342 (b) –171
171 n 1 n 1
(c) (d) 684 (c) 3  (d) 3 
2 2 2
BINOMIAL THEOREM 88
33. The sum of the numerical coefficients in the expansion of n
n
12 40. Statement I :  (r  1) . Cr  (n  2) 2n 1
 x 2y  r 0
1    , is
 3 3 
n
(a) 1 (b) 2 Statement II :  (r  1) n
Cr .x r  (1  x) n  nx (1  x) n 1
r 0
50
34. In the expansion of (1 + x) , the sum of the coefficient of (a) Statement I is false, Statement II is true
odd powers of x is (b) Statement I is true, Statement II is true;
(a) 0 (b) 249 Statement II is a correct explanation for Statement I
(c) 2 50
(d) 2 51 (c) Statement I is true, Statement II is true;
35. Sum of the last 30 coefficients in the expansion of (1 + x)59, Statement II is not a correct explanation for Statement I
when expanded in ascending powers of x is (d) Statement I is true, Statement II is false
59 58
(a) 2 (b) 2 41. a, b, c, d are any four consecutive co-efficients of any
(c) 230 (d) 229 a b bc cd
binomial expansion, then , , are in :
36. 10
C1 + 10C2 + 10C3 + .............+ 10C10 = a b c
(a) 512 (b) 511 (a) A.P.
(c) 1024 (d) none of these (b) G.P.
37. The value of nC0 – nC1 + nC2 – .... + (–1)n nCn is (c) H.P.
(a) 1 (b) n (d) arithmetico geometric progression

42. The value of
(c) 2n (d) 0
n
 7
C0  7 C1    7

C1  7 C2  ...   7
C6  7 C7  is
2 n 1
38. 
r 0
C2 r 1 is equal to
(a) 27 – 1 (b) 28 – 2
(c) 28 – 1 (d) 28
(a) 22n–1 (b) 22n
(c) 22n+1 –1 (d) 22n+1 Numerical Value Type Questions
10 10 43. If n  2  210 n  1, then the value of n is equal to

39. Let S1   j ( j  1) 10 C j , S2   j 10 C j and
j1 j1 44. The total number of terms in the expansion of
(x + a)100 + (x – a)100 after simplification is
10
S3   j2 10
Cj 45. If 2nC3 : nC2 : : 44 : 1, then the value of n is
j1
46. If 32C2n–1 = 32Cn–3 , then n =
Statement I : S3 = 55×29. 6
 3 
Statement II : S1 = 90 × 28 and S2 = 10×28. 47. The coefficient of x in  x 5  3
 is :

 x3 
(a) Statement I is false, Statement II is true
(b) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; n
 1/3 1 
Statement II is a correct explanation for Statement I 48. If the last term in the binomial expansion of  2   is
 2
(c) Statement I is true, Statement II is true;
log 3 8
Statement II is not a correct explanation for Statement I  1 
 5/3  , then the 5th term form the beginning is :
3 
(d) Statement I is true, Statement II is false
BINOMIAL THEOREM 89
12
52. If n  N and second, third and fourth terms in the expansion
49. If rth term in the expansion of  x 2  1  is independent of of (x + a)n are 240, 720 and 1080 respectively, then the value
 x of n is
x, then r = 53. If the sum of binomial coefficients in the expansion
n
 2x 2
10  1
3   2x   is 256, then term independent of x is
50. The middle term in the expansion of   2  is  x
 3 2x 
54. Coefficient of x5 in the expansion of (1 + x2)5 (1 + x)4 is
51. If T 2/T 3 in the expansion of (a + b) n and T 3/T 4 in the
55. The number of irrational terms in the expansion of
(a + b)n+3 are equal, then n =
45
41/ 5
 71/10  is
BINOMIAL THEOREM 90

Questions marked with asterisk (*) are 6. The ratio of the coefficient of the middle term in the
deleted from JEE Main expansion of 1  x 
20
and the sum of the coefficients of
1. The coefficient of x 256 in the expansion of
two middle terms in expansion of 1  x  is ?
19
x  x  1
100
1  x 
101 2
is: (20-07-2021/Shift-1)
(25-07-2021/Shift-1)
(a) 100 C16 (b) 100

C16 7. The probability that a randomly selected 2 digit number
(c) 100
C15 (d) 100 C15

belongs to the set n  N :  2  2  is a multiple of 3 is
n
equal to : (27-07-2021/Shift-1)
2. The number of rational terms in the binomial expansion of
120 1 1
 14 1
 (a) (b)
 4  5 6  is ______. (20-07-2021/Shift-1) 2 3
 
2 1
3. For the natural numbers m, n, if (c) (d)
3 6
1  y  1  y 
m n
 1  a1 y  a 2 y 2  .......  a m  n y m  n and
11
 2 1 
a1  a 2  10, then the value of  m  n  is equal to 8. If the coefficients of x 7 in  x   and x 7 in
 bx 
(20-07-2021/Shift-2)
11
(a) 88 (b) 64  1 
 x  2  , b  0, are equal, then the value of b is equal
(c) 100 (d) 80  bx 
4. If b is very small as compared to the value of a, so that the to: (27-07-2021/Shift-1)

(a) –1 (b) 2
b
cube and other higher powers of can be neglected in (c) –2 (d) 1
a
the identity 9. A possible value of ' x ', for which the ninth term in the
1 1 1 1  log  1

10
 
  ..........   n  n 2  n 3 ,
x 1
25x 1  7    log3 5 1
a  b a  2b a  3b a  nb expansion of 3 3 3  8
 in the
 
then the value of  is is ? (25-07-2021/Shift-1)
increasing powers of 3 8  log3  5  is equal to 180, is:

1 x 1
1
b2 ab
(a) (b)
3a 3 3a 2
(27-07-2021/Shift-2)
a2  b a  b2 (a) 2 (b) 1
(c) (d)
3a 3 3a 3 (c) 0 (d) –1
5. The term independent of ‘x’ in the expansion of 10. The number of elements in the set

 2/3
x 1

x 1 
10
, where x  0,1 is equal to

n  1, 2, 3, .....,100 11 n
 10    9 
n n
 is ______. is
1/ 2 
 x  x 1 x  x 
1/3
(22-07-2021/Shift-2)
_________ ? (25-07-2021/Shift-1) 11. If the constant term, in binomial expansion of
10
 r 1 
 2x  2  is 180, then r is equal to _____.
 x 
(22-07-2021/Shift-2)
BINOMIAL THEOREM 91
Questions marked with asterisk (*) are 20 2
deleted from JEE Main 19*. 

k 0
20
C k  is equal to: (27-08-2021/Shift-1)
12. The sum of all those terms which are rational numbers in
12 41 40
 13 1
 (a) C 20 (b) C 20
the expansion of  2  3 
4
is: (25-07-2021/Shift-2)
  (c) 40
C 21 (d) 40
C19
(a) 27 (b) 89
20*. If 20
C r is the co-efficient of x r in the expansion of
(c) 35 (d) 43
13. If the greatest value of the term independent of ' x ' in the 20
10 10!
1  x 
20
, then the value of r 2 20
C r is equal to :
 cos   r 0
expansion of  x sin   a  is , then the

 5!
2
 x  (26-08-2021/Shift-1)
value of ' a ' is equal to: (25-07-2021/Shift-2)
(a) 420  219 (b) 420  218
(a) 2 (b) –1
(c) 1 (d) –2 (c) 380  218 (d) 380  219
10100 21. 3  7 22  2  10 22  44 when divided by 18 leaves the

 1 
14. The lowest integer which is greater than 1  100  is remainder ___________. (27-08-2021/Shift-2)
 10 
______. (25-07-2021/Shift-2)  36 
(a) 3 (b) 4 22. If  4  k is the term independent of x in the binomial
4 
(c) 2 (d) 1
12
15. If the coefficients of x 7 and x 8 in the expansion of  x 12 
expansion of   2  , then k is equal to
n 4 x 
 x
 2   are equal, then the value of n is equal to___. __________ ? (31-08-2021/Shift-1)
 3
(25-07-2021/Shift-2) 23. If the coefficient of a 7 b8 in the expansion of
16*. Let n  N and  x  denote the greatest integer less than  a  2b  4ab 
10
is K  216 , then K is equal to______.
or equal to x. If the sum of  n  1 terms of (31-08-2021/Shift-2)

n n n n
C0 , 3. C1 , 5. C 2 , 7. C3 , …..is equal to 2 .101, then
100
24. Let n be a positive integer. Let
 n  1 n  1  k  3 k  7  k  15  k  31  k 
2  is equal to________. (25-07-2021/Shift-2) A   (1) k n Ck               
 2  k 0  2   4   8   16   32  
If the sum of the coefficients in the expansion of  x  y 

n
17.
1
is 4096, than greatest coefficient in the expansion If 63A = 1  , then n is equal to ____.
is_______ ? (01-09-2021/Shift-2) 230
(16-03-2021/Shift-2)
 n 
n  n    , if 0  k  n 25. If n is the number of irrational terms in the expansion of
 k
18*. Let   denote n C k and  k   
k 0 , otherwise 60
  14 1

 3  58  , then  n  1 is divisible by
 
9
 9   12  8  8   13 
If A k          i  13  k  i  and
i  0  i  12  k  i  i0     (16-03-2021/Shift-1)
A 4  A 3  190p, then p is equal to _______. (a) 8 (b) 26
(26-08-2021/Shift-2) (c) 7 (d) 30

BINOMIAL THEOREM 92

 n   n Cr , if n  r  0
deleted from JEE Main 33*. For integers n and r, let  r   
  0, otherwise
6
26*. The value of 

r 0
6
C r . 6 C6  r  is equal to : The maximum value of k for which the sum
k
10   15  k 1 12   13 
(17-03-2021/Shift-2)       
i0  i   k  i 
 is maximum, is
i0  i   k  1  i 
(a) 1024 (b) 1124
equal to ____. (24-02-2021/Shift-2)
(c) 1324 (d) 924
34*. The value of
27. Let the coefficients of third, fourth and fifth terms in the
n  15 C1  2 15 C 2  3 15 C3    15 15 C15
 a 
expansion of  x  2  , x  0, be in the ratio 12 : 8 : 3.
 x   14 C1  14 C3  14 C 5    14 C11 (24-02-2021/Shift-1)
Then the term independent of x in the expansion, is equal
to ............ . (a) 214 (b) 213  13
(Round off the answer to nearest integer) (c) 216 (d) 213  14
(17-03-2021/Shift-2) 35. If the reminder when x is divided by 4 is 3, then the
 2020  x 
3762 2022
28. If (2021) is divided by 17, then the remainder is remainder when is divided by 8
……………. . (17-03-2021/Shift-1) is_______. (25-02-2021/Shift-2)
29. The term independent of x in the expansion of 36. The maximum value of the term independent of ‘t’ in the
10
 x 1 x 1   1 1

10
 tx 5  1  x 10
 2/3  1/ 2 
, x  1, is equal to

x  x 1 x  x 
1/ 3
expansion of  t  where x   0,1 is
_______. (18-03-2021/Shift-2)  
 
30. Let n C r denote the binomial coefficient of x r in the (26-02-2021/Shift-1)
expansion of (1  x) n . If 10! 2.10!
(a) (b)
10 3(5!)2 3 3(5!) 2
 (22  3k) n Ck  .310  .210 , ,   R, then   
k 0
10! 2.10!
is equal to _______. (18-03-2021/Shift-2) (c) (d)
3(5!) 2
3(5!)2
31. Let (1  x  2x 2 ) 20  a 0  a1 x  a 2 x 2  ......  a 40 x 40 .
Then, a1  a 3  a 5  .....  a 37 is equal to : 37*. Let m, n  N and gcd  2, n   1. If
(18-03-2021/Shift-1)  30   30   30   30 
30    29    ..  2    1    n  2m , then
(a) 2 20 (220  21) (b) 219 (220  21) 0 1  28   29 
 n n 
(c) 219 (220  21) (d) 2 20 (220  21)
n  m is equal to _____ .  Here  k   C k 
   
32*. If n  2 is a positive integer, then the sum of the series
(26-02-2021/Shift-1)
n 1
C2  2  2 C 2  3 C2  4 C2  .  n C2  is
38. If the fourth term in the expansion of ( x  x log x ) 7 is2
(24-02-2021/Shift-2)
4480, then the value of x where x  N is equal to :
n(n  1)(2n  1)
(a) n(n  1) (n  2)
2
(b) (17-03-2021/Shift-1)
12 6 (a) 4 (b) 2
n(2n  1)(3n  1) (c) 3 (d) 1
(c) n(n  1)(2n  1) (d)
6 6
BINOMIAL THEOREM 93
Questions marked with asterisk (*) are 1 2n

(c) 22 n  Cn (d) 2 n  1  2 n  1Cn
2
47. The remainder when (2021) 2022  (2022) 2021 is divided
39. The remainder when 32022 is divided by 5 is
by 7 is (JEE Main 2022)
(JEE Main 2022)
(a) 0 (b) 1
(a) 1 (b) 2
(c) 2 (d) 6
(c) 3 (d) 4
48. The remainder when 7 2022  32022 is divided by 5 is :
40. The coefficient of x101 in the expression
(JEE Main 2022)
(5  x )500  x (5  x ) 499  x 2 (5  x ) 498  ..... x 500 , x  0, is
(a) 0 (b) 2
(JEE Main 2022) (c) 3 (d) 4
C101  5  C101  5 
501 399 501 400
(a) (b) 49. The remainder on dividing 1  3  32  33  ....  32021 by
(c) 501
C100  5 
400
(d) 500
C101  5 
399 50 is (JEE Main 2022)
50. *Let Cr denote the binomial coefficient of x r in the
41. The remainder when (2021) 2023 is divided by 7 is:
expansion of 1  x  . If  ,   R .
10
(JEE Main 2022)
(a) 1 (b) 2 C1  3  2C2  5  3C3  ... upto 10 terms
(c) 5 (d) 6
  211  C C 
42. The term independent of x in the expression of  C0  1  2  ...upto 10 terms  then one
11
2   1  2 3 
5 1 
(1  x 2  3 x 3 )  x 3  2  , x  0 is of the value of    is equal to (JEE Main 2022)
2 5x 
51. If the sum of the coefficients of all the positive even
(JEE Main 2022) 10
7 33  3
powers of x in the binomial expansion of  2x 3  
(a) (b)  x
40 200
39 11 is 510    39 , then  is equal to (JEE Main 2022)
(c) (d)
200 50 52. If the coefficient of x10 in the binomial expansion
43. If the constant term in the expansion of  
60
x 5
 3 5 
10
of  1  1  is 5k l , where l , k  N and l is co-
k
 3 x  2 x  5  is 2 . l, where l is an odd integer,
2
 4 
 x  5 x3 
then the value of k is equal to : (JEE Main 2022) prime to 5, then k is equal to ____.
(a) 6 (b) 7 (JEE Main 2022)
(c) 8 (d) 9 53. If the sum of the coefficients of all the positive powers
7
44. Let n  5 be an integer. If 9  8n  1  64  and
n
 2
of x, in the binomial expansion of  x n  5  is 939,
6 n  5n  1  25  , then    is equal to :  x 
(JEE Main 2022) then the sum of all the possible integral values of n is:
(a) 1  n C2 (8  5)  n C3 (8 2  52 )  ......  n C n (8n 1  5n 1 ) (JEE Main 2022)
54. The number of positive integers k such that the
(b) 1  n C3 (8  5)  n C4 (82  52 )  ......  n Cn (8n  2  5n  2 )
constant term in the binomial expansion of
(c) n C3 (8  5)  n C4 (82  52 )  ......  n C n (8n  2  5n  2 ) 12
 3 3 
 2 x  k  , x  0 is 2  l , where l is an odd
8
n 3 n3
(d) C4 (8  5)  C5 (8  5 )  ......  Cn (8
n n 2 2 n
5 )  x 
45. The remainder when (11) 1011
 (1011)
11
is divided by 9 integer, is ____. (JEE Main 2022)
is (JEE Main 2022) 55. Let the coefficients of x 1 and x 3 in the expansion of
(a) 1 (b) 4  1
15

(c) 6 (d) 8  2x5  1  , x  0 , be m and n respectively. If r is
n  1

 x5 
46. *  n
Ci n C j is equal to (JEE Main 2022)
i , j  0, i  j a positive integer such mn 2  15 Cr .2 r , then the value
2 n 1 2n 1
(a) 2  2n 2n
Cn (b) 2  Cn 1 of r is equal to ____. (JEE Main 2022)
BINOMIAL THEOREM 94

45 44
(c) C24 (d) C22
10  r
deleted from JEE Main 64. If ar is the coefficient of x in the Binomial
56. If the maximum value of the term independent of t in  ar  10
2
expansion of 1  x  , then r
10 3
 1 1

15   is equal to
1  x 10 r 1  ar 1 
the expansion of  t 2 x 5   , x  0 , is K, then
 t  (JEE Main 2023)
  (a) 4895 (b) 1210
8K is equal to ____. (JEE Main 2022) (c) 5445 (d) 3025
57. If the coefficients of x and x 2 in the expansion of 65. Let K be the sum of the coefficients of the odd
1  x  1  x  powers of x in the expansion of 1  x  . Let a be
p q 99
, q  15 , are -3 and -5 respectively,
200
then the coefficient of x 3 is equal to ____.  1 
the middle term in the expansion of  2   . If
(JEE Main 2022)  2
Let for the 9th term in binomial expansion of  3  6 x  ,
n
58. 200
C99 K 2l m
 , where m and n are odd numbers,
in the increasing powers of 6x , to be the greatest for a n
3 then the ordered pair  l, n  is equal to:
x , the least value of n is n0 . If k is the ratio of
2 (JEE Main 2023)
the coefficient of x 6 to the coefficient of x 3 , then (a)  50,51 (b)  51,99
k  n0 is equal to: (JEE Main 2022)
(c)  50,101 (d)  51,101
59. Let the coefficients of the middle terms in the
4 66. If the coefficient of x15 in the expansion of
 1 
  x  , 1  3 x 
2
expansion of  and 15
 6   
 ax 3  1  is equal to the coefficient of x 15 in the
  
6
 1

 1  x  ,   0 , respectively form the first three  bx 3 
 2  15
terms of an A.P. If d is the common difference of this  1 
1
expansion of  ax 3  1  , where a and b are
2d  
A.P., then 50  is equal to ____.  bx 3 
2
positive real numbers, then for each such ordered
(JEE Main 2022)
pair  a, b : (JEE Main 2023)
60. *If
(a) a  b (b) a  1
1   2  49 C1  49 C2  ....  49 C49  50 C2  50 C4  ....  50 C50 
(c) a  3b (d) ab  3
is equal to 2 n. m , where m is odd, then n  m is
67. The coefficient of x 301 in
1  x   x 1  x   x 2 1  x 
500 499 498
 ...  x 500 is:
61. Let the ratio of the fifth term from the beginning to the
fifth term from the end in the binomial expansion of (JEE Main 2023)
n 501 500
4 1  1 (a) C302 (b) C301
 2  4  , in the increasing powers of 4
be
 3 3 (c) 500
C300 (d) 501
C200

    t 
4 13 9
6 :1 . If the sixth term from the beginnings is 4
, 68. Let x  8 3  13 and y  7 2  9 . If
3
then  is equal to _____. (JEE Main 2022) denotes the greatest integer  t , then
10
(JEE Main 2023)
K  CK   22000 L , then L is equal to
2
62. *If 2 10
k 1 (a)  x   y is even
____.
(JEE Main 2022) (b)  x is odd but  y  is even
(c)  x is even but  y  is odd

22
63. *The value  22
Cr 23Cr is (JEE Main 2023)
(d)  x and  y  are both odd
r 0
45 44
(a) C23 (b) C23
BINOMIAL THEOREM 95
13
1 1 1 1 1  1 
69. The value of    ...   77. If the coefficient of x 7 in  ax  2  and the
1!50! 3!48! 5!46! 49!2! 51!1!  bx 
is (JEE Main 2023) 13
 1 
250 2 50 coefficient of x 5 in  ax  2  are equal, then a 4 b 4
(a) (b)  bx 
50! 51! is equal to: (JEE Main 2023)
2 51 251 (a) 22 (b) 44
(c) (d) (c) 11 (d) 33
51! 50!
78. If the coefficient of x and x 2 in 1  x  1  x  are
p q
70. If the ratio of the fifth term from the beginning to the
fifth term from the end in the expansion of 4 and 5 respectively, then 2 p  3q is equal to
n
4 1  (JEE Main 2023)
 2  4  is 6 :1 , then the third term from the
(a) 60 (b) 63
 3
(c) 69 (d) 66
beginning is: (JEE Main 2023)
number  22    2022 
2022 22
(a) 30 2 (b) 60 2 79. Let the leave the
(c) 60 3 (d) 30 3 remainder  when divided by 3 and  when divided
71. If 2n
C3 : n C3  10 :1 , then the ratio by 7. Then  2   2  is equal to (JEE Main 2023)
n 2
 3n  :  n 2  3n  4  is (JEE Main 2023) (a) 10 (b) 5
(c) 13 (d) 20
(a) 27 :11 (b) 2 :1
80. The sum of the coefficients of three consecutive terms
(c) 65 : 37 (d) 35 :16
in the binomial expansion of 1  x 
n2
11 , which are in
 1 
72. If the coefficients of x 7 in  ax 2   and x 7 in the ratio 1: 3 : 5 , is equal to (JEE Main 2023)
 2bx 
(a) 63 (b) 92
11
 1  (c) 25 (d) 41
 ax  2 
are equal, then (JEE Main 2023)
81. If the 1011th term from the end in the binomial
 3bx 
2022
(a) 729ab  32 (b) 64ab  243  4x 5 
expansion of    is 1024 times 1011th term
(c) 32ab  729 (d) 243ab  64  5 2x 
73. Among the statements:
from the beginning, then x is equal to
(S1): 20232022  1999 2022 is divisible by 8
(JEE Main 2023)
(S2): 13 13  11n  13 is divisible by 144 for
n
(a) 12 (b) 10
(c) 8 (d) 15
infinitely many values of n  N (JEE Main 2023)
1 n 1 1 1023
(a) Only (S2) is correct 82. If Cn  n Cn 1  ....  n C1  n C0  then
n 1 n 2 10
(b) Both (S1) and (S2) are correct
n is equal to (JEE Main 2023)
(c) only (S1) is correct
(a) 8 (b) 7
(d) Both (S1) and (S2) are incorrect (c) 9 (d) 6
74. If the coefficients of three consecutive terms in the 83. The sum, of the coefficients of the first 50 terms in the
expansion of 1  x  are in the ratio 1: 5 : 20 , then the binomial expansion of 1  x 
n 100
, is equal to
coefficient of the fourth term is (JEE Main 2023) (JEE Main 2023)
99
(a) 2436 (b) 5481 (a) C49 (b) 101 C50
(c) 3654 (d) 1827 (c) 99
C49 (d)  101C50
75. 25  19  8  2 is divisible by
190 190 190 190
4 2022
(JEE Main 2023) 84. Fractional part of the number is equal to
15
(a) both 14 and 34 (b) 34 but not by 14 (JEE Main 2023)
(c) neither 14 nor 34 (d) 14 but not by 34 8 14
(a) (b)
76. The absolute difference of the coefficients of x10 and 15 15
x 7 in the expansion of (JEE Main 2023) 4 1
(c) (d)
(a) 10  103
(b) 123  12 15 15
(c) 13  133
(d) 113  11
BINOMIAL THEOREM 96
Questions marked with asterisk (*) are 96. The coefficient of x 6 , in the expansion
9
deleted from JEE Main  4x 5 
of   2  , is ____. (JEE Main 2023)
85. The coefficient of x5 in the expansion of  5 2x 
5 97. If the constant term in the binomial expansion of
 3 1  9
 2 x  2  is (JEE Main 2023)  52 
 3x   x  4  is -84 and the Coefficient of x 3l is 2  ,
80  2 xl 
(a) 9 (b)  
 
9
26 where   0 is an odd number, then l   is equal
(c) (d) 8 to _____. (JEE Main 2023)
3
20 98. The remainder when 19 200  23200 is divided by 49, is
86. Let  a  bx  cx  2 10
  pi xi , a, b, c,  . If p1  20 (JEE Main 2023)
i0
99. Let the sixth term in the binomial expansion of
and p2  210 , then 2  a  b  c  is equal to
 ,
m
2log2 10  3x   2
5 x  2  log 2 3
in the increasing
(JEE Main 2023)
(a) 6 (b) 15 powers of 2 x  2  log 2 3 , be 21. If the binomial coefficients
(c) 12 (d) 8 of the second, third and fourth terms in the expansion
2023
are respectively the first, third and fifth terms of an
87*. Suppose r
r 0
2 2023
Cr  2023    2 2022 . Then the value
A.P., then the sum of the squares of all possible values
of  is ____. (JEE Main 2023) of x is (JEE Main 2023)
22
88. Let the sum of the coefficients of the first three terms  2  
n 100. If the term without x in the expansion of  x 3  3 
 3 
 x 
in the expansion of  x  2  , x  0, n  N , be 376.
 x 
is 7315, then  is equal to (JEE Main 2023)
Then the coefficient of x 4 is _____.
15
(JEE Main 2023)  1
101. The coefficient of x18 in the expansion of  x 4  3 
89. The constant term in the expansion  x 
5
 1  is ____. (JEE Main 2023)
of  2 x  7  3x 2  is _____. (JEE Main 2023)
 x  102. Let   denote the greatest integer  t . If the constant
t
 2023
2023 7
90. The remainder when is divided by 35 is  1 
term in the expansion of  3 x 2  5  is  , then  
______. (JEE Main 2023)  2 x 
11
 1  is equal to ___. (JEE Main 2023)
91. If the co-efficient of x 9 in   x 3   and the co-
103. The coefficient of x 7 in 1  x  2 x 3 
10
 x is ____.
11
 1  (JEE Main 2023)
efficient of x 9 in   x  3  are equal, then
  x  104. The mean of the coefficients of x, x 2 ,...., x 7 in the
binomial expansion of  2  x  is ____.
9
 
2
is equal to ______. (JEE Main 2023)
92. Let the coefficients of three consecutive terms in the (JEE Main 2023)
105. The number of integral terms in the expansion of
binomial expansion of 1  2 x  be in the ratio 2 : 5 : 8
n
680
 12 1

. Then the coefficient of the term, which is in the  3  5 4  is equal to (JEE Main 2023)
middle of these three terms, is _____.  
(JEE Main 2023) 106. Let  be the constant term in the binomial expansion
93. 50th root of a number x is 12 and 50th root of another n
number y is 18. Then the remainder obtained on  
6
of  x  3  , n  15 . If the sum of the coefficients
dividing  x  y  by 25 is _____. (JEE Main 2023)  
 x2 
94. Let   0 , be the smallest number such that the
30
of the remaining terms in the expansion is 649 and the
 2 2 coefficient of x  n is  , then  is equal to ____.
expansion of  x 3  3  has a term  x  ,    .
 x  (JEE Main 2023)
107. The remainder, when 7103 is divided by 17, is
Then  is equal to ____. (JEE Main 2023)
99
(JEE Main 2023)
95. The remainder on dividing 5 by 11 is ____.
(JEE Main 2023)
BINOMIAL THEOREM 97

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 8. In the binomial expansion of (a – b)n, n  5, the sum of the
5th and 6th terms is zero. Then, a/b equals
1. The ratio of the coefficient of x10 in (1-x2)10 and the term
n 5 n4
10 (a) (b)
 2 6 5
independent of x in  x   , is
 x 
5 6
(a) 1 : 16 (b) 1 : 32 (c) (d)
n4 n 5
(c) 1 : 64 (d) none of these
9. The greatest value of the term independent of x in the
n expansion of (x sin  + x–1 cos )10, R, is
 1
2. If the fourth term in the expansion of  px   is
 x 10!
(a) 25 (b)
independent of x, then the value of term is (5!)2
(a) 5p3 (b) 10p3

10!
(c) 20p3 (d) none of these (c) (d) none of these
25  (5!)2
3. The greatest coefficent in the expansion of (1 + x)2n is
10. If the ratio of 7th term from the beginning to the seventh
(a) 2nCn (b) 2nCn–1
x
(c) 2nCn–2 (d) none of these  1  1
term from the end in the expansion of  3 2   is

3
3 6
4. Which of the following expression is divisible by 1225 ?
(a) 62n – 35n–1 (b) 62n – 35n+1 then x, is
(c) 62n – 35n (d) 62n – 35n+2 (a) 9 (b) 6, 15
5. The number of distinct terms in the expansion of (c) 12, 9 (d) none of these
(x + y – z)16 is 11. The sum of coefficients of the two middle terms in the
(a) 136 (b) 153 expansions of (1 + x)2n – 1 is equal to :
(c) 16 (d) 17 (a) (2n – 1)Cn (b) (2n – 1)Cn + 1
6. The total number of terms in the expansion of (c) 2nCn – 1 (d) 2nCn
(a + b + c + d)n, n  N is 12. The greatest term (numerically) in the expansion of
3
n  n  1 n  2  n  n  1 n  2  n  3 (2 + 3x)9, when x  , is
(a) (b) 2
6 6
5  311 5  313
(a) (b)
 n  1 n  2  n  3 2 2
6
7  313
7. If rth and (r + 1)th term in the expansion of (1 + x)n are 2
equal, then n = 13. The greatest term (numerically) in the expansion of
1  x  r  x 1  x  r  x 1
(a) (b) (3 – 5x)11, when x  is
4x 3x 5
(a) 55 × 39 (b) 46 × 39
1  x  r  x 1  x  r  x (c) 55 × 36 (d) none of these
(c) (d)
x r
BINOMIAL THEOREM 98
14. If 7103 is divided by 25, then the remainder is 25. The sum 1. 20C1 –2. 20C2 + 3. 20C3 – .....–20C20 is equal to
(a) 20 (b) 16 (a) 219 (b) 0
(c) 18 (d) 15 (c) 220 – 1 (d) none of these
15. The last digit of the number (32)32 is 26. 1. nC1 + 2, nC2 + 3. nC3 + ....+ n. nCn is equal to
(a) 4 (b) 6
n  n  1
(c) 8 (d) none of these (a) .2 n (b) 2n+1–3
4
16. 97 + 79 is divisible by
(c) n2n–1 (d) none of these
(a) 6 (b) 24
(c) 64 (d) 72 27. If Cr stands for nCr, then the sum of the series
17. The number 525 – 325 is divisible by : n n

2   !  !
(a) 2 (b) 3  2   2   C 2  2C2  3C 2  ....  (1) n (n 1) C 2 
n!  0 1 2 n
(c) 5 (d)7
18. If 0  r  n, then the coefficient of xr in the expansion of where n is an even positive integer, is equal to :
2 n
P = 1 + (1 + x) + (1 + x) + ..... + (1 + x) is (a) (–1)n/2 (n + 2) (b) (–1)n (n + 1)
(a) nCr (b) n+1Cr+1 (c) (–1)n/2 (n + 1) (d) none of these
(c) nCr+1 (d) none of these
28. If A = 2nC0. 2nC1 + 2nC1 2n–1C1 + 2nC2 2n–2C1 + .....then A is
(a) 0 (b) 2n
5
40  1  (c) n22n (d) 1
1  x  2
. x 2  2  2 
 x 
is
29. The coefficient of x50 in the expansion : (1 + x)1000 + 2x
(1 + x)999 + 3x2 (1 + x)998 +...+1001 terms
(a) 30C10 (b) 30C25
(c) 1 (d) none of these (a) 1002C50 (b) 1002C51
(c) 1005C50 (d) 1005C48
20. The integral part of ( 2  1)6 is:
n n
1 r t
(a) 198 (b) 197 30. If s n   n and t n   n then n is equal to
r 0 Cr r 0 Cr s n
(c) 196 (d)163
1 n n
21. If =1 + a1x + a2x2 + ..., then the value of ar is (a) (b) 1
1  2x  x 2 2 2
(a) 2r (b) r + 1 2n  1
(c) r (d) r – 1 (c) n – 1 (d)
2
6
50 32
22. The value of C4   56  r C3 is 31. If 7 divides 3232 , the remainder is :
r 1
(a) 1 (b) 0
(a) 56C4 (b) 56C3
(c) 4 (d) 6
(c) 55C3 (d) 55C4
32. The term independent of x in the expansion of (1 + x)n
23. If n is a positive integer greater than 1, then
n
a – nC1(a – 1) + nC2(a – 2) – ....+ (–1)n (a – n) is equal to  1  is :
1  
(a) n (b) a  x
24. If (1 +x) 15 = C 0 + C 1 x+C 2 x 2 +....+ C 15 x 15 , then (a) C02  2C12  3C22  ...  (n  1)C2n
15 (b) (C0 + C1 + C2 + ... + Cn)2
C02 15 C12 15 C22 15 C32  ....15 C15
2
is equal to
(a) 0 (b) 1 (c) C02  C12  ...  C2n

(c) –1 (d) none of these (d) none of these
BINOMIAL THEOREM 99
n 42. The coefficient of x99 in the polynomial

 1 
33. The number of terms in the expansion of  x 2  1  2  , (x – 1) (x – 2) .... (x – 100) is .....
 x 
n  N is. Match the Following
(a) 2n (b) 3n
Each question has two columns. Four options are given
(c) 2n + 1 (d) 3n + 1 representing matching of elements from Column-I and
34. Integral part of (7  4 3) n is (n  N)
(a) an even number corresponding to the correct matching.
(b) an odd number
43. Match the entries in Column-I representing in n with their
(c) an even or an odd number depending upon the of n
values given in Column-II.
(d) none of these
Column I Column II
Objective Questions II [One or more than one correct option]
(A) 16 C n  16
C n 1  (P) 15
25
35. In the expansion of (x + y + z)
17 18
25
Cn  2  C 2n 1
(a) every term is of the form C r . r C k . x 25  r .y r  5 .z k
16 17
(b) the coefficient of x8y9z9 is 0 (B) Cn 5  Cn 6 (Q) 6
(c) the number of term is 325
(C) 12  (n C6 )2  7  (R) 7
(d) none of these.
36. Element in set of values of r for which, ( n 1 C5 )  ( n 1 C7 )
18
C r  2  2. 18 C r 1  18
Cr  20
C13 is : (D) 2  ( n 1 C 4  n 1
C3 ) (S) 12
(a) 9 (b) 5
 5  (n 2 C2 )
(c) 7 (d) 10
37. The expansion of (3x + 2)-1/2 is valid in ascending powers The correct matching is
of x, if x lies in the interval (a) A–Q, R ; B–Q, R ; C–P, Q, R, S; D–Q, R
(a) (0, 2/3) (b) (-3/2, 3/2) (b) A–Q ; B–Q, R ; C–P, Q, R, S; D–Q, R
(c) (-2/3, 2/3) (d) (, 3 / 2) (3 / 2,  ) (c) A–Q, R ; B–Q ; C–P, Q, R, S; D–Q, R
(d) A–Q, R ; B–Q, R ; C–P, Q, S; D–Q, R
44. Match the following with their no. of terms.
n n n
38. If Cr–1 = 36, Cr = 84 and Cr+1 = 126, then r = Column-I Column-II
39. Let the co-efficients of xn in (1 + x)2n & (1 + x)2n-1 be P & Q 3
(A) (x1 + x2+ x3……+ xn) (P) infinite
4
PQ (B) (x1 + x2 + x3)n (Q) n + 2C3
respectively, then   
 P 
(C) (1  x) 3 (| x | 1) (R)  2n  1
40. Sum of square of all possible values of ‘r’ satisfying the
equation (D) (1+ x + x2)n (S) n+2C2
39 39 39 39 The correct matching is

C3r 1  Cr 2  Cr 2 1  C3r is :
(a) A– Q; B–S; C–R; D–Q
10
1 1 1 1 (2  1) (b) A –S; B–S; C–P; D–R
41. If    ......   then find
1!10! 2!9! 3!8! 10!1! k10! (c ) A –Q; B –S; C–R; D–R
the value of k.
(d) A –Q; B –S; C–P; D–R
BINOMIAL THEOREM 100
Text 48. Prove that C0 – 22 . C1 + 32 . C2 – ..... + (–1)n (n + 1)2 . Cn = 0,

n > 2 where Cr = nCr.
45. Let n be a positive integer and
49. Prove that : (2nC0)2 – (2nC1)2 + (2nC2)2 + ... + (2nC2n)2
(1 + x + x2)n = a0 + a1x + ..... + a2nx2n.
= (–1)n.2n Cn.
2 2 2
Show that a 0  a1  .....  a 2n  a n . 50. Prove that :
46. Given sn = 1 + q + q2 + ..... + qn C12  2.C22  3.C32  ......  2n.C2n

2 n
  1 n. 2n Cn
2 n
q 1  q 1   q 1 
Sn  1     ....    ,q  1 .
2  2   2 
Prove that n+1C1 + n+1C2s1 + n+1C3s2 +

.... + n+1Cn+1sn = 2nSn
47. Find the sum of the series :
n
r n  1 3r 7r 15r 
 (1) Cr  r  2r  3r  4r ....upto mterms 
2 2 2 2
r 0  

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 7. For r = 0, 1, ...., 10, let Ar, Br and Cr denote, respectively, the
coefficient of xr in the expansions of (1 + x)10, (1+x)20 and
n  n   n 
1. For 2  r  n,    2    is equal to : (2000) 10
 r   r 1   r  2  (1 + x)30. Then A
r 1
r (B10 Br  C10 A r ) is equal to (2010)
 n  1  n 1
(a)   (b) 2  
 r 1   r 1  (a) B10 – C10
2

(b) A10 B10  C10 A10 
n 2 (c) 0 (d) C10 – B10
 n  2
(c) 2   (d)  
 r   r  8. Coefficient of x 11 in the expansion of
2 4 3 7 4 12
(1 + x ) (1 + x ) (1 + x ) is (2014)
2. In the binomial expansion of (a – b)n, n  5 the sum of the
5th and 6th terms is zero. Then a/b equals : (2001) (a) 1051 (b) 1106
(c) 1113 (d) 1120

n 5 n4
(a) (b)
6 5 Numerical Value Type Questions
5 6 9. The coefficient of three consecutive terms (1 + x)n+5 are in

(c) (d)
n4 n 5 the ratio 5 : 10 : 14. Then, n is equal to (2013)
m
10  20  p
3. The sum     , where    0 if p > q, is maximum (1 + x) (1 + x2) (1 + x3) … (1 + x100) is (2015)
i  0  i  m  i  q
11. Let m be the smallest positive integer such that the
when m is : (2002)
coefficient of x2 in the expansion of
(a) 5 (b) 10
(1 + x)2 + (1 + x)3 +…..+ (1 + x)49 + (1 + mx)50 is (3n + 1) 51C3
(c) 15 (d) 20
for some positive integer n. Then the value of n is(2016)
4. Coefficient of t24 in (1 + t2)12 (1 + t12) (1 + t24) is : (2003)
12. Let X = (10C1)2 + 2(10C2)2 + 3(10C3)2 +..... + 10(10C10)2, where
(a) 12C6 + 3 (b) 12C6 + 1
10
Cr , r  {1, 2, ..., 10} denote binomial coefficients. Then,
(c) 12C6 (d) 12C6 + 2
5. If n – 1Cr = (k2 – 3) nCr + 1, then k belong to : (2004) 1
the value of X is ______ (2018)
1430
(a) (,  2] (b) [2, )
(c)   3, 3  (d) ( 3, 2]
 n k 
n
n C k2
k

 
13. Suppose det  k n 0 k o
n   0 holds for some
n n C 3k
 30  30   30  30   30  30    Ck k  k 
6.         ....     is equal to  k 0 k 0 
 0  10   1  11   20  30 
(2005)
n n
Ck
30
(a) C11 60
(b) C10 positive integer n. Then  k 1
k 0
equals. (2019)
30 65
(c) C10 (d) C55
14. Let a and b be two nonzero real number. If the coefficient Text
4 15. For any positive integers m, n (with n > m),

70
of x5 in the expansion of  ax 2   is equal to the

 27bx  n
let    n C m . Prove that
m
coefficient of x –5 is equal to the coefficient of
 n   n 1   n  2   m   n 1 
     ...     
7
 1  
 ax  2  , then the value of 2b is (2023) m
   m   m   m   m  1
 bx 
Hence, or otherwise, prove that
 n   n 1  n  2   m   n 2 
   2   3   ....   n  m 1     
m  m   m  m m 2
(2000)
16. Prove that
 n  n   n  n 1  k 2  n  n  2 
2 k     2k 1     2     .....
 0  k   1  k 1   2  k  2 
 n  n  k   n 
 (1) k     (2003)
 k  0   k 
BINOMIAL THEOREM

12
Chapter 12 104
NOTES :
1. FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES OF COUNTING
1. Let r and n be positive integers such that l  r  n. Then,
1.1 Fundamental Principle of Multiplication
the number of all permutations of n distinct items or
objects taken r at a time, is

If an event can occur in m different ways following which
n
another event can occur in n different ways following which Pr = nCr × r !
another event can occur in p different ways. Then the total

Proof : Total ways = n(n – 1)(n – 2) . . . (n  r  1)
number of ways of simultaneous happening of all these
events in a definite order is m × n × p.
1.2 Fundamental Principle of Addition n(n  1)(n  2)...(n  r  1)(n  r)!


(n  r)!
If there are two jobs such that they can be performed
independently in m and n ways respectively, then either of
n!
the two jobs can be performed in (m + n) ways. 
(n  r )!
2. SOME BASIC ARRANGEMENTS AND SELECTIONS

= nPr.
2.1 Combinations So, the total no. of arrangements (permutations) of n-
distinct items, taking r at a time is nPr or P(n, r).

Each of the different selections made by taking some or all
2. The number of all permutations (arrangements) of n
of a number of distinct objects or items, irrespective of their
distinct objects taken all at a time is n!.
arrangements or order in which they are placed, is called a
combination. 3. The number of ways of selecting r items or objects from
a group of n distinct items or objects, is
2.2 Permutations
n!
Each of the different arrangements which can be made by n Cr .
(n  r )! r!
taking some or all of a number of distinct objects is called a
permutation.
SCAN CODE
105
3. GEOMETRIC APPLICATIONS OF nCr 4. PERMUTATIONS UNDER CERTAIN CONDITIONS

The number of all permutations (arrangements) of n different
(i) Out of n non-concurrent and non-parallel straight lines,
objects taken r at a time :
points of intersection are nC2.
(i) When a particular object is to be always included in
(ii) Out of ‘n’ points the number of straight lines are (when
each arrangement, is n–1Cr–1 × r ! .
n
no three are collinear) C2 .
(ii) When a particular object is never taken in each
(iii) If out of n points m are collinear, then No. of straight
arrangement, is n – 1Cr × r!.
n m
lines = C2 – C2 + 1
(iv) In a polygon total number of diagonals out of n points 5. DIVISION OF OBJECTS INTO GROUPS
n (n  3) 5.1 Division of items into groups of unequal sizes

(no three are collinear) = nC2 – n  .
2
1. The number of ways in which (m + n) distinct items can
(v) Number of triangles formed from n points is nC3 . be divided into two unequal groups containing
(when no three points are collinear)
 m  n  !.
(vi) Number of triangles out of n points in which m are m and n items, is
m!n!
n m
collinear, is C3 – C3 .
2. The number of ways in which (m+ n+ p) items can be
(vii) Number of triangles that can be formed out of n points
(when none of the side is common to the sides of divided into unequal groups containing m, n, p items, is
polygon), is nC3 – nC1 – nC1 . n – 4C1

m+n+p
 m  n  p  !.
(viii) Number of parallelograms in two systems of parallel Cm . n + pCm = m!n ! p!
st nd
lines (when 1 set contains m parallel lines and 2 set
contains n parallel lines), is = nC2 × mC2 3. The number of ways to distribute (m + n+ p) items among
(ix) Number of squares in two system of perpendicular 3 persons in the groups containing m, n and p items
parallel lines (when 1st set contains m equally spaced = (No. of ways to divide) × (No. of groups)!
nd
parallel lines and 2 set contains n same spaced parallel
lines) 
 m  n  p !  3!.
m!n!p!
m 1
  (m  r)(n  r); (m  n )
r 1
5.2 Division of Objects into groups of equal size
(x) The maximum number of parts into which a plane is cut The number of ways in which mn different objects can be
divided equally into m groups, each containing n objects
n2  n  2
by n lines is and the order of the groups is not important, is
2
SCAN CODE
106
4. Suppose there are r things to be arranged, allowing

 mn  !  1
  repetitions. Let further pl, p2, ...., pr be the integers such
 n!m  m !
 
that the first object occurs exactly p1 times, the second
occurs exactly p2 times subject, etc. Then the total

The number of ways in which mn different items can be
number of permutations of these r objects to the above
divided equally into m groups, each containing n objects
condition, is
and the order of groups is important, is
(p1  p 2  ...  p r )!
  mn  ! 1   mn  ! .
   m!  p!p 2 !p 3 !....p r !
  n!m m!   n!m
 
7. DISTRIBUTION OF ALIKE OBJECTS

6. PERMUTATIONS OF ALIKE OBJECTS (i) The total number of ways of dividing n identical items
among r persons, each one of whom, can receive 0, 1,
1. The number of mutually distinguishable permutations 2, or more items ( n), is n + r – 1Cr – 1.
of n things, taken all at a time, of which p are alike of one OR
kind, q alike of second kind such that p + q = n, is The total number of ways of dividing n identical objects
into r groups, if blank groups are allowed, is n + r – 1Cr – 1.
n! (ii) The total number of ways of dividing n identical items

p!q! among r persons, each of whom, receives at least one
item is n – 1Cr – 1.
OR
2. The number of permutations of n things, of which p are
The number of ways in which n identical items can be
alike of one kind, q are alike of second kind and remaining divided into r groups such that blank groups are not
allowed, is n – 1Cr – 1.
n! (iii) The number of ways in which n identical items can be
all are distinct, is . Here p + q  n
p!q!
divided into r groups so that no group contains less
than k items and more than m (m < k) is
3. The number of permutations of n things, of which p1 are The coefficient of xn in the expansion of
alike of one kind; p2 are alike of second kind; p3 are alike (xm + xm + 1 + . . . . xk)r
of third kind; ..... ; pr are alike of rth kind such that

8. NO. OF INTEGRAL SOLUTIONS OF LINEAR
EQUATIONS AND INEQUATIONS
n!
p1 + p2 + . . . + pr = n, is .
p1 !p2 !p3 !....pr !
Consider the eqn. x1 + x2 + x3 + x4 + . . . .+ xr = n ...(i)
where x1, x2,. . . . ., xr and n are non–negative integers.
SCAN CODE
107
This equation may be interpreted as that n identical objects 3. The total number of ways of selecting zero or more items
are to be divided into r groups. from a group of n identical items is (n + 1).
1. The total no. of non-negative integral solutions of the
equation x1 + x2 + ....+ xr = n is n + r –1Cr –1. 4. The total number of selections of some or all out of
2. The total number of solutions of the same equation in p + q + r items where p are alike of one kind, q are alike of
n–1
the set N of natural numbers is Cr– 1. second kind and rest are alike of third kind, is
3. In order to solve inequations of the form [(p + 1)(q + 1)(r+ 1)]– 1.
x1 + x2 + . . . . .+ xm  n
5. The total number of ways of selecting one or more items
we introduce a dummy (artificial) variable xm + 1 such
from p identical items of one kind; q identical items of
that x1 +x2 + . . . . + xm + xm + 1 = n, where xm + 1  0.
second kind; r identical items of third kind and n different
The no. of solutions of this equation are same as the no. of
items, is (p + 1) (q + 1)(r + 1) 2n – 1
solutions of in Eq. (i).
9. CIRCULAR PERMUTATIONS 11. THE NUMBER OF DIVISORS AND THE SUM OF

THE DIVISORS OF A GIVEN NATURAL NUMBER
1. The number of circular permutations of n distinct objects
is (n – l)!.
n n n n
Let N  p11 .p22 .p33 .....pk k ...(1)
2. If anti-clockwise and clockwise order of arrangements are
not distinct then the number of circular permutations of n
where pl, p2, . . . . , pk are distinct prime numbers and
distinct items is 1/2 {(n – 1)!}
n1, n2,....,nk are positive integers.
e.g., arrangements of beads in a necklace, arrangements
of flowers in a garland etc. 1. Total number of divisors of N = (n1 + 1)(n2 + 1) . . .(nk + 1).
2. This includes 1 and n as divisors. Therefore, number of

10. SELECTION OF ONE OR MORE OBJECTS divisors other than 1 and n, is
(n1 + 1)(n2 + 1)(n3 + 1). . . . .(nk + 1) – 2.

1. The number of ways of selecting one or more items from a
3. The sum of all divisors of (1) is given by
group of n distinct items is 2n – 1.
Proof : Out of n items, 1 item can be selected in nCl ways;  p n 1 1  1  p n 2 1  1  p n 3 1  1  p n k 1  1 
3
n  1 
2
 ....
k
.
2 items can be selected in C2 ways; 3 items can be p  1 p  1 p  1
 1  2  3   p k  1 
selected in nC3 ways and so on......
Hence, the required number of ways

12. DEARRANGEMENTS
= nC1 + nC2 + nC3 + . . . . + nCn
= (nC0 + nC1 + nC2 + . . . . + nCn) – nC0 If n distinct objects are arranged in a row, then the no. of
ways in which they can be dearranged so that none of them
= 2n – 1.
occupies its original place, is
2. The number of ways of selecting r items out of n identical
items is 1 .
SCAN CODE
108
  
 1 1 1 1 1 13.3 Let n be a positive integer and n  p1 1 p2 2 ... p k k be a prime
n! 1      ....   1n 
 1! 2! 3! 4! n!
decomposition of n. Then the number of distinct ordered
and it is denoted by D (n). pairs of positive integers (p, q), such that the least common
multiple of p and q is n, is (21 + 1) (22 + 1) ... (2k + 1)
If r (0  r  n) objects occupy the places assigned to them
i.e., their original places and none of the remaining (n - r) 13.4 For any positive integer r, let d r be the number of
objects occupies its original places, then the no. of such derangements of an r-element set. Then
ways, is
n
D(n – r) = nCr . D(n – r) 1   n Cr d r  n !
r 1
 1 1 1 nr 1  for any integer n > 0 or

= nCr . (n – r) ! 1  1!  2!  3!  ....   1 (n  r )!.
 
n
n
 Cr d r  n !  where d 0  1
13.SOME IMPORTANT RESULT OF PERMUTATION r 0
AND COMBINATION
n 1
13.1 Let X and Y be non-empty finite sets, |X| = m and |Y| = n.
and d 0  n !  n Cr d r
Then r 0
1. The number of functions from Y into X is mn.
2. The number of injections (one-one functions) from Y

into X is zero it m < n, and mCn .n! (= mPn) if m n.
3. The number of bijections of Y onto X is zero if m n,

and m! if m = n.
13.2 For any positive integers m and r such that m  r, let m(r) be
the number of surjections of an m-element set onto an r-
r
r
element set. Then  C s m ( s )  r m
s 1
SCAN CODE
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 109

The fundamental principle of counting 8. The number of all four digit numbers is equal to
(a) 9999 (b) 9000
1. There are 4 letter boxes in a post office. In how many ways 4
can a man post 8 distinct letters ?
9. The number of all four digits numbers with distinct digits is
(a) 4 × 8 (b) 84
(a) 9×10×10×10 (b) 10P4
(c) 48 (d) P (8, 4)
(c) 9 × 9P3 (d) none of these
2. In an examination there are three multiple choice questions
and each question has 4 choices out of which only one is 10. The number of even numbers that can be formed by using
correct. If all the questions are compulsory, then number of the digits 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 taken all at a time (without repetition)
ways in which a student can fail to get all answers correct, is
is (a) 120 (b) 48
(a) 11 (b) 12 (c) 1250 (d) none of these
(c) 27 (d) 63 11. The number of all three digit numbers having no digit as 5 is
3. Every one of the 5 available lamps can be switched on to (a) 252 (b) 225
illuminate certain Hall. The total number of ways in which
the hall can be illuminated, is :
12. All possible three digits even numbers which can be formed
(a) 32 (b) 31
with the condition that if 5 is one of the digit, then 7 is the
(c) 5 (d) 5! next digit is :
4. A new flag is to be designed with six vertical strips using (a) 5 (b) 325
some or all of the colours yellow, green, blue and red. Then,
(c) 345 (d) 365
the number of ways this can be done such that no two
adjacent strips have the same colour is 13. How many of the 900 three digit numbers have at least one
even digit ?
(a) 12 × 81 (b) 16 × 192
(a) 775 (b) 875
(c) 20 × 125 (d) 24 × 216
(c) 450 (d) 750
5. 4 buses run between Bhopal and Gwalior. If a man goes
from Gwalior to Bhopal by a bus and comes back to Gwalior 14. The number of six digit numbers that can be formed from the
by another bus, then the total possible ways are digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 & 7 so that digits do not repeat and the
terminal digits are even is :
(a) 12 (b) 16
(a) 144 (b) 72
(c) 4 (d) 8
(c) 288 (d) 720
Arrangement & selection for different objects
15. An eight digit number divisible by 9 is to be formed using
digits from 0 to 9 without repeating the digits. The number
6. How many numbers lying between 500 and 600 can be
of ways in which this can be done is:
formed with the help of the digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 when the
digits are not to be repeated (a) 72  7  (b) 18  7 
(a) 20 (b) 40
(c) 60 (d) 80 (c) 40  7  (d) 36  7 
7. The number of 3 digit odd numbers, that can be formed by 16. 8-digit numbers are formed using the digits 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 4,
using the digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 when the repetition is allowed, 4. The number of such numbers in which the odd digits do
is not occupy odd places, is :
(a) 60 (b) 108 (a) 160 (b) 120
(c) 36 (d) 30 (c) 60 (d) 48
17. Two women and some men participated in a chess 24. There are five different green dyes, four different blue dyes
tournament in which every participant played two games and three different red dyes. The total number of
with each of the other participants. If the number of games combinations of dyes that can be chosen taking at least one
that the men played between themselves exceeds the number green and one blue dye is
of games that the men played with the women by 66, then 12
(a) 3255 (b) 2
the number of men who participated in the tournament lies
in the interval: (c) 3720 (d) none of these
(a) [8, 9] (b) [10, 12) 25. Given 6 different toys of red colour, 5 different toys of blue
colour and 4 different toys of green colour. Combination of
(c) (11, 13] (d) (14, 17)
toys that can be chosen taking at least one red and one blue
18. On the occasion of Deepawali festival each student of a toys are :
class sends greeting cards to the others. If there are 20
students in the class, then the total number of greeting (a) 31258 (b) 31248
cards exchanged by the students is (c) 31268 (d) None of these
(a) 20
C2 (b) 2 .20 C 2 26. A father with 8 children takes them 3 at a time to the
Zoological gardens, as often as he can without taking the
(c) 2.20 P2 (d) None of these same 3 children together more than once. The number of
times he will go to the garden is
19. In a touring cricket team, there are 16 players in all including
5 bowlers and 2 wicket-keepers. How many teams of 11 (a) 336 (b) 112
players from these, can be chosen, so as to include three (c) 56 (d) None of these
bowlers and one wicket-keeper 27. In how many ways can two balls of the same colour be
(a) 650 (b) 720 selected out of 4 distinct black and 3 distinct white balls
(c) 750 (d) 800 (a) 5 (b) 6
20. Three couples (husband and wife) decide to form a (c) 9 (d) 8
committee of three members. The number of different
28. If the letters of the word SACHIN are arranged in all possible
committee that can be formed in which no couple finds a
ways and these words are written out as in dictionary, then
place is :
the word SACHIN appears at serial number
(a) 60 (b) 12
(a) 602 (b) 603
(c) 27 (d) 8
(c) 600 (d) 601
21. 5 Indian and 5 American couples meet at a party and shake
29. If the letters of the word ‘MOTHER’ are written in all possible
hands. If no wife shakes hands with her own husband and
no Indian wife shakes hands with a male, then the number orders and these words are written out as in a dictionary,
of hand shakes that takes place in the party is : find the rank of the word ‘MOTHER’.
(a) 95 (b) 110 (a) 307 (b) 308
(c) 135 (d) 150 (c) 309 (d) 120
22. A rack has 5 different pairs of shoes. The number of ways in 30. The letters of the word RANDOM are written in all possible
which 4 shoes can be chosen from it so that there will be no orders and these words are written out as in a dictionary
complete pair is then the rank of the word RANDOM is
(a) 1920 (b) 200 (a) 614 (b) 615
(c) 110 (d) 80 (c) 613 (d) 616
23. In how many ways can six boys and five girls stand in a row 31. If all permutations of the letters of the word AGAIN are
if all the girls are to stand together but the boys cannot all arranged as in dictionary, then fiftieth word is
stand together ? (a) NAAGI (b) NAGAI
(a) 172,800 (b) 432,000 (c) NAAIG (d) NAIAG
(c) 86,400 (d) None of these
32. If all the letters of the word “QUEUE” are arranged in all 40. Out of 10 points in a plane 6 are in a straight line. The
possible manner as they are in a dictionary, then the rank of number of triangles formed by joining these points are
the word QUEUE is : (a) 100 (b) 150
th th
(a) 15 (b) 16
th th
(c) 17 (d) 18
41. The number of straight lines that can be formed by joining
33. The letters of word “RADHIKA” are permuted and arranged 20 points no three of which are in the same straight line
in alphabetical order as in English dictionary. The number except 4 of them which are in the same line
of words the appear before the word “RADHIKA” is :
(a) 183 (b) 186
(a) 2193 (b) 2195
(c) 197 (d) 185
(c) 2119 (d) 2192
42. There are n distinct points on the circumference of a circle.
Geometrical counting problems The number of pentagons that can be formed with these
points as vertices is equal to the number of possible
34. Number of rectangles in figure shown which are not squares triangles. Then the value of n is
is :
(a) 7 (b) 8
(c) 15 (d) 30
Arrangement & selection of like objects
43. How many different words can be formed by jumbling the

letters in the word MISSISSIPPI in which no two S are
adjacent ?
(a) 159 (b) 160 (a) 7.6C4 . 8C4 (b) 8. 6C4 . 7C4
(c) 161 (d) None of these (c) 6.7. 8C4 (d) 6.8. 7C4
35. There are n points on a circle. The number of straight lines 44. The number of all possible different arrangements of the
formed by joining them is equal to word “BANANA” is
(a) nC2 (b) nP2
(a) 6 (b) 6  2  3
(c) nC2 – 1 (d) none of these
36. Let Tn be the number of all possible triangles formed by 6
joining vertices of an n-sided regular polygon. If (c) 2 3 (d) none of these
Tn + 1 – Tn = 10, then the value of n is
45. The total number of ways of arranging the letters AAAA
(a) 7 (b) 5
BBB CC D E F in a row such that letters C are separated from
(c) 10 (d) 8 one another is
37. There are 10 points in a plane, out of these 6 are collinear. If (a) 2772000 (b) 1386000
N is the number of traingles formed by joining these points,
then
(a) N > 190 (b) N  100 46. A library has ‘a’ copies of one book, ‘b’ copies of each of
two books, ‘c’ copies of each of three books, and single
(c) 100 < N  140 (d) 140 < N  190
copy each of ‘d’ books. The total number of ways in which
38. Number of diagonals of a convex hexagon is these books can be arranged in a row is
(a) 3 (b) 6
(a  b  c  d)! (a  2b  3c  d)!
(c) 9 (d) 12 (a) (b) 2 3
a!b!c! a! b!  c!
39. The interior angles of a regular polygon measure 150° each.
The number of diagonals of the polygon is
(a  2b  3c  d)!
(a) 35 (b) 44 (c) (d) none of these
a!b!c!
(c) 54 (d) 78
47. A question paper on mathematics consists of twelve 54. The number of ways in which 52 cards can be divided into 4
questions divided into three parts. A, B and C, each sets, three of them having 17 cards each and the fourth one
containing four questions. In how many ways can an having just one card
examinee answer five questions, selecting atleast one from
each part. 52 ! 52 !
(a) (b)
(a) 624 (b) 208 (17!)3 (17!)3 3!

51! 51!
48. Number of ways in which 4 boys and 2 girls (all are of (c) (d)
(17!)3 (17!)3 3!
different heights) can be arranged in a line so that boys as
well as girls among themselves are in decreasing order of 55. The number of ways in which 12 balls can be divided
height (from left to right), is : between two friends, one receiving 8 and the other 4, is
(a) 1 (b) 6!
12! 12!2!
(c) 15 (d) None of these (a) (b)
8!4! 8!4!
49. The total number of selections of atleast one fruit which can
be made from 3 bananas, 4 apples and 2 oranges is 12!
(a) 39 (b) 315 8!4!2!
Distribution of alike objects
50. The total number of different combinations of one or more
letters which can be made from the letters of the word 56. The number of ways of distributing 8 identical balls in 3
‘MISSISSIPPI’ is distinct boxes, so that none of the boxes is empty, is
(a) 150 (b) 148 (a) 5 (b) 21
(c) 149 (d) None of these (c) 38 (d) 8C3
Distribution of different objects 57. The total number of ways in which 11 identical apples can
be distributed among 6 children is that at least one apple is
51. The set S = {1, 2, 3,..., 12} is to be partitioned into three given to each child
sets A, B, C of equal size. Thus, A B  C = S, A B =
(a) 252 (b) 462
B C = A  C = . The number of ways to partition S is
(a) 12!/3!(4!)3 (b) 12!/3!(3!)4 58. If a,b,c,d are odd natural numbers such that a + b + c + d = 20,
(c) 12!/(4!)3 (d) 12!/(3!)4 then the number of values of (a, b, c, d) is :
52. In an election three districts are to be canvassed by 2, 3 and (a) 165 (b) 455
5 men respectively. If 10 men volunteer, the number of ways (c) 310 (d) 255
they can be alloted to the different districts is : 59. Number of ways in which 25 identical balls can be distributed
10! 10! among Ram, shyam, Sunder and Ghanshyam such that at
(a) 2! 3! 5! (b) 2! 5! least 1, 2, 3, and 4 balls are given to Ram, Shyam, Sunder and
Ghanshyam respectively, is :
10! 10! (a) 18 C4 (b) 28
C3
(c) 2! 2 5! (d) 2! 2 3! 5!
   
24 18
(c) C3 (d) C3
53. The number of ways to give 16 different things to three
2
persons A, B, C so that B gets 1 more than A and C gets 2 60. The total number of ways in which n number of identical
more than B, is : balls can be put in n numbered boxed (1, 2, 3, ......... n) such
th
that i box contains at least i number of balls, is :
16!
(a) (b) 4!5!7! n2 n 2 1
4!5!7! (a) C n 1 (b) Cn 1
16! n 2  n 2
(c) (d) 3!5!8! (c) (d) None of these
3!5!8! 2 C n 1

1. There are 15 players in a cricket team, out of which 6 are
f  A   15 is equal to _______ ?
bowlers, 7 are batsmen and 2 are wicketkeepers. The
number of ways, a team of 11 players be selected from (25-07-2021/Shift-1)
them so as to include at least 4 bowlers, 5 batsmen and 1
9. Let P1 , P2 ...., P15 be 15 points on a circle. The number of
wicketkeeper, is _________. (20-07-2021/Shift-1)
distinct triangles formed by points Pi , p j , Pk such that
20
1 A
2. For k  N, let  k , i  j  k  15, is (01-09-2021/Shift-2)
    1   2  .....    20  k  0   k
(a) 12 (b) 419
2
 A  A15  (c) 455 (d) 443
where   0. Then then value of 100  14  is
 A13  10. Two squares are chosen at random on a chessboard (see
figure). The probability that they have a side in common is
equal to ______? (20-07-2021/Shift-2)
3. There are 5 students in class 10, 6 students in class 11 and
8 students in class 12. If the number of ways, in which 10
students can be selected from them so as to include at
least 2 students from each class and at most 5 students
from the total 11 students of class 10 and 11 is 100 k, then
k is equal to______ ? (25-07-2021/Shift-1)
4. Let n be a non-negative integer. Then the number of
divisors of the form “ 4n  1 ” of the number
10 11 13
10  . 11 . 13  is equal to _____.
(27-07-2021/Shift-2)
(01-09-2021/Shift-2)
5. Let A  0,1, 2,3, 4,5, 6, 7 . Then the number of bijective
1 1
functions f : A  A such that f 1  f  2   3  f  3 is (a) (b)
18 7
equal to ______. (22-07-2021/Shift-2)
6. If the digits are not allowed to repeat in any number formed 1 2
(c) (d)
by using the digits 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, then the number of all 9 7
numbers greater than 10,000 is equal to _______. 11. All the arrangements, with or without meaning, of the word
(22-07-2021/Shift-2) FARMER are written excluding any word that has two R
appearing together. The arrangements are listed serially in
7. If n Pr  n Pr 1 and n C r  n C r 1 , then the value of r is equal
the alphabetic order as in the English dictionary. Then the
to (25-07-2021/Shift-2) serial number of the word FARMER in this list is _______
(a) 3 (b) 1 (01-09-2021/Shift-2)
(c) 4 (d) 2 12. A number is called a palindrome if it reads the same
backward as well as forward. For example 285582 is a six
 a b 
8. Let M   A    : a, b, c, d  3, 2, 1, 0 Define digit palindrome. The number of six digit palindromes,
 c d  which are divisible by 55, is______.
f : M  Z, as f  A   det  A  for all A  M, where Z is (27-08-2021/Shift-1)
set of all integers. Then the number of A  M such that

23. The total number of two digit numbers 'n', such that
13. If 1 P1  2. 2 P2  3. 3 P3  ........15.15 P15  q p r  s, 0  s  1,
3n  7n is a multiple of 10, is: (25-02-2021/Shift-2)
q s
then C r  s is equal to ______. (26-08-2021/Shift-1) 24. The students S1, S2,....,S10 are to be divided into 3 groups.
14. The number of three-digit even numbers, formed by the A, B and C such that each group has at least one student
and the group C has at most 3 students. Then the total
digits 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 if the repetition of digits is not
number of possibilities of forming such groups is ____.
allowed, is ______. (26-08-2021/Shift-1) (24-02-2021/Shift-2)
15. Let S  1, 2,3, 4,5, 6,9 . Then the number of elements in 25. A scientific committee is to be formed from 6 Indians and
8 foreigners, which includes at least 2 Indians and double
the set T  {A  S : A   and the sum of all the elements the number of foreigners as Indians. Then the number of
of A is not a multiple of 3} is ______. ways the committee can be formed is
(27-08-2021/Shift-2) (24-02-2021/Shift-1)
16. The number of six letter words (with or without meaning), (a) 575 (b) 1050
formed using all the letters of the word 'VOWELS', so that
(c) 1625 (d) 560
all the consonants never come together, is ______ ?
26. The sum of all the 4-digit distinct numbers that can be
(31-08-2021/Shift-1) formed with the digits 1, 2, 2 and 3 is :
17. The number of 4-digit numbers which are neither multiple
(18-03-2021/Shift-1)
of 7 nor multiple of 3 is______ (31-08-2021/Shift-2)
(a) 122234 (b) 22264
18. A natural number has prime factorization given by
(c) 122664 (d) 26664
n  2 x 3y 5z , where y and z are such that y  z  5 and
27. The number of times the digit 3 will be written when listing
5 the integers from 1 to 1000 is .................... .
y 1  z 1  , y  z . Then the number of odd divisors of
6 (18-03-2021/Shift-1)
n, including 1, is: (26-02-2021/Shift-2) 28. Consider a rectangle ABCD having 5, 7, 6, 9 points in the
(a) 6 (b) 6x interior of the line segments AB, CD, BC, DA respectively.
Let ? be the number of triangles having these points from
(c) 11 (d) 12
different sides as vertices and ? be the number of
19. The total number of 4-digit numbers whose greatest quadrilaterals having these points from different sides as
common divisor with 18 is 3, is _____
vertices. Then   –   is equal to :
(26-02-2021/Shift-2)
(16-03-2021/Shift-2)
20. The number of seven digit integers with sum of the digits
equal to 10 and formed by using the digits 1, 2 and 3 only (a) 795 (b) 1173
is : (26-02-2021/Shift-1) (c) 1890 (d) 717
(a) 35 (b) 82 29. Team 'A' consists of 7 boys and n girls and Team ‘B’ has 4
(c) 77 (d) 42 boys and 6 girls. If a total of 52 single matches can be
arranged between these two teams when a boy plays
21. The total number of positive integral solutions  x, y, z  against a boy and a girl plays against a girl, then n is equal
to : (17-03-2021/Shift-1)
such that xyz  24 is: (25-02-2021/Shift-1)
(a) 4 (b) 5
(a) 45 (b) 36
(c) 2 (d) 6
(c) 24 (d) 30
30. If the sides AB, BC and CA of a triangle ABC have 3, 5 and
22. The total number of numbers, lying between 100 and 1000
6 interior points respectively, then the total number of
that can be formed with the digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, if the repetition
triangles that can be constructed using these points as
of digits is not allowed and numbers are divisible by either
vertices, is equal to : (17-03-2021/Shift-2)
3 or 5, is _____. (25-02-2021/Shift-1)
(a) 360 (b) 364
(c) 240 (d) 333
PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 115
31. In an examination, there are 5 multiple choice 41. The total number of four digit numbers such that each
questions with 3 choices, out of which exactly one is of the first three digits is divisible by the last digit, is
correct. There are 3 marks for each correct answer, –2 equal to ................ . (JEE Main 2022)
marks for each wrong answer and 0 mark if the 42. The letters of the word ‘MANKIND’ are written in all
question is not attempted. Then, the number of ways a possible orders and arranged in serial order as in an
student appearing in the examination gets 5 marks is English dictionary. Then the serial number of the word
.......... . (JEE Main 2022) ‘MANKIND’ is ……………. . (JEE Main 2022)
32. The number of 7-digit numbers which are multiples of 43. The number of 5-digit natural numbers, such that the
11 and are formed using all the digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7 product of their digits is 36, is (JEE Main 2022)
and 9 is ................ . (JEE Main 2022) 44. Numbers are to be formed between 1000 and 3000,
which are divisible by 4, using the digits 1,2,3,4,5 and
33. The number of 3-digit odd numbers, whose sum of 6 without repetition of digits. Then the total number of
digits is a multiple of 7, is ..................... . such numbers is …………… . (JEE Main 2022)
(JEE Main 2022)
34. The total number of three-digit numbers, with one 45. Let S be the set of all passwords which are six to eight
digit repeated exactly two times, is characters long, where each character is either an
(JEE Main 2022) alphabet from {A, B, C, D, E} or a number from
35. There are ten boys B1 , B2 ,.... B10 and five girls {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} with the repetition of characters allowed.
G1 , G2 ,...., G5 in a class. Then the number of ways of If the number of passwords in S whose at least one
forming a group consisting of three boys and three character is a number from {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} is   56 ,
girls, if both B1 and B2 together should not be the then  is equal to ………… . (JEE Main 2022)
members of a group, is.... (JEE Main 2022) 46. A class contains b boys and g girls. If the number of
36. The total number of 3-digit numbers, whose greatest ways of selecting 3 boys and 2 girls from the class is
common divisor with 36 is 2, is ................. . 168, then b  3 is equal to (JEE Main 2022)
(JEE Main 2022) 47. The number of natural numbers lying between 1012
37. If and 23421 that can be formed using the digits 2, 3, 4,
m 60 5, 6 (repetition of digits is not allowed) and divisible
 40
     
C0  41 C1  42 C2  ......  60 C20  n
C20 , by 55 is ………… . (JEE Main 2022)
m and n are coprime, then m + n is equal to ............... . 31 30   60!
(JEE Main 2022)
48.     
If  31 Ck 31 Ck 1   30 Ck 30 Ck 1  
 30! 31!
,
k 1 k 1
38. The number of ways, 16 identical cubes, of which 11
where   R , then the value of 16 is equal to
are blue and rest are red, can be placed in a row so that
(JEE Main 2022)
between any two red cubes there should be at least 2
(a) 1411 (b) 1320
blue cubes, is ………….. . (JEE Main 2022)
(c) 1615 (d) 1855
39. Let A be a matrix of order 2  2 , whose entries are
49. The total number of 5-digit numbers, formed by using
from the set {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5}. If the sum of all the
the digits 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7 without repetition, which are
entries of A is a prime number p , 2  p  8 , then the
multiple of 6, is (JEE Main 2022)
number of such matrices A is : (JEE Main 2022)
(a) 36 (b) 48
40. Let b1 b2 b3 b4 be a 4-element permutation with
(c) 60 (d) 72
bi  {1, 2, 3, ......., 100} for 1  i  4 and bi  bj for 50. The number of ways to distribute 30 identical candies
among four children C1 , C2 , C3 and C4 so that C2
i  j , such that either b1 , b2 , b3 are consecutive
receives atleast 4 and atmost 7 candies, C3 receives
integers or b2 , b3 , b4 are consecutive integers. Then the atleast 2 and atmost 6 candies, is equal to
(JEE Main 2022)
number of such permutations b1 b2 b3 b4 is equal to (a) 205 (b) 615
.................. . (JEE Main 2022) (c) 540 (d) 430
51. Let R be a relation from the set 1, 2,3,....., 60 to itself 60. Suppose Anil’s mother wants to give 5 whole fruits to
Anil from a basket of 7 red apples, 5 white apples and
such that
8 oranges. If in the selected 5 fruits, at least 2 orange,
R   a, b  : b  pq , where p, q  3 are prime numbers
at least one red apple and at least one white apple must
. Then, the number of elements in R is: be given, then the number of ways, Anil’s mother can
(JEE Main 2022) offer 5 fruits to Anil is ____. (JEE Main 2023)
(a) 600 (b) 660 61. If all the six digit numbers x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 with
(c) 540 (d) 720
0  x1  x2  x3  x4  x5  x6 are arranged in the
52. The number of integers, greater than 7000 that can be
formed, using the digits 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 without repetition, increasing order, then the sum of the digits in the
is (JEE Main 2023) 72th number is _____. (JEE Main 2023)
(a) 120 (b) 168 62. Five digit numbers are formed using the digits 1, 2, 3,
(c) 220 (d) 48 5, 7 with repetitions and are written in descending
53. If order with serial numbers. For example, the number
77777 has serial number 1. Then the serial number of
2 2 2 2  60!
 30
    
C1  2 30 C2  3 30 C3  ...  30 30 C30    2
, 35337 is_____. (JEE Main 2023)
 30! 63. The total number of 4-digit numbers whose greatest
then  is equal to (JEE Main 2023) common divisor with 54 is 2, is _____.
(a) 30 (b) 60 (JEE Main 2023)
(c) 15 (d) 10 64. Number of 4–digit numbers (the repetition of digits is
54. The number of numbers, strictly between 5000 and allowed) which are made using the digits 1, 2, 3 and 5,
10000 can be formed using the digits 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 and are divisible by 15, is equal to _____
without repetition, is (JEE Main 2023) (JEE Main 2023)
(a) 6 (b) 12 65. The number of seven digits odd numbers, that can be
(c) 120 (d) 72 formed using all seven digits 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 5 is ____.
6
51 k (JEE Main 2023)
55. 
k 0
C3 is equal to (JEE Main 2023)
66. Let 5 digit numbers be constructed using the digits 0,
(a) 51
C4  45C4 (b) 51
C3  45C3 2, 3, 4, 7, 9 with repetition allowed, and are arranged
52
in ascending order with serial numbers. Then the serial
(c) C4  45C4 (d) 52
C3  45C3 number of the number 42923 is _____.
56. The letters of the word OUGHT are written in all (JEE Main 2023)
possible ways and these words are arranged as in a 67. If 2 n 1
Pn 1 : 2 n 1 Pn  11: 21 , then n 2  n  15 is equal to:
dictionary, in a series. Then the serial number of the
(JEE Main 2023)
word TOUGH is: (JEE Main 2023)
(a) 89 (b) 84 68. Let A   aij  , aij  Z   0, 4  ,1  i , j  2 . The number
(c) 86 (d) 79 of matrices A such that the sum of all entries is a prime
57. The number of 9 digit numbers, that can be formed number p   2,13 is _____. (JEE Main 2023)
using all the digits of the number 123412341 so that
69. The number of words, with or without meaning, that
the even digits occupy only even places, is___
can be formed using all the letters of the word
(JEE Main 2023)
ASSASSINATION so that the vowels occur together,
58. A boy needs to select five courses from 12 available
is (JEE Main 2023)
courses, out of which 5 courses are language courses.
70. The total number of six digit numbers, formed using
If he can choose at most two language courses, then
the digits 4,5,9 only and divisible by 6 , is
the number of ways he can choose five courses is
(JEE Main 2023)
(JEE Main 2023)
71. Number of integral solutions to the equation
59. Let x and y be distinct integers where 1  x  25
x  y  z  21 , where x  1, y  3, z  4 , is equal to
and 1  y  25 . Then, the number of ways of choosing
(JEE Main 2023)
x and y , such that x  y is divisible by 5, is _____.
(JEE Main 2023)
72. All the letters of the word PUBLIC are written in all 80. Let A  1,3, 4, 6,9 and B  2, 4,5,8,10 . Let R be a
possible orders and these words are written as in a
relation defined on A  B such that
dictionary with serial numbers. Then the serial number
of the word PUBLIC is (JEE Main 2023) R   a , b  ,  a , b   : a
1 1 2 2 1 
 b2 and b1  a2 . Then the
(a) 582 (b) 580 number of elements in the set R is (JEE Main 2023)
(c) 576 (d) 578 (a) 180 (b) 26
73. Let the number of elements in sets A and B be five (c) 52 (d) 160
and two respectively. Then the number of subsets of 81. If the letters of the word MATHS are permuted and all
A  B each having at least 3 and at most 6 elements is: possible words so formed are arranged as in a
(JEE Main 2023) dictionary with serial numbers, then the serial number
(a) 772 (b) 792 of the word THAMS is (JEE Main 2023)
(c) 782 (d) 752 (a) 101 (b) 104
74. The number of ways, in which 5 girls and 7 boys can (c) 102 (d) 103
be seated at a round table so that no two girls sit 82. The number of five digit numbers, greater than 40000
together, is (JEE Main 2023) and divisible by 5 , which can be formed using the
2
(a) 7  360  (b) 720 digits 0,1,3,5,7 and 9 without repetition, is equal to
2 2 (JEE Main 2023)
(c) 126  5! (d) 7  720 
(a) 120 (b) 96
75. The number of arrangements of the letters of the word (c) 72 (d) 132
“INDEPENDENCE” in which all the vowels always 83. All words, with or without meaning, are made using
occur together is (JEE Main 2023) all the letters of the word MONDAY. These words are
(a) 33600 (b) 14800 written as in a dictionary with serial numbers. The
(c) 18000 (d) 16800 serial number of the word MONDAY is
76. If the number of words, with or without meaning, (JEE Main 2023)
which can be made using all the letters of the word (a) 327 (b) 328
MATHEMATICS in which C and S do not come (c) 324 (d) 326
together, is  6! k , then k is equal to 84. The total number of three-digit numbers, divisible by
(JEE Main 2023) 3, which can be formed using the digits 1, 3, 5 8, if
(a) 5670 (b) 2835 repetition of digits is allowed, is (JEE Main 2023)
(c) 945 (d) 1890
(a) 22 (b) 21
77. Let A  2,3, 4 and B  8,9,12 . Then the number
(c) 20 (d) 18
of elements in the relation
85. The number of ways of giving 20 distinct oranges to 3
R  a , b  ,  a , b     A  B, A  B  : a
1 1 2 2 1 divides b2
children such that each child gets at least one orange is
and a2 divides b1} is (JEE Main 2023)
_______. (JEE Main 2023)
(a) 18 (b) 36
(c) 12 (d) 24 86. The number of 4-letter words, with or without
78. Eight persons are to be transported from city A to city meaning, each consisting of 2 vowels and 2
B in three cars of different makes. If each car can
consonants, which can be formed from the letters of
accommodate at most three persons, then the number
of ways, in which they can be transported, is the word UNIVERSE without repetition is ______.
(JEE Main 2023) (JEE Main 2023)
(a) 3360 (b) 1680
87. The largest natural number n such that 3n divide 66!
(c) 560 (d) 1120
is _____. (JEE Main 2023)
79. The number of triplets  x, y, z  , where x, y, z are
distinct non negative integers satisfying x  y  z  15 , 88. Let R  a, b, c, d , e and S  1, 2,3, 4 . Total number
is (JEE Main 2023) of onto functions f : R  S such that f  a   1 is
(a) 136 (b) 114
(c) 92 (d) 80 equal to (JEE Main 2023)
89. Some couples participated in a mixed doubles 95. The number of seven digit positive integers formed
badminton tournament. If the number of matches using the digits 1, 2, 3 and 4 only and the sum of the
played, so that no couple played in a match, is 840, digits equal to 12 is _______. (JEE Main 2023)
then the total numbers of persons, who participated in 96. Total numbers of 3-digit numbers that are divisible by
the tournament, is _______. (JEE Main 2023) 6 and can be fo1med by using the digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
90. The number of permutations, of the digits 1, 2,3,...,7 with repetition, is ______.
without repetition, which neither contain the string 153 Given: 89 (JEE Main 2023)
nor the string 2467, is _____. (JEE Main 2023) 97. A person forgets his 4-digit ATM pin code. But he
91. The sum of all the four-digit numbers that can be remembers that in the code all the digits are different,
formed using all the digits 2,1, 2,3 is equal to ______. the greatest digit is 7 and the sum of the first two digits
(JEE Main 2023) is equal to the sum of the last two digits. Then the
92. In an examination, 5 students have been allotted their maximum number of trials necessary to obtain the
seats as per their roll numbers. The number of ways, in correct code is ___. (JEE Main 2023)
which none of the students sits on the allotted eat, is
______. (JEE Main 2023)
93. Let A  1, 2,3, 4,5 and B  1, 2,3, 4,5, 6 . Then the
number of function f :AB satisfying
f 1  f  2   f  4   1 is equal to _______.
(JEE Main 2023)
94. Let the digits a, b, c be in A. P. Nine-digit numbers are
to be formed using each of these three digits thrice
such that three consecutive digits are in A.P. at least
once. How many such numbers can be formed?
(JEE Main 2023)

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 8. A variable name in a certain computer language must be
either an alphabet or a alphabet followed by a decimal
1. Total 5–digit numbers divisible by 4 that can be formed
digit. Total number of different variable names that can
using 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, when the repetition of digits is allowed
is exist in that language is equal to :
(a) 1250 (b) 875 (a) 280 (b) 290

(c) 1620 (d) 1000 (c) 286 (d) 296
2. The number of 4–digit numbers that can be made with the 9. Every one of the 10 available lamps can be switched on to
digits 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 in which at least two digits are identical, illuminate certain Hall. The total number of ways in which
is : the hall can be illuminated, is :
(a) 45 – 5! (b) 505
(a) 55 (b) 1023
(c) 210 (d) 10!
3. How many numbers greater than 1000, but not greater
than 4000 can be formed with the digits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 10. The number of all possible selections of one or more
repetition of digits being allowed : questions from 10 given questions, each question having
(a) 374 (b) 375 an alternative is :
10 10
(c) 376 (d) None of these (a) 3 (b) 2 – 1
10 10
4. The letters of the word SURITI are written in all possible (c) 3 – 1 (d) 2
orders and these words are written out as in a dictionary. 11. There are 20 questions in a questions paper. If no two
Then the rank of the word SURITI is : students solve the same combination of questions but
(a) 236 (b) 245 solve equal number of questions then the maximum number
(c) 307 (d) 315 of students who appeared in the examination is :
5. An ice cream parlour has ice creams in eight different (a) 20C9 (b) 20C11
varieties. Number of ways of choosing 3 ice creams taking
(c) 20C10 (d) None of these
atleast two ice creams of the same variety, is :
12. The number of numbers divisible by 3 that can be formed
(a) 56 (b) 64
by four different even digits is :
(a) 18 (b) 36
(Assume that ice creams of the same variety are identical and
available in unlimited supply) (c) 20 (d) None of these
6. Seven different coins are to be divided amongst three 13. The integers from 1 to 1000 are written in order around a
persons. If no two of the persons receive the same number circle. Starting at 1, every fifteenth number is marked (that
of coins but each receives atleast one coin and none is left is 1, 16, 31, etc.) This process is continued until a number
over, then the number of ways in which the division may
is reached which has already been marked, then unmarked
be made is :
numbers are
(a) 420 (b) 630
(c) 710 (d) none of these (a) 200 (b) 400
7. Four couples (husband and wife) decide to form a (c) 600 (d) 800
committee of four members. The number of different 14. The number of times of the digits 3 will be written when
committee that can be formed in which no couple finds a
listing the integer from 1 to 1000 is :
place is :
(a) 269 (b) 300
(a) 10 (b) 12
(c) 14 (d) 16 (c) 271 (d) 302
22. The number of ways in which the sum of upper faces of

5
52  j four distinct dices can be six.
15. The value of the expression 47C4 +  C 3 is equal to
j1 (a) 10 (b) 4
(a) 47C5 (b) 52C5 (c) 6 (d) 7
(c)52C4 (d)None of these 23. If the letters of the word MOTHER are arranged in all
possible orders and these words are written as in a
16. There are n concurrent lines and another line parallel to
dictionary, then the rank of the word MOTHER will be
one of them. The number of different triangles that will be
formed by the (n + 1) lines, is (a) 240 (b) 261
(c) 308 (d) 309
n  1n n  1n  2 24. There are 12 books on Algebra and Calculus in our library,
(a) (b)
2 2
the books of the same subject being different. If the
number of selections each of which consists of 3 books
n n  1 n  1n  2
(c) (d) on each topic is greatest then the number of books of
2 2
Algebra and Calculus in the library are respectively :
17. The sides AB, BC and CA of a triangle ABC have a, b and (a) 3 and 9 (b) 4 and 8
c interior points on them respectively, then find the number
(c) 5 and 7 (d) 6 and 6
of triangles that can be construced using these interior
points as vertices. 25. If 3n different things can be equally distributed among 3
persons in k ways then the number of ways to divide the
(a) a + b + cC3
3n things in 3 equal groups is :
(b) a + b + cC3 – (aC3 + bC3 + cC3)
(c) a + b + c + 3C3 k
(a) k × 3! (b)
3!
(d) None of these
18. There are 12 books on Algebra and Calculus in our library, (c) 3k (d) None of these
the books of the same subject being different. If the 26. The number of ways in which the sum of upper faces of
number of selections each of which consists of 3 books four distinct dices can be six.
on each topic is greatest then the number of books of (a) 10 (b) 4
Algebra and Calculus in the library are respectively :
(c) 6 (d) 7
(a) 3 and 9 (b) 4 and 8
27. The number of subsets of the set A = {a1, a2, . . . . , an}
(c) 5 and 7 (d) 6 and 6 which contain even number of elements is
19. A committee of 5 is to be chosen from a group of 9 people. (a) 2n – 1 (b) 2n – 1
Number of ways in which it can be formed if two particular
(c) 2n – 2 (d) 2n
persons either serve together or not at all and two other
particular persons refuse to serve with each other, is 28. The number of divisors of 23 . 33 . 53 . 75 of the form
4n + 1, n  N is :
(a) 41 (b) 36
(c) 47 (d) 76 (a) 46 (b) 47
20. An ice cream parlour has ice creams in eight different (c) 96 (d) 94
varieties. Number of ways of choosing 3 ice creams taking 29. There are n different books and p copies of each in a
atleast two ice creams of the same variety, is : library. The number of ways in which one or more books
(a) 56 (b) 64 can be selected is :
(c) 100 (d) none of these (a) pn + 1 (b) (p + 1)n – 1
21. A bag contains 2 Apples, 3 Oranges and 4 Bananas. The (c) (p + 1)n – p (d) pn
number of ways in which 3 fruits can be selected if atleast
30. Let p,q {1,2,3, 4}. The number of equations of the form
one banana is always in the combination (Assume fruit of
px2 +qx + 1 = 0 having real roots must be
same species to be alike) is :
(a) 15 (b) 9
(a) 6 (b) 10
(c) 7 (d) 8
(c) 29 (d) 7
31. The number of ways in which n different prizes can be 38. The minimum marks required for clearing a certain
distributed amongst m (< n) persons if each is entitled to screening paper is 210 out of 300. The screening paper
receive at most n – 1 prizes, is : consists of ‘3’ sections each of Physics, Chemistry, and
(a) nm – n (b) mn Maths. Each section has 100 as maximum marks. Assuming
there is no negative marking and marks obtained in each
(c) mn – m (d) None of these
section are integers, the number of ways in which a student
32. Two classrooms A and B having capacity of 25 and can qualify the examinatin is (Assuming no cut–off limit) :
(n – 25) seats respectively. An denotes the number of
(a) 210C3 – 90C3 (b) 93C3
possible seating arrangments of room ‘A’, when ‘n’
(c) 213C3 (d) (210)3
students are to be seated in these rooms, starting from
room ‘A’ which is to be filled up full to its capacity. 39. There are 100 different books in a shelf. Number of ways
49 in which 3 books can be selected so that no two of which
If An – An – 1 = 25 ! ( C25) then ‘n’ equals
are neighbours is :
(a) 50 (b) 48 100 97
(a) C3 – 98 (b) C3
(c) 49 (d) 51 96 98
(c) C3 (d) C3
33. The number of ways in which we can choose 3 squares of
unit area on a chess board such that one of the squares Objective Questions II [One or more than one correct option]
has its two sides common to other two squares
40. The number of ways in which 10 candidates A1, A2, . . ., A10
(a) 290 (b) 292 can be ranked so that A1 is always before A2 is :
(c) 294 (d) 296
10!
34. A teacher takes 3 children from her class to the zoo at a (a) (b) 8! × 10C2
2
time as often as she can, but does not take the same three
children to the zoo more than once. She finds that she (c) 10P2 (d) 10C2
goes to the zoo 84 more than a particular child goes to the 41. If P (n, n) denotes the number of permutations of n different
zoo. The number of chidren in her class is : things taken all at a time then P (n, n) is also identical to
(a) 12 (b) 10 (a) r ! P (n, n – r) (b) (n – r) . P (n, r)
(c) 60 (d) None of these (c) n . P (n – 1, n – 1) (d) P (n, n – 1)
35. Two lines intersect at O. Points A1, A2 . . ., An are taken on where 0 < r < n
one of them and B1, B2, . . . , Bn on the other, the number of 42. Which of the following statements are correct ?
triangle that can be drawn with the help of these (2n + 1)
(a) Number of words that can be formed with 6 only of the
points is :
letters of the word “CENTRIFUGAL” if each word must
(a) n (b) n2 contain all the vowels is 3 . 7 !
(c) n3 (d) n4 (b) There are 15 balls of which some are white and the rest
36. The total number of six digit numbers x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 having are black. If the number of ways in which the balls can
the property x1 < x2  x3 < x4 < x5  x6, is equal to: be arranged in a row, is maximum then the number of
(a) 11C6 (b) 16C2 white balls must be equal to 7 or 8. Assume balls of the
same colour to be alike.
(c) 17C2 (d) 18C2
(c) There are 12 things, 4 alike of one kind, 5 alike and of
37. Find number of arangements of 4 letters taken from the
another kind and the rest are all different. The total
word EXAMINATION.
number of combinations is 240.
(a) 2454 (b) 2500
(d) Number of selections that can be made of 6 letters from
(c) 2544 (d) None of these the word “COMMITTEE” is 35.
n–1
43. Identify the correct statement(s) 47. The combinatorial coefficient Cp denotes
(a) the number of ways in which n things of which p are
(a) Number of zeroes standing at the end of 125 is 30.
alike and rest different can be arranged in a circle.
(b) A telegraph has 10 arms and each arm is capable of 9 (b) the number of ways in which p different things can be
distinct positions excluding the position of rest. The selected out of n different thing if a particular thing is
number of signals that can be transmitted is always excluded.
10
10 – 1.
(c) number of ways in which n alike balls can be distributed
(c) Number of numbers greater than 4 lacs which can in p different boxes so that no box remains empty and
be formed by using only the digit 0, 2, 2, 4, 4 and 5 each box can hold any number of balls.
is 90. (d) the number of ways in which (n – 2) white balls and p
(d) In a table tennis tournament, every player plays with black balls can be arranged in a line if black balls are
every other player. If the number of games played is separated, balls are all alike except for the colour.
5050 then the number of players in the tournament is 48. The maximum number of permutations of 2n letters in which
100. there are only a’s and b’s, taken all at a time is given by :
2n
44. There are 10 questions, each question is either True or (a) Cn
False. Number of different sequences of incorrect
2 6 10 4n  6 4n  2
answers is also equal to (b) . . .... .
1 2 3 n 1 n
(a) Number of ways in which a normal coin tossed 10
times would fall in a definite order if both Heads and n  1 n  2 n  3 n  4 2n  1 2n
(c) . . . .... .
Tails are present. 1 2 3 4 n 1 n
(b) Number of ways in which a multiple choice question
containing 10 alternatives with one or more than one 2 n 1.3.5....(2n  3)(2n  1)
(d)
correct alternatives, can be answered. n!
(c) Number of ways in which it is possible to draw a sum 49. The combinatorial coefficient C(n, r) is equal to
of money with 10 coins of different denominations
(a) number of possible subsets of r members from a set
taken some or all at a time.
of n distinct members.
(d) Number of different selections of 10 indistinguishable (b) number of possible binary messages of length n with
things takes some or all at a time. exactly r 1’s.
45. The continued product, 2 . 6 . 10 . 14 ........ to n factors is (c) number of non decreasing 2–D paths from the lattice
equal to : point (0, 0) to (r, n)
2n
(a) Cn (d) number of ways of selecting r things out of n different
2n things when a particular thing is always included plus
(b) Pn
the number of ways of selecting ‘r’ things out of n,
(c) (n + 1) (n + 2) (n + 3) ....... (n + n)
when a particular thing is always excluded
(d) none of these
50. Number of ways in which 3 numbers in A.P. can be selected
46. The number of ways of distributing 10 different books from 1, 2, 3, ...... n is :
among 4 students (S1 – S4) such that S1 and S2 get 2
2
books each and S3 and S4 get 3 books each is :  n 1  n(n  2)
(a)   if n is odd (b) if n is odd
(a) 12600 (b) 25200  2  4
10! (n  1)2 n(n  2)

(c) 10C4 (d) 2! 2!3! 3! (c) if n is odd (d) if n is even
4 4
51. The number of ways in which five different books to be 57. Column–I Column–II
distributed among 3 persons so that each person gets at (A) Four different movies are (P) 11
least one book, is equal to the number of ways in which running in a town. Ten students
(a) 5 persons are allotted 3 different residential flats so go to watch these four movies.
that each person is alloted at most one flat and no two The number of ways in which
persons are alloted the same flat. every movie is watched by atleast
one student, is (Assume each way
(b) number of parallelograms (some of which may be
differs only by number of students
overlapping) formed by one set of 6 parallel lines and
other set of 5 parallel lines that goes in other direction. watching a movie)
(B) Consider 8 vertices of a regular (Q) 36
(c) 5 different toys are to be distributed among 3 children,
octagon and its centre. If T
so that each child gets at least one toy.
denotes the number of triangles
(d) 3 mathematics professors are assigned five different
and S denotes the number of
lectures to be delivered, so that each professor gets at
straight lines that can be formed
least one lecture.
with these 9 points then the value
Numerical Value Type Questions of (T – S) equals
(C) In an examination, 5 children were (R) 52
52. Number of ways in which 12 identical coins can be
found to have their mobiles in
distributed in 6 different purses, if not more than 3 and not
their pocket. The Invigilator fired
less than 1 coin goes in each purse is ...............
them and took their mobiles in
53. The number of non negative integral solution of the
his possession. Towards the end
inequation x + y + z + w < 7 is ..........
of the test, Invigilator randomly
54. 10 identical balls are to be distributed in 5 different boxes returned their mobiles. The number
kept in a row and labled A, B, C, D and E. Find the number of ways in which at most two
of ways in which the balls can be distributed in the boxes children did not get their own
if no two adjacent boxes remain empty.
moblies is
55. There are four balls of different colours and four boxes of (D) The product of the digits of 3214 (S) 60
colours, same as those of the balls. The number of ways in is 24. The number of 4 digit natural
which the balls, one each in a box, could be placed such numbers such that the product of
that a ball does not go to a box of its own colour is.... . their digits is 12, is
56. In how many ways it is possible to select six letters, (E) The number of ways in which a (T) 84
including at least one vowel from the letters of the word mixed double tennis game can
“F L A B E L L I F O R M”. (It is a picnic spot in U. S. A.) be arranged from amongst 5
Match the Following married couple if no husband

and wife plays in the same game, is
Each question has two columns. Four options are given The correct matching is :
representing matching of elements from Column-I and (a) (A–R); (B–T); (C–P); (D–Q); (E–S)
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds (b) (A–T); (B–R); (C–P); (D–Q); (E–S)
to a correct matching. For each question, choose the (c) (A–P); (B–T); (C–R); (D–Q); (E–S)
option corresponding to the correct matching. (d) (A–S); (B–Q); (C–R); (D–T); (E–P)
58. Match the Column 59. 5 balls are to be placed in 3 boxes. Each box can hold all
Column–I Column–II the 5 balls. Number of ways in which the balls can be
m placed so that no box remains empty, if :
(A) Number of increasing (P) n
Column–I Column–II
permutations of m symbols
(A) balls are identical but boxes are (P) 2
are there from the n set
different
numbers {a1, a2, ... , an} where
(B) balls are different but boxes are (Q) 25
the order among the numbers is
identical
given by a1 < a2 < a3 < ... an–1 < an is
m (C) balls as well as boxes are identical (R) 50
(B) There are m men and n monkeys. (Q) Cn
(D) balls as well as boxes are identical
Number of ways in which every
but boxes are kept in a row (S) 6
monkey has a master, if a man can
You may note that two or more entries of column–I can match
have any number of monkeys
with only entry of column–II
n
(C) Number of ways in which n red (R) Cm
balls and (m – 1) green balls can
(a) (A–S); (B–Q); (C–P); (D–S)
be arranged in a line, so tha no
(b) (A–Q); (B–S); (C–P); (D–S)
two red balls are together, is
(c) (A–P); (B–Q); (C–S); (D–S)
(balls of the same colour are alike)
(d) (A–Q); (B–P); (C–S); (D–S)
n
(D) Number of ways in which ‘m’ (S) m
Text
different toys can be distributed
in ‘n’ children if every child may 60. If nCr – 1 = 36, nCr = 84 and nCr+1 = 126, then find the values
receive any number of toys, is of n and r.
(a) (A–R); (B –S); (C–Q); (D–P)
(b) (A–S); (B –R); (C–Q); (D–P)
(c) (A–Q); (B –S); (C–R); (D–P)
(d) (A–P); (B –Q); (C–S); (D–R)

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 7. A debate club consists of 6 girls and 4 boys. A team of 4
members is to be selected from this club including the
1. The number of arrangements of the letters of the word selection of a captain (from among these 4 members) for
BANANA in which the two N’s do not appear adjacently, the team. If the team has to include at most one boy, then
is (2002) the number of ways of selecting the team is (2016)
(a) 40 (b) 60 (a)  (b) 

(c) 2 (d) 
(c) 80 (d) 100
8. Let S = {1, 2, 3,…..,9}. For k = 1, 2,…..,5, let Nk be the
2. If r, s, t are prime numbers and p, q are the positive integers number of subsets of S, each containing five elements
such that LCM of p, q is r2s4t2, then the number of ordered out of which exactly k are odd. Then
pairs (p, q ) is (2006) N1 + N2 + N3 + N4 + N5= (2017)
(a) 125 (b) 210
(a) 252 (b) 254
(c) 252 (d) 126
(c) 225 (d) 224
9. Consider 4 boxes, where each box contains 3 red balls
3. The letters of the word COCHIN are permuted and all the and 2 blue balls. Assume that all 20 balls are distinct. In
permutations are arranged in an alphabetical order as in how many different ways can 10 balls be chosen from
these 4 boxes so that from each box at least one red ball
an English dictionary. The number of words that appear
and one blue ball are chosen? (2022)
before the word COCHIN is (2007)
(a) 21816 (b) 85536
(a) 360 (b) 192 (c) 12096 (d) 156816
(c) 96 (d) 48 Objective Questions II [One or more than one correct option]
4. The number of seven digit integers, with sum of the digits 10. For non-negative integers s and r, let
equal to 10 and formed by using the digits 1,2 and 3 only,
 s!
is (2009) s  if r  s,
=
   r !( s  r )!
(a) 55 (b) 66 r   0
if  s

(c) 77 (d) 88
For positive integers m and n, let
5. The total number of ways in which 5 balls of different
m+n
colours can be distributed among 3 persons so that each f (m, n, p)
g (m, n)  
P=0 n+ p
where for any nonnegative
person gets atleast one ball is (2012)  
 p 
(a) 75 (b) 150
integer p,
(c) 210 (d) 243
p
6. Six cards and six envelopes are numbered 1,2,3,4,5,6 and  m n + i  p + n
f ( m, n , p ) =      
i =0  i   p   p  i 
cards are to be placed in envelopes so that each envelope
contains exactly one card and no card is placed in the Then which of the following statements is/are TRUE?
envelope bearing the same number and moreover the card (2020)
numbered 1 is always placed in envelope numbered 2. (a) g (m, n) = g (n, m) for all positive integers m,n
Then the number of ways it can be done is (2014)
(b) g (m, n + 1) = g (m + 1, n) for all positive integers m,n
(a) 264 (b) 265
(c) g (2m, 2n) = 2 g (m, n) for all positive integers m,n
(c) 53 (d) 67
(d) g (2m, 2n) = ( g (m, n)) 2 for all positive integers m,n
15. Five persons A,B,C,D and E are seated in a circular

11. Let S1   i, j, k  : i, j, k  1, 2,...,10 , arrangement. If each of them is given a hat of one of the
three colours red, blue and green, then the numbers of
S2   i, j :1  i  j  2  10, i, j  1, 2, ....,10 , ways of distributing the hats such that the person seated
in adjacent seats get different coloured hats is (2019)
16. An engineer is required to visit a factory for exactly four
S3   i, j, k, l  :1  i  j  k  l, i, j, k, l  1, 2,..., 10
days during the first 15 days of every month and it is
mandatory that no two visits take place on consecutive
And S4   i, j, k, l  : i, j, k and l are distinct elements days. Then the number of all possible ways in which such
visits to the factory can be made by the engineer during
1-15 June 2021 is _____. (2020)
in 1, 2, ..., 10.
17. In a hotel, four rooms are available. Six persons are to be
accommodated in these four rooms in such a way that
If the total number of elements in the set Sr is
each of these rooms contains at least one person and at
n r , r  1, 2, 3, 4. then which of the following statement most two persons. Then the number of all possible ways
in which this can be done is _____ . (2020)
is (are) TRUE? (2021)
18. The number of 4-digit integers in the closed interval [2022,
(a) n1 = 1000 (b) n2 = 44 4482] formed by using the digits 0, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 is
____________. (2022)
n4 Match the Following
(c) n3 = 220 (d)  420
12 Each question has two columns. Four options are given
12. Let n be the number of ways in which 5 boys and 5 girls to a correct matching.For each question, choose the option
corresponding to the correct matching.
can stand in a queue in such a way that all the girls stand
19. Consider all possible permutations of the letters of the
consecutively in the queue. Let m be the number of ways
word ENDEANOEL. (2008)
in which 5 boys and 5 girls can stand in a queue in such
(A) The number of permutations (P) 5!
a way that exactly four girls stand consecutively in the
contianing the word ENDEA, is
m (B) The number of permutations in (Q) 2 × 5!
queue. Then the value of is (2015)
n
which the letter E occurs in the
13. Words of length 10 are formed using the letters A, B, C, D, first and the last positions, is
E, F, G, H, I, J. Let x be the number of such words where no (C) The number of permutations in (R) 7 × 5!
letter is repeated; and let y be the number of such words which none of the letters D, L, N
where exactly one letter is repeated twice and no other occurs in the last five positions, is
(D) The number of permutations in (S) 21 × 5!
y
letter is repeated. Then,  (2017) which the letters A, E, O occur
9x
only in odd positions, is
14. The number of 5 digit numbers which are divisible by 4, The correct matching is :
with digits from the set {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} and the repetition of (a) ( A-P; B-S; C-Q; D-Q )
digits is allowed, is _______. (2018) (b) ( A-S; B-P; C-Q; D-Q )
(c) ( A-Q; B-S; C-Q; D-P )
(d) ( A-S; B-Q; C-P; D-Q )
20. In a high school, a committee has to be formed from a Using the following passage, solve Q.21 and Q.22
group of 6 boys M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, M6 and 5 girls G1, G2,
G3, G4, G5. Passage
(i) Let 1 be the total number of ways in which the Let an denote the number of all n-digit positive integers
committee can be formed such that the committee has 5 formed by the digits 0, 1 or both such that no consecutive
members, having exactly 3 boys and 2 girls. digits in them are 0. Let bn = The number of such n-digit
integers ending with digit 1 and cn = The number of such
(ii) Let  2 be the total number of ways in which the
n-digit integers ending with digit 0. (2012)
committee can be formed such that the committee has at
least 2 members, and having an equal number of boys 21. Which of the following is correct ?
and girls.
(a) a17 = a16 + a15 (b) c17  c16 + c15
(iii) Let  3 be the total number of ways in which the
(c) b17  b16 + c16 (d) a17 = c17 + b16
committee can be formed such that the committee has 5
members, at least 2 of them being girls. 22. The value of b6 is
(iv) Let  4 be the total number of ways in which the (a) 7 (b) 8
committee can be formed such that the committee has 4 (c) 9 (d) 11
members, having at least 2 girls and such that both M1
and G1 are NOT in the committee together. (2018)
Column A Column B
(A) The value of 1 is (P) 136
(B) The value of  2 is (Q) 189
(C) The value of  3 is (R) 192
(D) The value of  4 is (S) 200

(T) 381
(U) 461
(a) (A–S; B–U; C–T; D–Q)
(b) (A–U; B–S; C–T; D–Q)
(c) (A–T; B–U; C–S; D–Q)
(d) (A–Q; B–T; C–U; D–S)

Answer Key
CHAPTER -09 CIRCLES
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (b) 5. (c) 1. (c) 2. (a) 3. (d) 4. (c) 5. (b)
6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (d) 9. (b) 10. (a) 6. (a) 7. (d) 8. (61) 9. (16) 10. (40)
11. (c) 12. (a) 13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (c) 11. (165) 12. (b) 13. (1) 14. (a) 15. (d)
16. (c) 17. (d) 18. (d) 19. (b) 20. (c) 16. (a) 17. (18) 18. (b) 19. (1) 20. (c)
21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (b) 24. (b) 25. (a) 21. (c) 22. (d) 23. (56) 24. (1225) 25. (3)
26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (a) 29. (a) 30. (b) 26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (c) 29. (d) 30. (b)
31. (d) 32. (b) 33. (c) 34. (b) 35. (a) 31. (b) 32. (d) 33. (c) 34. (c) 35. (a)
36. (c) 37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (d) 40. (d) 36. (a) 37. (d) 38. (a) 39. (b) 40. (b)
41. (d) 42. (c) 43. (b) 44. (b) 45. (a) 41. 7.00 42. 7.00 43. 16.00 44. 816.00
46. (d) 47. (a) 48. (d) 49. (b) 50. (c) 45. 10.00 46. 25.00 47. 12.00 48. 72.00 49. (d)
51. (b) 52. (d) 53. (c) 54. (d) 55. (b) 50. (a) 51. (d) 52. (a) 53. (b) 54. (a)
56. (a) 57. (2.83) 58. (15) 59. (14.42) 55. (d) 56. (c) 57. (c) 58. (b) 59. (c)
60. (1) 61. (16) 62. (8.94) 63. (40) 64. (75) 60. (d) 61. (3.00) 62. (11.00) 63. (24.00)
65. (7.68) 66. (90) 67. (4) 68. (4) 69. (–1.25) 64. (3.00) 65. (121.00) 66. (2.00)
70. (–18) 67. (7.00)
ANSWER KEY 129
CHAPTER -09 CIRCLES

ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (c) 5. (a) 1. (c) 2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (a) 5. (b)
6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (a) 9. (b) 10. (b)
6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (a) 10. (a)
11. (a,c) 12. (b,c) 13. (a,b,c) 14. (a,c)
11. (a) 12. (b) 13. (b) 14. (d) 15. (b) 15. (c,d) 16. (8) 17. (2) 18. (10) 19. (2)
16. (c) 17. (a) 18. (d) 19. (c) 20. (d) 20. (0.83 or 0.84) 21. (2) 22. (a) 23. (c)
21. (d) 22. (a) 23. (d) 24. (b) 25. (c) 24. (a) 25. (c) 26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (c)
29. (c) 30. (d) 31. (a) 32. (d) 33. (d)
26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (b) 29. (d) 30. (d)
34. (a) 35. (a) 36. (d) 37. (d) 38. (b)
31. (a) 32. (c) 33. (c) 34. (a) 35. (c)
36. (b) 37. (c) 38. (c) 39. (a) 40. (c)
39. (0.50)40. (4) 
41. 3 3  10  42. (Ellipse)
41. (b) 42. (a) 43. (b) 44. (b) 45. (c) 43.  2 x  2 y  10 x  5 y  1  0 
2 2
46. (a) 47. (a,d) 48. (b,d) 49. (a,c,d)

50. (b,c) 51. (a,c) 52. (b,c) 53. (a,c,d)
54. (a,d) 55. (a,b) 56. (b,d) 57. (1) 58. (949)
59. (0) 60. (2) 61. (d) 62. (a) 63. (c)
64. (a) 65. (d) 66. (a) 67. (a) 68. (b)
69. (b) 70. (d) 71. (b) 72. (d) 73. (b)
 1 2
74. (a) 77.   ,  
 5 5
2 2
 4 1
78.  x    y    and ( x  4)  y  (3)
2 2 2 2
 3  3
 
Answer Key
CHAPTER -10 CONIC SECTIONS

1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (a) 5. (a) 1. (34) 2. (c) 3. (9) 4. (b) 5. (c)
6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (c) 10. (b) 6. (c) 7. (3) 8. (c) 9. (c) 10. (c)
11. (d) 12. (c) 13. (a) 14. (2) 15. (a)
11. (c) 12. (c) 13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (a)
16. (b) 17. (b) 18. (d) 19. (36) 20. (b)
16. (a) 17. (d) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (d) 21. (d) 22. (b) 23. (2) 24. (a) 25. (c)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (c) 25. (b) 26. (b) 27. (d) 28. (d) 29. (b) 30. (80)
26. (b) 27. (a) 28. (a) 29. (a) 30. (c) 31. (b) 32. (b) 33. (b) 34. (a) 35. (9)
36. (d) 37. (2) 38. (3) 39. (b) 40. (d)
31. (c) 32. (d) 33. (d) 34. (b) 35. (a)
41. (d) 42. (a) 43. (b) 44. (b) 45. (c)
36. (b) 37. (b) 38. (b) 39. (c) 40. (a) 46. (c) 47. (b) 48. (d) 49. (b) 50. (d)
41. (a) 42. (c) 43. (a) 44. (c) 45. (b) 51. (b) 52. (b) 53. (d) 54. (a) 55. (d)
46. (a) 47. (a) 48. (d) 49. (b) 50. (d) 56. (d) 57. (d) 58. (c) 59. (b) 60. (b)
61. (c) 62. (d) 63. (c) 64. (b) 65. (b)
51. (a) 52. (c) 53. (c) 54. (d) 55. (d) 66. (b) 67. (b) 68. 2929.00 69. 42.00
56. (a) 57. (b) 58. (b) 59. (b) 60. (a) 70. 10.00 71. 85.00 72. 4.00 73. 12.00 74. 63.00
61. (a) 62. (a) 63. (d) 64. (4) 65. (2) 75. 88.00 76. 2.00 77. 10.00 78. 1552.00
79. 75.00 80. 20.00 81. 3.00 82. 13.00
66. (2) 67. (0) 68. (24) 69. (14) 70. (5)
83. 9.00 84. (a) 85. (b) 86. (b) 87. (c)
71. (90) 72. (60) 73. (1) 74. (2) 75. (2) 88. (b) 89. (d) 90. (d) 91. (d) 92. (c)
76. (12) 77. (16) 78. (3) 79. (4) 80. (8) 93. (b) 94. (a) 95. (a) 96. (c) 97. (c)
98. (d) 99. (a) 100. (c) 101. (b) 102. (a)
103. (b) 104. (b) 105. (b) 106. (d) 107. (a)
108. (118.00) 109. (7.00) 110. (432.00)
111. (216.00) 112. (10.00) 113. (146.00)
114. (39.00) 115. (16.00) 116. (2.00)
117. (16.00) 118. (32.00) 119. (306.00)
120. (116.00) 121. (8.00) 122. (12.00)
123. (9.00)
ANSWER KEY 131
CHAPTER -10 CONIC SECTIONS


1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (c) 5. (a) 1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (d) 5. (c)
6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (a) 9. (d) 10. (b) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (a) 9. (b) 10. (d)
11. (b) 12. (b) 13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (a) 11. (a) 12. (b) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (d)
16. (d) 17. (b) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (d) 16. (c) 17. (c) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (a)
21. (d) 22. (d) 23. (a) 24. (c) 25. (a) 21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (a,b) 24. (b,c) 25. (a,d)
26. (a) 27. (d) 28. (b) 29. (a) 30. (b) 26. (a,b) 27. (c,d) 28. (a,b,d) 29. (b,d)
31. (d) 32. (b) 33. (d) 34. (d) 35. (b) 30. (a,d) 31. (a,b) 32. (a,b,d) 33. (a,c,d)
36. (c) 37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (c) 40. (b) 34. (a,c) 35. (b,c) 36. (a,d) 37. (a,b,d)
41. (a) 42. (c) 43. (a) 44. (a) 45. (b) 38. (b,c,d) 39. (a,c) 40. (2) 41. (2)
46. (b) 47. (c) 48. (c) 49. (a) 50. (a) 42. (2) 43. (4) 44. (4) 45. (4) 46. (7)
51. (d) 52. (a,c) 53. (a,b,c,d) 54. (a,b,c,d) 47. (a) 48. (c) 49. (b) 50. (a) 51. (a)
55. (a,b,c,d) 56. (a,d) 57. (a,b,d) 52. (c) 53. (d) 54. (a) 55. (c) 57. (a=2)
58. (a,b) 59. (a,b,c) 60. (b,c) 61. (228) 58. ((x + 1) (y – 1)2 + 4 = 0)
62. (12) 63. (900) 64. (27) 65. (145) 66. (50)
67. (16) 68. (a) 69. (c) 70. (a) 71. (a) 2x 7 14 3
59. y   4 ,
3 3 3
72. (c) 73. (a) 74. (b) 75. (c) 76. (d)
77. (b) 78. (c) 79. (d) 80. (b)
 
2
81. y2 = 2 (x – 4) 82. (1/9,1/9) x 2 y2 x 2  y2
60.  
9 4 81
1 5 5 1
84. P0  ,  , Q0  , 
2 4 4 2
x2 y  r  s
2 2
85. 2  1
 ar  bs 
2
a
Answer Key
CHAPTER -11 BINOMIAL THEOREM

1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (a) 5. (c) 1. (c) 2. (21) 3. (d) 4. (a) 5. (210)
6. (b) 7. (d) 8. (b) 9. (c) 10. (c) 6. (1) 7. (a) 8. (d) 9. (b) 10. (96)
11. (d) 12. (c) 13. (c) 14. (d) 15. (a) 11. (8) 12. (d) 13. (a) 14. (a) 15. (55)
16. (c) 17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (d) 16. (98) 17. (924) 18. (49) 19. (b) 20. (b)
21. (c) 22. (c) 23. (b) 24. (b) 25. (d) 21. (15) 22. (55) 23. (315) 24. (6) 25. (b)
26. (c) 27. (d) 28. (d) 29. (b) 30. (c) 26. (d) 27. (4) 28. (4) 29. (210) 30. (19)
31. (c) 32. (b) 33. (12) 34. (d) 35. (1)
31. (d) 32. (a) 33. (c) 34. (b) 35. (b)
36. (b) 37. (45) 38. (b) 39. (d) 40. (a)
36. (d) 37. (d) 38. (b) 39. (d) 40. (b)
41. (c) 42. (b) 43. (d) 44. (c) 45. (d)
41. (c) 42. (b) 43. (5) 44. (51) 45. (17)
46. (a) 47. (a) 48. (c) 49. 4.00 50. 285.00
46. (12) 47. (540) 48. (210) 49. (9) 50. (252)
51. 83.00 52. 5.00 53. 57.00 54. 2.00 55. 5.00
51. (5) 52. (5) 53. (1120) 54. (60) 55. (41)
56. 6006.00 57. 23.00 58. 24.00 59. 57.00
60. 99.00 61. 84.00 62. 221.00 63. (a) 64. (b)
65. (c) 66. (b) 67. (d) 68. (a) 69. (b)
70. (c) 71. (b) 72. (a) 73. (b) 74. (c)
75. (b) 76. (b) 77. (a) 78. (b) 79. (b)
80. (a) 81. (d) 82. (c) 83. (a) 84. (d)
85. (b) 86. (c) 87. (1012.00)
88. (405.00) 89. (1080.00) 90. (7.00)
91. (1.00) 92. (1120.00) 93. (25.00)
94. (2.00) 95. (9.00) 96. (5040.00)
97. (98.00) 98. (29.00) 99. (4.00)
100. (1.00) 101. (5005.00) 102. (1275.00)
103. (960.00) 104. (2736.00)
105. (171.00) 106. (36.00)
107. (12.00)
ANSWER KEY 133
CHAPTER -11 BINOMIAL THEOREM

A D V A N C ED O BJ EC TIV E Q UESTIO N S PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (a) 5. (b) 1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (d) 5. (d)
6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (b) 9. (c) 10. (a) 6. (c) 7. (d) 8. (c) 9. (6) 10. (8)
11. (5) 12. (646) 13. (6.20) 14. (3)
11. (d) 12. (c) 13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (b)
16. (c) 17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (b) 20. (b)
21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (a) 25. (b)
26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (c) 29. (a) 30. (a)
31. (c) 32. (c) 33. (c) 34. (b) 35. (a,b)
36. (a,c,d) 37. (a,c) 38. (3) 39. (5.06) 40. (34)
41. (5.50) 42. (-5050) 43. (a) 44. (d)
2mn  1
47.
2mn (2n  1)
Answer Key
CHAPTER -12 PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION

1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (a) 5. (a) 1. (777) 2. (9) 3. (238) 4. (924) 5. (720)
6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (c) 10. (b) 6. (96) 7. (d) 8. (16) 9. (d) 10. (a)
11. (77) 12. (100) 13. (136) 14. (52) 15. (80)
11. (c) 12. (d) 13. (a) 14. (d) 15. (d)
16. (576) 17. (5143) 18. (d) 19. (1000) 20. (c)
16. (b) 17. (b) 18. (b) 19. (b) 20. (d) 21. (d) 22. (32) 23. (45) 24. (31650)
21. (c) 22. (d) 23. (b) 24. (c) 25. (b) 25. (c) 26. (d) 27. (300) 28. (d) 29. (a)
30. (d) 31. 40.00 32. 576.00 33. 63.00
26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (d) 29. (c) 30. (a)
34. 243.00 35. 1120.00 36. 150.00 37. 102.00 38. 56.00
31. (c) 32. (c) 33. (a) 34. (b) 35. (a) 39. 180.00 40. 18915.00 41. 1086.00
36. (b) 37. (b) 38. (c) 39. (c) 40. (a) 42. 1492.00 43. 180.00 44. 30.00
41. (d) 42. (b) 43. (a) 44. (c) 45. (b) 45. 7073.00 46. 17.00 47. 6.00 48. (a)
49. (d) 50. (d) 51. (b)
46. (b) 47. (a) 48. (c) 49. (d) 50. (c)
52. (b) 53. (c) 54. (d) 55. (c) 56. (a)
51. (c) 52. (a) 53. (a) 54. (b) 55. (b) 57. (60.00) 58. (546.00) 59. (120.00)
56. (b) 57. (a) 58. (a) 59. (d) 60. (c) 60. (6860.00) 61. (32.00)
62. (1436.00) 63. (3000.00) 64. (21.00)
65. (240.00) 66. (2997.00) 67. (45.00)
68. (196.00)
69. (50400.00) 70. (81.00) 71. (105.00)
72. (a) 73. (b) 74. (c) 75. (d) 76. (a)
77. (b) 78. (b) 79. (b) 80. (d) 81. (d)
82. (a) 83. (a) 84. (a) 85. (348.00)
86. (432.00) 87. (31.00) 88. (180.00)
89. (16.00) 90. (4898.00) 91. (26664.00)
92. (44.00) 93. (360.00)
94. (944.00) 95. (413.00) 96. (16.00)
97. (72.00)
ANSWER KEY 135
CHAPTER -12 PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION


1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (a) 5. (b) 1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (c) 5. (b)
6. (b) 7. (d) 8. (c) 9. (b) 10. (c) 6. (c) 7. (a) 8. (d) 9. (a) 10. (a,b,d)
11. (c) 12. (b) 13. (d) 14. (b) 15. (c) 11. (a,b,d) 12. (5) 13. (5) 14. (625)
16. (b) 17. (b) 18. (d) 19. (a) 20. (b) 15. (30) 16. (495) 17. (1080) 18. (569.00)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (d) 24. (d) 25. (b) 19. (a) 20. (a) 21. (a) 22. (b)
26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (b) 29. (b) 30. (c)
31. (c) 32. (a) 33. (b) 34. (b) 35. (c)
36. (a) 37. (a) 38. (b) 39. (d) 40. (a,b)
41. (a,c,d) 42. (a,b,d)43. (b,c) 44. (b,c,d)
45. (b,c) 46. (b,d) 47. (b,d) 48. (a,b,c,d)
49. (a,b,d) 50. (a,d) 51. (b,c,d) 52. (141)
53. (330) 54. (771) 55. (9) 56. (296) 57. (b)
58. (a) 59. (a) 60. (n = 9 and r = 3)

XI-JEE M-3 Mathematics Final

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

XI-JEE M-3 Mathematics Final

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

XI-JEE M-3 Mathematics Final

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vedantu’s

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 12

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 17

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 24

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 32

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 128

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 50

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 56

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 67

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 75

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 130

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 86

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 90

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 97

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 101

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 132

PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION

Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 104

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 109

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 113

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 119

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 125

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 134

A circle is a locus of a point whose distance from a fixed point

g2 + f 2 – c > 0  real circle.

Every second degree equation in x & y, in which coefficient of

(c) Parametric form :

(a) Slope form : T  xx1 + yy1 + g(x + x1) + f(y + y1) + c

y = mx + c is always a tangent to the circle x² + y² = a²

2 The length of a tangent from an external point (x1, y1) to the

x  x1 radius equal to 2 times the original circle.

10. CHORD OF CONTACT 12. EQUATION OF THE CHORD JOINING TWO

The equation of the chord of the circle

NOTES : 17. RADICAL AXIS AND RADICAL CENTRE

18. FAMILY OF CIRCLES NOTES :

(x – x1)2 + (y – y1)2 + K[y – y1 – m (x – x1)] = 0 where

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Intercept made by a circle (a)  1  2 2 (b)   2 2 1

(c) (12, 24) (d) (18, 48) (d) None of these

Chords of a circle Position of two circles with respect to each other

(c)  1 2 (d) ±1 46. If the two circles (x – 1)2 + (y – 3)2 = r2 and

(a) 4  x2 + y2  64 (b) x2 + y2  25 69. The value of , for which the circle

(c) x2 + y2  25 (d) 3  x2 + y2  9 x2 + y2 + 2x + 6y + 1 = 0 inersects the circle

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

(a)  1, 5  ,  5,1 (c) 8 (d) 53

2x  y  5 lies inside the circle S, then :

B  { x, y   R  R | 4x 2  4y 2  16y  7  0} and (c) 81  C  156 (d) 100  C  165

7. A circle C touches the line x  2y at the point (2, 1) and

squares of its distances from the points  0, 0  , 1, 0  , 625 585

d 2 is equal to _____. (26-08-2021/Shift-1) 529 125

(2, 5) and the centre of the circle lies on x  2y  4. Then,

(a) Both circles pass through the centre of each other.

x 2  y 2  2x  6y  6  0 is a chord of another circle ‘C’.

x 2  y 2  10x  10y  41  0 on the circle  x  12   y  12  1 such that

(a) circles have same centre A and B lie on: (26-02-2021/Shift-2)

(b) circles have no meeting point (a) an ellipse (b) a hyperbola

(d) circles have two meeting points

Questions marked with asterisk (*) are dy ax  by  a

43. A rectangle R with end points of the one of its dies as